Type = 11 iDate=16/5/80 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  PREPARING AN OBJECTIVES TABLE   Remimeo Survival RD Tech Qual  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 16 MAY 1980 Remimeo Survival RD Tech Qual PREPARING AN OBJECTIVES TABLE OBJECTIVES: Objective processes deal with the real and observable. They are processes which call for the preclear to spot or find something exterior to himself in order to carry out the auditing command. TABLE: An arrangement of data in a definite and compact form for convenient reference. If your preclear or co-audit twin has previously received any Objective Processing, you may need to prepare an OBJECTIVES TABLE to aid the case supervisor. This table will provide an easy-to-refer-to list of the Objective processes that have been run, when they were run, how long they were run each session and what occurred while they were run. This is the format that is followed when writing up an Objectives Table: ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | PROCESS | DATE | TIME | WHAT OCCURRED | | | (When it was run) | (How long it was run | | |------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | (name of | 17 Apr 76 | 30 minutes | PC brightened up and | | process) | | | originated "I just | | | | | came totally into | | | | | Present Time. This | | | | | is incredible!" | | | | | VGIs | | | | | | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Under the process section you write down the exact Objectives that have been run starting with the first Objective run and you fill in the table (in date order) for all that have been run (or verified as having been done). It is possible that a pc has had some Objectives run more than once, so make sure that you note each time the process was run. You can look in the Folder Summary to find out when any Objective was run and which of his Pc folders the session will be in. (Your supervisor can help you on this.) For each Objective Process session given, note the process run stating its exact name, the date, the time (excluding session time spent on other actions) and a summary of what occurred. The summary of what occurred must include any cognitions the pc had, any changes in the pc that were noted and especially any data concerning the end result of the process. HCOB 16.5.80 - 2 - Don't attempt to rewrite the entire worksheet when filling in an Objectives Table, but do include brief statements of any cognitions, pc indicators and any other relevant data. Include any evident auditor errors. The attached Objectives Table sample will give you an idea of what the Objectives Table should include. The case supervisor will then use the Objectives Table in conjunction with proper folder study, as an aid in case supervising and programming. This table can save the C/S valuable hours and has the additional benefit of familiarizing the co-auditor or auditor with his pc's previously run Objective Processing. Once the Objectives Table is fully filled in and the case supervisor has studied it, it is placed in the back of the pc's current folder. It can then be referred to at any time during a pc's Objective Processing or for the programming of the case. L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER as assisted by TECH PROJECT I/C LRH:MM:mz Copyright $c 1980 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED HCOB 16.5.80 ATTACHMENT SAMPLE OBJECTIVES TABLE ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- PROCESS DATE TIME WHAT OCCURRED ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- (Objective process run) 9 Sept 68 2:35 Pc experienced changes in emotion. At end of process pc said "I feel (2 hours 3 feet behind my head! It's great 35 minutes) to be able to control your body from an exterior viewpoint" Exam: F/N, VGIs ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- (Objective process run) 11 Sept 68 1:30 Pc was bored for first half hour, said he must be flat on the process. (1 hour Then he realized he had been out of 30 min) present time and somewhat stuck in the past. Auditor continued and pc brightened up even more, gave cognition that he saw the difference between the MEST universe in present time and his mental image pictures from the past. Pc was very bright. Exam: F/N, VGIs ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- (Objective process run) 18 Sept 68 :45 Pc had lots of comm lags for the first 20 minutes. Comm lag reduced after (45 min) this. Got to a flat point and auditor ended off. No cognitions. Exam: F/N, GIs ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- (Objective process run) 19 Sept 68 1:30 Process from last session was continued. Pc went through several (1 hour periods of dopiness, then alertness 30 min) and then came out of it. Pc cognited he'd been in a fog from his days of taking drugs. Felt at end of process that he really was more here and could confront life better. Very, very good indicators. Exam: F/N, VVGIs ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- HCOB 16.5.80 - 2 - ATTACHMENT ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- PROCESS DATE TIME WHAT OCCURRED ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- (Objective process run) 12 June 75 :05 Process command was only given a few times, then the pc said "I feel good." (5 min) Auditor ended off. Exam: no F/N. Co-Audit Supervisor checks to see if the process is unflat and finds it is. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- (Objective 12 June 75 2:45 Same process continued. Pc's leg process run) which had always hurt him got better -- he volunteers an excellent success story after session and states he feels he has regained the ability to be at cause over his body. Exam: F/N, VGIs ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- (Objective 13 June 75 1:15 Pc has a nice win of feeling more in process run) communication and cause over his environment. The session is continued. Then auditor ended for supervisor assistance, as the session wasn't going as well. Co-Audit Supervisor checked if the process had been overrun, finds that it had, and rehabilitates the win the pc had. Exam: F/N, VGIs ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ETC ...  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER as assisted by TECH PROJECT I/C   Type = 11 iDate=15/5/80 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  HOW TO WRITE UP A SESSION (FOR NEW AUDITORS)   Survival RD Co-Audit Courses  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 15 MAY 1980 Survival RD Co-Audit Courses HOW TO WRITE UP A SESSION (FOR NEW AUDITORS) Every auditing session is carefully kept track of and reported on by the auditor. This issue lays out how to write up a session and gives examples of the forms that are used. Look at the forms attached to the back of this issue as often as you like, so that you have a proper balance of mass with the significance you are being presented with. The following are terms that are used in connection with auditing and writing up an auditing session: ADMINISTRATION: The action or fact of keeping auditor's reports and other records related to an auditing session. (Abbreviation: Admin) CO-AUDIT: A team of any two people who are helping each other reach a better life with Scientology or Dianetic processing. CO-AUDITOR: One who audits another co-auditor under supervision and after training at a given level. PC EXAMINER: That person in a Scientology church assigned to the duties of noting pc's statements, E-Meter phenomena and pc indicators after a session or when a pc wishes to volunteer information. CASE SUPERVISOR: That person in a Scientology church who gives instruction regarding the auditing of preclears and supervises the auditing of preclears. (Abbreviation: C/S) Proper session admin is a very important activity. As a co-auditor, you are part of a team including the case supervisor, the co-audit supervisor and the pc examiner. Every member of this team has his separate duties in ensuring your co-auditing sessions are technically correct and that accurate and agreed-upon administration procedures are followed. Part of your duties concerning the admin of your auditing sessions is to make it clear what happened in the session itself so that the session can be properly supervised by the C/S and so that an accurate record exists of what occurred. These records are kept in the pc's folder. Here are the things that are always included in your session write-up: WORKSHEET: A worksheet is supposed to he the complete running record of the session from beginning to end. (Abbreviation: W/S) HCOB 15.5.80 - 2 - AUDITOR REPORT FORM: An auditor's report form is made out at the end of each session. It gives an outline of what actions were taken during the session and the exact process commands used. (Abbreviation: ARF) SUMMARY REPORT FORM: A report written after the session on a fill-in type standard form which is simply a summarized record of what happened and what was observed during the session. (Abbreviation: SRF) EXAM REPORT: A report made out by the Examiner when the pc goes to the pc examiner after session or goes on his own volition. It contains the meter details, pc's indicators and the pc's statement. C/S: A case supervisor's direction of what to audit on a pc. C/S also stands for the action of writing the direction, meaning to "case supervise". An example of each of the above session admin terms is attached to the back of this issue. The order in which these reports are clipped together and put into the pc's folder for presentation to the case supervisor is as follows: ------------------ | 1. C/S FORM (placed on top) | | 2. EXAM REPORT | paper | 3. SUMMARY REPORT FORM clip --- | -------- | | 4. AUDITOR REPORT FORM | staple-| | | 5. WORKSHEETS (placed on bottom) | -------- ------------------ The case supervisor usually writes the C/S (case supervisor directions of what to audit on a pc) for the next session. If the co-auditor is certain of what the next session action should be, he can fill it in himself and the case supervisor will OK it providing the co-auditor has recommended the correct next action for the pc. The case supervisor also grades the session just given. He lets the auditor know how well done the session was based on how standardly it was delivered. FOLDER SUMMARY: The folder summary is a white piece of paper stapled to the left inside front cover of the pc's folder. The folder summary is a list of all of the auditing actions that have been done on a pc. It is in consecutive date order and shows what processes were audited and their end results. It includes each session's date, total time and the exam result. (Abbreviation: FS) Attached is an example of what the folder summary should look like. Extra copies of all of these forms will be available from your course admin or the organization's bookstore. HCOB 15.5.80 - 3 - All of these reports (except the session worksheets) are filled out at the end of each session. They must be written very legibly so that the case supervisor can read them and see what occurred in the session. The worksheet is written as the session is going on. It is a running record of the session and what happens during the session. The auditor does not, by any means, pay more attention to his admin than he does to his pc or to his communication cycle with his pc. He must, however, write down the main occurrences of the session. The most convenient way of keeping worksheets in a non-metered co-audit session is to have your worksheet paper on a clipboard and available for notations during the session. After the session, the co-auditor can fill in (with red ink) any details he may have missed writing down during the session. He also goes over the worksheets he wrote during the session, and clarifies any words that are not easily readable, by BLOCK PRINTING the word above the one that is hard to read, as in the following example: VERY The pc was xxxxx happy. The block printing (as with any after session clarification of a worksheet) is done in red ink. The original worksheets are never thrown away, copied, erased, deleted from, etc. in any way other than as described above. Standard admin is a vital part of the technology of auditing and is something that every good auditor adheres to and takes pride in. L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER as assisted by TECH PROJECT I/C LRH:MM:mz Copyright $c 1980 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED HCOB 15.5.80 ATTACHMENT #1 C/S FORM PAT SMITH (red) 22 Feb 80 (red) JAN JONES (red) SESSION GRADE ______________ (red) Session went very well. (red) Next C/S: 1. Reach and Withdraw on Outdoor Environment (blue) 2. Reach and Withdraw on Pc's Personal Living Area and MEST (blue) 3. Reach and Withdraw on Pc's Working Area (blue) Jan Jones (red) HCOB 15.5.80 ATTACHMENT #2 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 8 MARCH 1971 Remimeo Examiners Hat Tech Services Hat (Replaces and Revises HCO PLs of 9 May 69 and Mimeo on 16 26 Jan AD 20, "Exam Form".) sub paper EXAMINERS FORM (Important Note: This form is handled exactly as per HCO PL of 26 Jan AD20 AND NO EXAMINER MAY EXAMINE UNLESS STARRATE ON THAT PL, and HCO B 5 Mar 71 (C/S Series 25) AND AN E-METER COURSE. Students and pcs can be very upset if this post's duties are not done correctly and org pc and course results ruined.) X FLAG After Session _________________________ Qual Div ______________________ (Place) 22Feb80 Volunteered ___________________________ Date __________________________________ 12:00 pm Medical _______________________________ Time __________________________________ PC or Pre-OT Name _____________________________________________________________ Purification R/D Last Grade Attained ___________________________________________________________ Grade, Course or Action Being Attested ________________________________________ PC's Statement (write down exactly what PC says) I had a great session! _______________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ 2.3 VGIs TA Position & any BD ___________________ PC Indicators ________________________ F/N (Wide) State of Needle _______________________________________________________________ Yes F/N Indicated to PC ___________________________________________________________ Mark Brown _______________________________________ Signature of Examiner ROUTE THIS FORM TO TECH SERVICES WHICH ROUTES IT INTO THE FOLDER. WHEN ILLNESS REPORTED MAKE THIS OUT WITH A CARBON UNDER IT AND ROUTE ORIG TO T/S AND FOLDER AND CARBON TO MO OR QUAL SEC. RUSH ROUTE ANY ROLLER COASTER LATER REPORT OR SICK RPT TO FOLDER TO PREVENT C/S ERRORS. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:mes:wa:rs:nt:dr:jk:mz FOUNDER Copyright $c 1971, 1974, 1977, 1978, 1979, 1980 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED HCOB 15.5.80 ATTACHMENT #3 CO-AUDIT SESSION SUMMARY REPORT FORM The auditor checks each one off and fills in the appropriate data. DATE: 22 Feb 80 PC: Pat Smith AUDITOR: Jan Jones PROCESS RUN: Environment Locational PC GAINS: PC got into PT. SESSION OBSERVATIONS: 1. How did pc do in relation to what was run? Great. 2. Effectiveness of process: Excellent. 3. Emotional state of the pc and whether this improved: Bored. Improved to happy. 4. Any misemotion: No. 5. Preclear appearance: Neat. Well groomed. 6. Mannerisms: Twitches in mouth occasionally. 7. Mannerism changes: Stopped twitching his mouth. 8. Any change in skin tone: Got pinker. 9. Did color of eyes change? Yes Get brighter? Yes Get dull? 10. Any comm lags: Yes. 11. Any cognitions: Yes. 12. Any pains turn on? No Pains turn off? 13. Any sensations turn on? No Sensations turn off? 14. Any difficulties: No. 15. Did you complete the C/S instructions? Yes. 16. Was the pc happy at session end? Yes. HCOB 15.8.80 ATTACHMENT #4 CO-AUDIT AUDITOR'S REPORT FORM DATE 22 Feb 80 PRECLEAR Pat Smith TOTAL SESSION TIME 18 minutes AUDITOR Jan Jones ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | PROCESS | TIME | RESULTS AND COMMENTS | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | Start of Session | 11:50 | PC VGIs | | | | | | Environment Locational | | | | | | | | Clear Command -- "Look | | | | at that (object)" | | PC understood command | | | | | | Start of Process | 11:52 | | | | | | | 1. Look at that (object). | | | | | | | | | | PC cognited "I feel much more in | | | | present time!" | | | | | | End of Session | 12:08 | | | | | | | | | | | | | F/N VGIs at Exam | | | | | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- HCOB 15.5.80 ATTACHMENT #5 WORKSHEET Pat Smith 22 Feb 80 ------------------ Jan Jones (1) PC is well fed and rested | Clear command: -- yes | | "Look at that (object)" | 11:50 | | Start of Session | | PC -- VGIs | PC -- I would view EYES | object with my xxxx | Clear definitions of | 11:52 Start of Process command: | | that X | Look at that (object). (PC gives | correct definition) | Command given repetitively | about 25 times first in the | course room and then outside. | at X | (PC gives correct | PC looks at objects, becoming definition) | brighter. | | Then originates -- I feel | much more in Present Time! | | INDICATORS look X | Very good xxxxxxxxxxx (PC gives correct | definition) | | | PC very bright | | End of Session | 12:08 | | | HCOB 15.5.80 page #1 ATTACHMENT #6 FOLDER SUMMARY PC: Pat Smith ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | | 18 Mar 71 | (Name of Objective | | | process) | | time: 1 Hr | | | | Process unflat | | | | | | Exam: F/N | | | GIs | | ----------------|-----------------------|---------------|---------------------- | | | 20 Mar 71 | (Name of Objective | | | process) | | | | | time: 2 Hrs | | | 20 min | Process run to its | | | End Phenomena | | | | | | Exam: F/N | | | VGIs | | | | | ----------------|-----------------------|---------------|---------------------- | | | 21 Mar 71 | PC Declares | | | Completion of | | | (Name of Objective | | | Process | | | | | ----------------|-----------------------|---------------|---------------------- | | | 22 Feb 80 | Environment | | | Locational -- run | | time: 18 min | to E/P. | | | | | | Exam: F/N | | | VGIs | | | | | | | | ----------------|-----------------------|---------------|---------------------- | | | | | | | | | | | | HCOB 15.5.80 ATTACHMENT #7 NON-METERED CO-AUDIT AUDITOR'S REPORT FORM PRECLEAR _________________________ DATE ______________ AUDITOR _________________________ TOTAL SESSION TIME ______________ ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | | | | PROCESS | TIME | RESULTS AND COMMENTS | | | | | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- HCOB 15.5.80 ATTACHMENT #8 NON-METERED CO-AUDIT SESSION SUMMARY REPORT FORM The auditor checks each one off and fills in the appropriate data: DATE: ________________ PC: ___________________________________ AUDITOR: _____________________________ PROCESS RUN: __________________________________________________________________ PC GAINS: SESSION OBSERVATIONS: 1. How did pc do in relation to what was run? 2. Effectiveness of process: 3. Emotional state of the pc and whether this improved: 4. Any misemotion: 5. Preclear appearance: 6. Mannerisms: 7. Mannerism changes: 8. Any change in skin tone: 9. Did color of eyes change? Get brighter? Get dull? 10. Any comm lags: 11. Any cognitions: 12. Any pains turn on? Pains turn off? 13. Any sensations turn on? Sensations turn off? 14. Any difficulties: 15. Did you complete the C/S instructions? 16. Was the pc happy at session end?  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER as assisted by TECH PROJECT I/C   Type = 11 iDate=14/5/80 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=16/11/81 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  DEMONSTRATIONS   Survival RD Basic Courses  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 14 MAY 1980 Survival RD Basic Courses CORRECTED & REISSUED 16 November 1981 Correction in Script. DEMONSTRATIONS DEMONSTRATION -- Showing something by examples. DEMO -- Abbreviation for "demonstration". Part of Scientology study technology is the use of "demonstration" when a student is studying concepts and ideas. The student is often asked to show such things as definitions of terms, basic principles, etc. Two ways of demonstration that are commonly used are:. 1. Demo Kit Demonstration -- meaning the use of various small objects such as corks, caps, paper clips, batteries, etc. These objects are kept in a box or container called a "demo kit". Each student should have one. The Pieces are used while studying, to represent the things in the material being read. Demonstrating helps make concepts and ideas more real. A demo kit adds mass (physical matter), reality and doingness to the significance and so helps the student to study. When a student is required to do a demonstration using his demo kit, he simply takes whatever demo kit items he wishes and has them represent the ideas he is studying. An example of this is: The student is reading about how a student and his twin should sit across from each other, each with a dictionary and a demo kit. To demonstrate this, he picks a blue battery and decides that that represents the student. He picks out a red battery and decides that represents his twin. He places the batteries across from each other. He then picks out two pennies which he decides will represent the demo kits and he places a penny (demo kit) beside each of the batteries (students). He then picks out two paper clips which he decides will represent dictionaries and places them next to each of the batteries (students). The student now has sitting in front of him some actual objects that represent what he has read and he feels much better because the information isn't just in his head. The demo kit pieces can be moved around by the student if he is studying about an activity or an action. If a demo is being done for a twin or the supervisor, the student explains what the objects represent and what he is doing with them (but the idea is to actually have the objects showing any action, not the student's explanations). 2. Clay Demonstration -- meaning the use of clay in demonstrating or representing facts, ideas, procedures, etc. that the student is studying about. Clay demos also HCOB 14.5.80 - 2 - add mass, reality and doingness to the significance and so help the student to study. Clay demos give a proper balance of mass and significance. They are used to teach a student to apply. The student is given a word or auditing action or situation to demonstrate. He then does this in clay, labeling each part. The clay SHOWS the thing. It is not just a blob of clay with a label on it. Use small strips of paper for labels. The whole demonstration then has a label of what it is. On the checkout, the student removes the overall label. The student must be silent. The examiner must not ask any questions. The examiner just looks and figures out what it is. He then tells the student who then shows the examiner the label. If the examiner did not see what it was, it is a flunk. Clay table must not be reduced to significance by the student explaining or answering questions. Nor is it reduced to significance by long-winded labels of individual parts. The clay shows it, not the label. The clay demonstrates it. The student must learn the difference between mass and significance. For example, the student has to demonstrate a pencil. He makes a thin roll of clay which is surrounded by another layer of clay -- the thin roll sticking slightly out of one end. On the other end goes a small cylinder of clay. The roll is labeled "lead". The outer layer is labeled "wood". The small cylinder is labeled "rubber". Then a label is made for the whole thing: "pencil". On checkout, the student removes "pencil" before the examiner can see it. If the examiner can look at it and say, "It's a pencil," the student passes. If clay table training is not brightening that student up, then the above is NOT being done. Someone is in such a rush that real learning is being put aside for the sake of speed. "Demo" on a checksheet usually refers to using a demo kit. "Clay Demo" on a checksheet refers to using clay to demonstrate per the Procedure given above. A well done demonstration, which actually does demonstrate, will produce a marvellous change in a student. And he will retain the data. L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER as assisted by Technical Project I/C LRH:MM:nsp Copyright $c 1980 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER as assisted by Technical Project I/C   Type = 11 iDate=12/5/80 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  DRUGS AND OBJECTIVE PROCESSES DRUGS AND THE BACKTRACK   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 12 MAY 1980 Remimeo DRUGS AND OBJECTIVE PROCESSES DRUGS AND THE BACKTRACK There was a discovery about a decade ago that drug withdrawal symptoms could be eased by objective processes. Such processes as the CCHs, 8-C, remedies of havingness and even TRs were found to aid a person in coming off drugs and became part of standard routines to accomplish this. In 1973 another observation was made, that the current civilization seemed to be regressing. "Regression" means a "return to earlier or more infantile behavior patterns". Men's shoe styles had become little boy shoe styles; the most popular women singers were singing lullabies; cars were being treated like toys and abused rather than maintained. More recently it was observed that life attitudes had become less responsible, that "playing" took a higher value, that productivity was declining steeply, that people seemed to require more and more care by the state -- and all of these things seemed to indicate that people were getting stuck at or going back to childhood or infancy. There is another observation: people taking drugs tend to go backtrack. Sometimes, when seeking to get a druggie to run engrams, he will balk and adversely react; apparently he has already hit the backtrack while on "trips" and it terrified him. On such evidences one could construct a theory that drugs tend to throw people out of present time and park them on the backtrack. Experiments of the late forties did show that certain drugs and gases did throw people backtrack and into engrams. The "visions" that turn on under the influence of such a drug as peyote or when inhaling volcanic gases are probably simply the restimulation of backtrack. (It should be noted in passing that inducing engrams with drugs and gases in the hope of running them out does NOT work -- one only runs them IN.) So it can workably be assumed that drugs do throw people out of present time. OBJECTIVE PROCESSES The thing that characterizes OBJECTIVE processes is that they bring about interaction between the individual and the existing physical universe. This is different than SUBJECTIVE processes in that these interact between the individual and his part or himself. Objective processes do several things: they remedy havingness, they locate the person in his environment, they establish direct communication with the auditor and, last but not least, they bring a person to present time. "Present time" is a very important factor in mental and spiritual sanity and ability. A human being can be stuck in literally thousands of different past moments. His behavior HCOB 12.5.80 - 2 - and attitudes are influenced by such past incidents and experiences. As a matter of fact a person can be totally regressed and can be in an incident of the past to the entire exclusion of present time. As an example, if you were to walk through an insane asylum and say, to each patient you met, "Come up to present time", as an authoritative command, you would get a small percentage of complete recoveries. In one instance when this was done, those on whom this had been done got up in "group session" that night and volunteered how glad they were to be here. What would have happened is that the person would have come out of his past track incident or incidents and would have moved up to present time and sanity. While this process is not a "sure cure" for all insane, it does demonstrate the point. Those on whom it did not work can be supposed to have been just too mired down in their backtrack. Drugs, of course, do not only regress a person. They do other things. And amongst these is a communication dulling. This is best observed when drugs are seen to reduce pain. This is simple a communication shut off. Drugs can also temporarily restimulate (before they ruin them) body glands and produce momentary feelings of well being. Part of this is probably a communication shut off from the bank. Drugs can also speed up the burning of reserves of vitamins; alcohol probably burns up rapidly all reserves of Vitamin B1; other drugs also burn up all available niacin and C. This speeded burn up can also bring about a temporary feeling of well being. But when the reserves are gone, the delusions called delirium tremens (D.T.s) and withdrawal symptoms are nightmares indeed. But this again is simply the bank caving in on someone and he is now parked back on the track, not only with the nightmare but with the incidents in the past which caused them. CONCLUSION Objective processes, properly chosen and run, bring the person gradually more and more into present time. As the process is orienting the person in the present time of the physical universe and as this present time is not threatening, he has a time point and a location point from which to sort out his confusions. His attention has been pulled out of his bank and has been placed on the physical universe around him. Because it is the backtrack that is causing his aberration, putting his attention on the physical universe tends to de-aberrate him. The backtrack contains mass and taking his attention off of this backtrack mass tends to lose it for him. But the masses around him in the physical universe substitute for the track mass and he receives a remedy of havingness. Objective processes are not in themselves a total answer; a certain amount of subjective processes must be run to remove the reasons he is being called back into the past. Vitamin, HCOB 12.5.80 - 3 - mineral and nutrition reserves must also be replaced or the body also pulls him in and affects him. This tells you as well why "mest work" and exercise have a de-aberrating effect upon a person. They are a sort of objective process in themselves even though they do not replace objectives. Objectives also by-pass misunderstood words and significances. This makes them runnable with a minimum of word clearing and error. Having an idea of why objective processes work assists one in applying them. One can see the person change masses, become located, and above that coma bit by bit more and more into present time. It is not that the physical universe itself is therapeutic. It is that it provides a single reference point including time, location and mass. Without objectives, no being is likely to recover in his infinity of future. L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER LRH:bk Copyright $c 1980 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER   Type = 11 iDate=11/5/80 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Survival Rundown Series 11 FINAL REACH AND WITHDRAW STEP   Survival RD Only  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 11 MAY 1980 Survival RD Only Survival Rundown Series 11 FINAL REACH AND WITHDRAW STEP The Order Versus Disorder step of the Survival RD, which precedes this R/W step, 8-Cs the individual into putting order into any disorder encountered. This final Reach and Withdraw step will then raise the pc's Havingness and ARC towards the objects/areas he has now put into order. It is run exactly as laid out in HCOB 7 May 1980 Survival RD Series 7 REACH AND WITHDRAW ON MEST LOCATIONS. The difference between this R/W step and the earlier one on this rundown is what the R/W is run on, as laid out below: 0. Upon completion of the Order Versus Disorder step of the Survival Rundown, the C/S inspects the pc folder and lists any MEST objects or areas that showed up during the Survival RD as being disorganized or disorderly. (NOTE: The C/S should list the above items of step 0 in order of charge or disorganization/disorder if at all possible.) 1. Reach and Withdraw is then run on the first item on the list drawn up by the C/S, to EP. 2. The pc is taken to exams. 3. Steps #1 & 2 are repeated for each item listed. Although it is optimum to have the pc verified as F/Ning at Exams after each Reach & Withdraw process run on this step, the auditor may find that it is inconvenient to travel back to where the Examiner is after each R/W is run. In this case it is not necessary to have the pc get an exam each time, as long as no problems arise. It may also become too repetitious to have the pc get an exam after each final R/W if there is a list of 3 or more items. In this case use your judgement. If it is convenient and the pc seems fine about it then have him go to the Examiner each time. Otherwise, apply the above. L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER As assisted by Technical Project I/C LRH:MM:djm Copyright $c 1980 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER As assisted by Technical Project I/C   Type = 11 iDate=9/5/80 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Survival Rundown Series 9 HANDLING OF DISORGANIZATION PROCESS   Survival RD Only  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 9 MAY 1980 Survival RD Only Survival Rundown Series 9 HANDLING OF DISORGANIZATION PROCESS This process enables a pc to see how he can easily put organization into disorganization. R2-69 and R2-22 bring a pc up to causatively placing an object somewhere and being able to have his attention on more than one object at a time. The Handling of Disorganization Process has two steps. Step A is geared towards the realization that (a) objects can exist in an orderly fashion, (b) one can do something with objects and (c) it is a simple task to return an object to its original location after doing something with it. Step B of this process leads the pc to the realization that he can self determinedly organize and locate MEST objects and return them to their original location once used. PROCESS #1 0. Auditor and pc are seated at a table with a container of at least 8 objects. 1A. The auditor puts the objects on the table in front of the pc in a neatly arranged order. 1B. Auditor points to one of the objects and tells the pc to pick it up and do something with it. 1C. The auditor acknowledges the pc and holds out his hand for the pc to return the object to the auditor's hand. 1D. The auditor then returns the object to exactly the same place the pc originally picked it up from. 1E. Repeat steps B through D until the pc has a realization. PROCESS #2 0. Auditor and pc are seated at a table with a container of at least 5 objects. 2A. The auditor has the pc put the objects on the table in a neatly arranged order. (NOTE: The pc chooses where and and how the objects are arranged.) 2B. The auditor tells the pc to choose one object. 2C. The auditor tells the pc to pick it up and do something with it. 2D. The auditor tells the pc to put the object back in exactly the same place he originally picked it up from. HCOB 9.5.80 - 2 - 2E. Repeat steps 2B through 2D until the pc has a realization. This process is very easy to run. Your pc may turn on yawning and go through some slight dopiness but this is common. Just continue the process until this turns off. You may also see your pc experience various emotions from boredom up to playing games. You should have a very interesting time of it. L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER As assisted by Technical Project I/C LRH:MM:nsp Copyright $c 1980 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER As assisted by Technical Project I/C   Type = 11 iDate=8/5/80 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Survival Rundown Series 8 CCH 0 LOCATIONAL PROCESSING STEP   Survival RD Only  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 8 MAY 1980 Survival RD Only Survival Rundown Series 8 CCH 0 LOCATIONAL PROCESSING STEP (Ref: Professional Auditors Bulletin #133 PROCEDURE CCH -- under "CCH 0") This is step 4 of the Survival Rundown. CCH 0 is to be done in the first CCH session you give, before you start Objective ARC. It can be used in following sessions if needed but it is not a substitute for Ruds and if your pc has out ruds that would interfere with any session and prevent your properly running the Objectives, you should send your pc to your Co-Audit Supervisor. The process commands for the Locational Processing step of CCH 0 which you will be running are: 1. Call the pc's attention to the room a. Have the pc look around the room. b. Ask the pc if it's all right with him to be audited in the room. c. If it's OK go onto the next step; if it's not OK, find out why and handle it. 2. Call the pc's attention to the auditing environment a. Have the pc locate his auditor. b. R-Fac the pc that you are going to be running an Objective Process on him and you will now begin the process. You would then proceed with the exact process steps of whatever Objective you are C/Sed to run on your pc for that session. If you have any questions or run into any trouble, go see your Co-Audit Supervisor for assistance. L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER as assisted by Tech Project I/C for the BOARDS OF DIRECTORS of the CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY BDCS:LRH:MM:nsp Copyright $c 1980 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER as assisted by Tech Project I/C for the BOARDS OF DIRECTORS of the CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY   Type = 11 iDate=7/5/80 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Survival Rundown Series 7 REACH AND WITHDRAW ON MEST LOCATIONS   Survival RD Only  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 7 MAY 1980 Survival RD Only Survival Rundown Series 7 REACH AND WITHDRAW ON MEST LOCATIONS Reach and Withdraw is a very simple but extremely powerful method of getting a person familiarized and in communication with things so that he can be more at cause over and in control of them. One would not expect a person to be at cause over or to have much control or understanding of or skill in something with which he was not familiar. The keynote of familiarity is communication. Reaching and withdrawing are two very fundamental actions in this universe. By REACH we mean touching or taking hold of. It is defined as "to get to", "come to" and/or "arrive at". By WITHDRAW we mean move back from, let go. Life itself is composed of reaching and withdrawing. Communication is actually based on reach and withdraw. A person is out of communication with something because he is withdrawing from it and is not about to reach out or contact any part of it. If a person cannot reach and withdraw from a thing he will be the effect of that thing. A person who cannot reach and withdraw has no space. Everything is caved in on him. And this is awfully true in these druggie contemporary times. If a person can reach for something and withdraw from it he could be said to be in communication with that thing. To be in communication with something is to be at cause over it. A highly effective action called "Reach and Withdraw" has been developed to bring a person into communication with and more at cause over objects, people, spaces, boundaries and situations. It also extroverts a person from something he tends to be introverted into. The commands for Reach and Withdraw are: 1. "Reach that _______ ." 2. "Withdraw from that _______ ." The following commands may be substituted if the wording is more appropriate to the particular person, place or thing being addressed: 1. "Touch that _______ ." 2. "Let go of that _______ ." HCOB 7.5.80 - 2 - A person, place or thing is named in the blank and the commands are given alternately (1, 2, 1, 2, and so on) repetitively, with an acknowledgement given after the execution of each command. This is done on that one thing until the person has a minor win or 3 consecutive sets of commands with no change in the person's motions or attitude. Then another person, place or thing is chosen and the commands are taken to a win on that item and so on. When the person has a win or cognition (sudden realization about something) and good indicators on the whole area being addressed, the Reach and Withdraw process is ended. When running Reach and Withdraw on another, always point to the object (or person, space, etc.) each time you give a command so that there will be no mistake made by the person you are giving the command to. You also walk around with the person you are doing the Reach and Withdraw on, ensuring that he actually does get in physical contact with the points or areas of objects, spaces and boundaries. In choosing objects, you usually progress from the smaller to the larger objects available. You can also include walls and floors and other parts of the environment. We used to do Reach and Withdraw on ship stewards by having them walk into the dining room and walk out of the dining room over and over. This is used when you're running Reach and Withdraw on a room or a space rather than an object. Of course, we also included doing Reach and Withdraw on the other objects connected with the steward's duties. REACH AND WITHDRAW ON THE SURVIVAL RUNDOWN On the Survival Rundown there are three specific areas that you will be doing Reach and Withdraw on. These are the steps that you follow: 1. Clear the words "Reach" and "Withdraw" with the person, using the definitions given on page 1 of this issue. This is done by you defining the words for the person and actually physically demonstrating them for him so that he will understand what he is supposed to do. 2. Do reach and withdraw on the following: A. The outdoor environment B. The person's personal living area and belongings C. The person's working area. You do the Reach and Withdraw on the first one of the above until the person has a win or cognition and good indicators on the whole area being addressed and then you take him to the examiner, write up what occurred and turn it in to your co-audit supervisor and if all is OK, you then go on to the next area listed above, etc. If you need any help while doing the above, go to your Co-Audit Supervisor. Reach and Withdraw is very easy to do. It is enjoyable for both the person receiving it and the person administering it and has very valuable results. HCOB 7.5.80 - 3 - L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER LRH:nsp Copyright $c 1980 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER   Type = 11 iDate=6/5/80 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Survival Rundown Series 6 ENVIRONMENT LOCATIONAL   Survival RD Only  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 6 MAY 1980 Survival RD Only Survival Rundown Series 6 ENVIRONMENT LOCATIONAL (Ref: ABILITY 73 May 58 ASSISTS IN SCIENTOLOGY PAB 153 1 Feb 59 CCH SCIENTOLOGY CLEAR PROCEDURE Issue I -- STEP EIGHT HCOB 2 Nov 57RA AN OBJECTIVE RUNDOWN) Rev. 22.2.75 The purpose of this process is to help the individual locate things and himself in his environment, thus it is called an "environment locational". This process will get the preclear into communication with his environment and will extrovert him. This is an Objective process. "OBJECTIVE: (Dictionary Definition) 'Of or having to do with a material object as distinguished from a mental concept, idea or belief.' Means here and now objects in PT.... "SUBJECTIVE: (Dictionary Definition 2nd meaning) 'Proceeding from or taking place in an individual's mind.' "Look around or physical contact processes are obviously 'Objective'. Recall, think, remember or return on the time track processes are obviously 'Subjective'. "Pcs who have been on drugs obviously have to be run on Objective, not Subjective, processes. "Anyone can be brought more into present time with Objective processes." (HCOB 2 Nov 57RA AN OBJECTIVE RUNDOWN.) CLEARING THE COMMAND It is important in any processing that the preclear understand the words being used and the command itself. Therefore the first step in using any command for the first time is the clearing of it. This is simply done by clearing each word in the command, starting with the last word, and then clearing the command itself. In this process for example, the auditor clears the word "that" then "at" then "look" by asking the pc "What is the definition of the word _______ ?". If the pc is not sure or incorrect (he need only know the definition of how it is being used in the command you are clearing), you have him clear the appropriate definition in the dictionary. You then clear the command by asking "What does the command (question) _______ mean to you?". THE PROCESS 1. Take your pc to any place in his environment. 2. Tell your pc that you are going to run a Locational Process on him and that he is free to tell you anything that may occur while the process is being run. HCOB 6.5.80 - 2 - 3. a. Run the command "LOOK AT THAT (something visible in his environment)." b. Indicate each thing you are telling the pc to look at by pointing to it. 4. When the pc has done the command, acknowledge him and repeat the command, indicating a different thing. 5. Repeat steps 3 & 4 until the pc has a cognition and VGIs. (Various locations may be used as desired.) 6. Bring your pc to the examiner. 7. Write up what occurred while running the process and hand it in to your co-audit supervisor. This process may take just several minutes or it may take a number of sessions. "If running a Locational turns on a somatic it must be run until the somatic is flat. Therefore, the auditor has no business attempting Locational or getting the pc involved unless he intends to do something about it." If you have any questions as to what to do or how to handle something that has come up while running the process, go to your co-audit supervisor for assistance. L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER as assisted by TECH PROJECT I/C for the BOARDS OF DIRECTORS of the CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY BDCS:LRH:MM:nsp Copyright $c 1980 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER as assisted by TECH PROJECT I/C for the BOARDS OF DIRECTORS of the CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY   Type = 11 iDate=5/5/80 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Survival Rundown Series 5 CONTINUATION OF DAILY VITAMINS & EXERCISE   Survival RD Only MLOs  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 5 MAY 1980 Survival RD Only MLOs Survival Rundown Series 5 CONTINUATION OF DAILY VITAMINS & EXERCISE (Ref: HCOB 6 Feb 78RA THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN REPLACES THE SWEAT PROGRAM HCOB 1 May 80 SRD Series 1 THE SURVIVAL RUNDOWN HCOB 2 May 80 I SRD Series 2 SURVIVAL RUNDOWN PC PROGRAM) VITAMINS A continuation of the vitamins, minerals, oil vegetables and Cal-Mag, at least at the rate of recommended daily requirements in balanced amounts is continued after the purification Rundown on the Survival Rundown per the above referenced HCOB (HCOB 6 Feb 78RA), page 18 under "End phenomena". The vitamins taken should be determined on an individual basis based on what the person needs physically to remain healthy. It has been found for example, that some do not need to continue the intake of oil and Cal-Mag throughout the Survival Rundown. EXERCISE A continuation of the daily exercise discipline is also carried out on the Survival Rundown. The daily time spent exercising will vary, depending on what the individual feels he needs to stay healthy. During the piloting of the Survival Rundown the minimum time spent daily was 15-30 minutes and the exercise consisted of activities such as running, brisk walks, hand ball, swimming and weight-lifting. Twinning on these daily exercises is advised. DAILY REPORTS Daily Reports are filled in by everyone on the Survival Rundown for Case Supervision data and full information on the continuation of the daily vitamins and exercise is reported. This also should include any comments the individual has on how these activities are going and any difficulties or wins that are experienced. The idea is to continue to lead a healthy life with proper nutrition, sleep and exercise. When an individual has a properly cared for, well exercised body his attention is to that degree freed up for spiritual gains. HCOB 5.5.80 - 2 - L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER As Assisted by Technical Pjt In Charge for the BOARDS OF DIRECTORS of the CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY BDCS:LRH:MM:nsp Copyright $c 1980 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER As Assisted by Technical Pjt In Charge for the BOARDS OF DIRECTORS of the CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY   Type = 11 iDate=4/5/80 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Survival Rundown Series 4 C/S Series 110 C/SING THE SURVIVAL RUNDOWN   SURVIVAL RD C/Ses Co-Audit Sups Review Auditors  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 4 MAY 1980 SURVIVAL RD C/Ses Co-Audit Sups Review Auditors Survival Rundown Series 4 C/S Series 110 C/SING THE SURVIVAL RUNDOWN Ref: HCOB 1 May 1980 SRD Series 1 THE SURVIVAL RUNDOWN HCOB 2 May 80 I SRD Series 2 SURVIVAL RUNDOWN PC PROGRAM HCOB 2 May 80 II SRD Series 3 SURVIVAL RUNDOWN ADMINISTRATION HCOB 19 Mar 78 "QUICKIE OBJECTIVES" PROGRAMMING The C/S does not robotically program pcs for the Survival Rundown. The majority of pcs do need it and should get it at an appropriate place in their program, the best time being immediately following the Purification Rundown. In some cases it is best to continue a pc on his current program. The full use of the C/S Series will be necessary to determine this. It is not the intent on the Survival Rundown to run already EPed objectives and grind the pc into the ground. Objectives are verified and rehabbed or run in the correct program sequence. PURIFICATION RD VERIFICATION It is essential to the success of the Survival RD that any pc routed onto it is a SUCCESSFUL Purification Rundown completion. By successful is meant -- he has had the EP of the Purif RD per HCOB 6 Feb 78RA PURIFICATION RUNDOWN REPLACES THE SWEAT PROGRAM. Check the pc's completion routing form and success story to verify he's an actual completion. If things look very amiss, get the pc's purif RD FESed by a trained, competent purif C/S. REVIEW The conditional review step of the Survival RD is fully covered in C/S Series 109. If this step is needed it must not he brushed off. Do thorough folder studies. Make sure the HCOB 4.5.80 - 2 - FES is in PT and that you can see what actions the case may need. Get whatever is reading on repair lists handled fully. Get any incomplete processes completed. Fully handle any PTSness as the pc won't make it on the Survival RD with unhandled PTSness. Review actions may also need to be done once the pc has gotten into the Survival RD Co-Audit actions. Several of the pilot cases had various past BPC show up while on the later RD actions. This happens because the Objective Processes themselves unburden the case further and BPC that may not have been available when first put onto the Survival RD can show up as the case is in essence becoming "auditable" for the first time. This must be watched for. OBJECTIVES TABLES The Co-Auditors on the Survival RD are trained on the action of making up Objectives Tables. This is covered in HCOB 16 May 80 PREPARING AN OBJECTIVES TABLE. The Co-Auditor whose pc has previously received Objectives can be requested to make up an Objectives Table for the C/S, listing each Objective Process run, when it was run, what occurred on the process, etc. The C/S can use the Objectives Table along with studying the sessions where needed, to program the pc's Objectives on the Survival RD. Objectives that were obviously not quickied would be rehabbed if necessary. If the pc has a lot of charge on his Objective Auditing you may need to C/S for an L1C on his Objectives before having the verify & rehab/ flatten step done. The Objectives Table is a very useful tool for C/Ses but must not be used in the place of folder study. The C/S must be familiar with all of the Objective process references listed on the attachment to HCOB 1 May 80 THE SURVIVAL RUNDOWN so that he can correctly adjudicate whether any previously run Objectives were taken to their proper End Phenomena. PCs WHO PROTEST THE RD You may encounter some Purification grads who protest doing the Survival RD. These will usually fall into 3 categories: 1. Those who need case repair. The first step after the completion of the Purification Rundown is a Review cycle (where needed) and it is certain that when a pc has any past bad auditing or cramming, any incomplete process or unacknowledged state, he will need that handled. Whatever it may be, you can easily locate it as a C/S by folder study and a C/S 53 assessment. If this is the case and the review cycle is done correctly, the pc will then feel fine about doing the Survival RD. 2. Those who have been previously run or O/R on Objectives or O/R on Objective processes as a whole. The first thing that must be done is to R-factor the pc that he will NOT be receiving any Objectives he has already EPed. HCOB 4.5.80 - 3 - There are some cases who have had several batteries of Objectives run on them. If this is the case with any pc you have who is protesting doing the Survival RD you must check for any O/R on Objectives and/or any unacknowledged state attained on Objectives and rehab or Date/Locate as needed. It may just require an indication of the fact that the pc's Objectives have been O/R, if this is obvious by folder study. The important factor is that you will have no success with the Survival RD unless any outnesses on previously run Objectives get indicated and handled appropriately. 3. Those who are totally set up for Solo Auditing and have been programmed for the Solo Levels as their next step. If a pc in this category protests the Survival RD, don't push him. Continue him on the program he has already been R-factored on. ACKNOWLEDGING WINS AND STATES ATTAINED C/Ses are going to have to consciously shift their approach on cases that have completed the Purification Rundown. The main thing that you have to realize is that you are now dealing with unsuppressed cases. They respond exactly the way they are supposed to. They make gains much more rapidly than they did before the Purif RD and this has to be watched for. In the piloting of the Survival Rundown, it was found that many pcs began originating wins or states of release which they had achieved earlier in auditing that were never properly acknowledged. On the Survival RD steps themselves, the pcs experienced life-changing wins and also began going exterior with exceptional ease. All of these things must be watched for closely by the C/S. They show up in the student's DRs, exam statements and session worksheets. Per HCOB 21 July 73 RECOVERING STUDENTS AND PCs -- "Invalidation of case or gains includes being made to go on past a win. This acts as an invalidation. Some pcs who made it are hung up from then on out because no one asked them to declare it. Remedy is to get it declared." CAUTIONS The following is a list of situations which may crop uP during the Survival RD that must be watched for and handled: 1. Int going out 2. Unhandled PTSness 3. Unhandled Repair 4. Previous incomplete processes needing completion 5. Past unhandled ethics situations needing handling (The Survival RD raises one's ethics level which sometimes brings to light some past out-ethics which the individual then needs to handle.) HCOB 4.5.80 - 4 - 6. A Survival RD step acting as an O/R or unnecessary action 7. Mutual Out Ruds/Ethics between co-audit twins (Handled per HCOB 17 Feb 74 C/S Series 91 MUTUAL OUT RUDS and HCOB 21 Aug 79 TWINNING.) UNFLAT OBJECTIVES Although it may not be commonly recognized, unflat Objectives really take their toll on a case. The Survival RD picks up unflat Objectives and sets a case straight. In the piloting of the Survival RD there were several cases where the pc felt that he had some unexplainable case problem and had gone into apathy about moving up the Bridge. Once the unflat Objectives were fully flattened, the cases experienced full case resurgences and pc originations of "I now feel I can move up the Bridge!" So don't underestimate the power of Objective processing: It is an essential step of full case handling for all cases. C/SING CO-AUDITORS When you C/S the Survival RD for co-auditors you must ensure you are familiar with the tech on co-audits and how they are run. Realize that these auditors are green and are co-auditing on this RD on a "read-it, drill-it, do-it" basis. The co-auditors must not be put down with invalidations and accusations and injustices but handled with patience and validation per HCOB 22 Jan 77 IN-TECH, THE ONLY WAY TO ACHIEVE IT. When a co-auditor makes an auditing error, you correct him with the use of Pink Sheets from the approach of how one handles a green auditor (per C/S Series 63 C/SING FOR NEW AUDITORS OR VETERANS). Be very familiar with the materials on the Survival RD TRs AND CO-AUDIT CHECKSHEET so that you know what data the co-auditors can be held responsible for. The Survival Rundown is a fabulous new RD. Get yourself familiar with all of the materials it encompasses and C/S it standardly. You can change lives with it. And you will! L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER as assisted by TECH PROJECT I/C LRH:MM:mz Copyright $c 1980 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER as assisted by TECH PROJECT I/C   Type = 11 iDate=3/5/80 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  PC INDICATORS  Type = 12 iDate=26/4/69 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Remimeo Tech Qual All Auditors C/Ses  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 3 MAY 1980 (Cancels BTB 26 April 1969, Reiss. 7.7.74, BAD INDICATORS) Remimeo Tech Qual All Auditors C/Ses PC INDICATORS References: HCOB 3 May 1962R ARC BREAKS, MISSED WITHHOLDS Rev. 5.9.78 HCOB 28 Dec 196S ROUTINE VI, INDICATORS, PART ONE: GOOD INDICATORS HCOB 29 Jul 1964 SCN I to IV, GOOD INDICATORS AT LOWER LEVELS HCOB 7 May 1969R FLOATING NEEDLE Iss. V, Rev. 15.7.77 HCOB 14 May 1969 F/N AND ERASURE HCOB 21 Jul 1978 WHAT IS A FLOATING NEEDLE? HCOB 16 Jun 1970 WHAT THE C/S IS DOING C/S Series 6 HCOB 23 May 71R RECOGNITION OF RIGHTNESS Iss. VIII OF THE BEING HCOB 22 Sep 1971 THE THREE GOLDEN RULES OF C/S Series 61 THE C/S, HANDLING AUDITORS HCOB 25 Sep 1971RA TONE SCALE IN FULL Rev. 4.4.74 HCOB 18 Sep 1967 SCALES BTB 6 Nov 1972RA Auditor Admin Series 11RA Iss. IV THE EXAM REPORT HCO PL 8 Mar 1971 EXAMINER FORM HCOB 18 Mar 1974R E-METERS, SENSITIVITY ERRORS BTB 7 Nov 72R Auditor Admin Series 20R, Iss. V MISCELLANEOUS REPORTS In this new issue, Bad Indicators have been reviewed and reorganized, and an entirely new list of Good Indicators has been introduced. INDICATORS: DEFINITION AND USE INDICATE: To direct attention to, point to or point out; show. -- Webster's New World Dictionary of the American Language INDICATOR: A person or thing that indicates. -- Webster's New World Dictionary of the American Language AN "INDICATOR" IS A CONDITION OR CIRCUMSTANCE ARISING IN A SESSION (OR BEFORE OR AFTER IT FOR THAT MATTER) WHICH INDICATES WHETHER THE SESSION (OR CASE) IS RUNNING WELL OR BADLY. IT IS SOMETHING ONE OBSERVES. OBNOSIS means observing the obvious. It is something you do with your eyes. And your meter. HCOB 3.5.80 - 2 - Indicators are used to program the case. Good indicators mean keep it going. Bad indicators mean correction must be done. You have to be able to SEE them, KNOW what they are and write them down in the worksheets when they occur. BAD INDICATORS 1. CHART OF HUMAN EVALUATION. Pc not moving up the Tone Scale in an intensive or during a program. 2. CHART OF HUMAN EVALUATION. Pc's chronic tone unchanging despite one or more intensives. 3. CHART OF HUMAN EVALUATION. Pc's chronic tone dropping despite intensives. 4. WORKSHEETS. MISCELLANEOUS REPORTS. Pc not wanting more auditing. 5. WORKSHEETS. MISCELLANEOUS REPORTS. Pc protesting another session. 6. EXAM REPORTS. OBNOSIS. Pc looking worse after session. 7. WORKSHEETS. MISCELLANEOUS REPORTS. Pc doesn't seem to have time to get audited. 8. WORKSHEETS. METER. Pc not able to locate incidents easily. 9. CHART OF HUMAN EVALUATION. WORKSHEETS. OBNOSIS. Pc less certain about things than he/she was formerly. 10. HUMAN CHART OF EVALUATION. WORKSHEETS. MISCELLANEOUS REPORTS. Pc not doing as well in life as he/she was. 11. METER. WORKSHEETS. Pc's somatics don't seem to blow or erase. 12. MISCELLANEOUS REPORTS. ETHICS REPORTS. Pc in ethics trouble after last auditing. 13. WORKSHEETS. METER. Pc protesting auditing actions. 14. WORKSHEETS. OBNOSIS. Pc wandering all over the track, unable to stay with an incident to handle. 15. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. OBNOSIS. Pc misemotional at session end. 16. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. MISCELLANEOUS REPORTS. Pc demanding unusual solutions. 17. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. MISCELLANEOUS REPORTS. Pc trying to explain condition to auditor or others, either verbally or by writing notes. 18. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. Pc continuing to complain of somatics after they have been run. 19. WORKSHEETS. MISCELLANEOUS REPORTS. EXAM REPORTS. Pc self-auditing after session. 20. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. MISCELLANEOUS REPORTS. Pc dependence on medicine not lessening. HCOB 3.5.80 - 3 - 21. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. MISCELLANEOUS REPORTS. Pc continuing other practices. 22. OBNOSIS. EXAM REPORTS. Skin tone dull. 23. OBNOSIS. EXAM REPORTS. Eyes dull. 24. OBNOSIS. EXAM REPORTS. Pc lethargic. 25. TONE SCALE. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. OBNOSIS. Pc not becoming more cheerful under auditing. 26. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. MISCELLANEOUS REPORTS. Pc wanting special auditing. 27. METER. WORKSHEETS. No Tone Arm action on running incidents or getting audited. 28. WORKSHEETS. Pc not cogniting. 29. OBNOSIS. WORKSHEETS. Pc dispersed. 30. OBNOSIS. METER. WORKSHEETS. Pc overwhelmed. 31. OBNOSIS. WORKSHEETS. Pc bored with auditing. 32. OBNOSIS. MISCELLANEOUS REPORTS. Pc not available for sessions. 33. OBNOSIS. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. Pc tired. 34. OBNOSIS. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. Pc has attention on auditor. 35. WORKSHEETS. OBNOSIS. Pc not wanting to run process or incident. 36. WORKSHEETS. OBNOSIS. MISCELLANEOUS REPORTS. Pc taking drugs or excessive alcohol. 37. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. MISCELLANEOUS REPORTS. Pc not sure auditing works for him/her. 38. CHART OF HUMAN EVALUATION. WORKSHEETS. Pc not handling environment more easily. 39. MEDICAL OFFICER REPORTS. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. MISCELLANEOUS REPORTS. Pc ill after last session. (Usually a list error.) 40. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. OBNOSIS. Pc critical of auditor or organizations. (Means Missed Withholds.) 41. WORKSHEETS. OBNOSIS. Pc dopey or boiling off. 42. GRADE CHART. Pc not going up to the next grade or level. 43. METER. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. Pc has dirty needle. 44. METER. WORKSHEETS. Pc gets no reads on the meter or has a stuck needle. 45. METER. WORKSHEETS. Despite corrections for False TA, the pc has a chronic high TA. 46. METER. WORKSHEETS. Despite corrections for low TA, pc has a chronic low TA. HCOB 3.5.80 - 4 - 47. METER. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. No F/Ns. 48. METER. WORKSHEETS. No change of meter characteristic. 49. EXAM REPORTS. No change in Exam Reports. 50. CHART OF HUMAN EVALUATION. OBNOSIS. WORKSHEETS. No change. (Note: There is additional data on indicators in HCOB 3 May 1962R, ARC BREAKS, MISSED WITHHOLDS, where indicators concern Missed Withholds.) GOOD INDICATORS 1. WORKSHEETS. OBNOSIS. Pc willing to talk to the auditor. 2. WORKSHEETS. OBNOSIS. While in session, pc interested in own case. 3. METER. WORKSHEETS. A good read on the breath test shows pc is eating and sleeping well. 4. WORKSHEETS. Rudiments, session to session, easier to get in and stay in. 5. OBNOSIS. TONE SCALE. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. Pc cheerful. 6. METER. WORKSHEETS. Needle F/Ning at session start. 7. METER. Tone Arm moving in the range of 8.0 to 2.0. 8. METER. Needle moving easily as pc does the process. 9. METER. WORKSHEETS. Blowdowns occur on right items and cognitions. 10. METER. Tone Arm counter showing normal or better TA for the session. 11. METER. WORKSHEETS. Change of characteristic in meter behavior every few sessions. 12. METER. WORKSHEETS. Tone Arm blows down on cognitions. 13. METER. WORKSHEETS. Cognitions and F/Ns go together. 14. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. Somatics vanish in processing. 15. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. Pc blowing somatics and aberrations more easily. 16. WORKSHEETS. METER. CHART OF HUMAN EVALUATION. Pc responses associated with what is being run. 17. TONE SCALE. CHART OF HUMAN EVALUATION. Pc moves on the Tone Scale. 18. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. CHART OF HUMAN EVALUATION. Pc understanding self better. 19. OBNOSIS. EXAM REPORTS. Eyes are brighter. 20. OBNOSIS. EXAM REPORTS. Improved skin tone. 21. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. Ears pop more open. HCOB 3.5.80 - 5 - 22. WORKSHEETS. Pc cogniting. 23. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. CHART OF HUMAN EVALUATION. Life problems lessening. 24. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. Pc getting through the program okay with wins. 25. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. CHART OF HUMAN EVALUATION. Pc's havingness in life and livingness is improving. 26. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. CHART OF HUMAN EVALUATION. Pc getting case gain. 27. EXAM REPORTS. Change of characteristic of Exam Reports. 28. WORKSHEETS. MISCELLANEOUS REPORTS. Pc wanting more auditing. 29. GRADE CHART. SUCCESS STORIES, WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. Pc going on up the Grade Chart not quickied and winning. L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER LRH:nsp Copyright $c 1980 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER   Type = 11 iDate=2/5/80 Volnum=0 Issue=2 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Survival Rundown Series 3 SURVIVAL RUNDOWN ADMINISTRATION   Survival RD I/Cs C/Ses Review Auditors Co-Audit Supervisors Theory Supervisors Administrators  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 2 MAY 1980 ISSUE II Survival RD I/Cs C/Ses Review Auditors Co-Audit Supervisors Theory Supervisors Administrators Survival Rundown Series 3 SURVIVAL RUNDOWN ADMINISTRATION (Ref: HCOB 1 May 80 SURVIVAL RUNDOWN HCOB 29 May 80 CO-AUDITS: HOW TO RUN THEM) Vital to the administration of the Survival Rundown is having adequate terminals to keep the lines moving quickly so that there are no stops or slows. This issue lays out the hats that need to be worn for smooth Survival RD delivery. In a smaller org or mission, some of these can be double-hatted but a larger course will need each post single-hatted in order to successfully handle the load. SURVIVAL RD I/C A Survival RD Co-Audit of any size must have a Survival RD I/C. He has the overall responsibility for Co-Audit's success and the success of the Survival Rundown. He is senior over the Co-Audit Supervisor, Theory Supervisor, Review Auditing Section and the Survival RD Admin. It is optimum that he has done the Survival RD himself. (If this function is held from above, it would most likely be held by the D of T or Tech Sec but could be held by the Survival RD Co-Audit Supervisor as a last resort.) He is in charge of overseeing the routing of pcs/students through their Review cycles to completion. He spot checks the Survival RD student DRs every day to ensure all is going well and makes sure any outnesses are corrected by the proper terminals. The stat of the I/C is Survival RD PC Comps, Review Comps and Student Comps. The Survival RD I/C ensures the Co-Audit Supervisor, Theory Supervisor and Admin wear their hats at all times. If anything comes on his lines that is another's hat, he pushes it down to them to handle. He writes crams on any goofs the supervisors may make and ensures the C/S issues pink sheets on the co-auditors as needed. He also ensures the supervisors pink sheet any outnesses. The I/C really makes sure WHAT IS A COURSE PL is IN. He slams in all points. He makes sure HCOB 30 Oct 78 COURSES THEIR IDEAL SCENE is in. He isn't reasonable and doesn't tolerate Q & A, non-compliance or out-ethics. He 8-Cs things with ARC and an uncompromising attitude. He is a stable terminal in the delivery of the Survival RD. HCOB 2.5.80 II - 2 - A tight line with the Dir Review or the Qual Sec should be kept concerning the Reviews getting scheduled and done. Having people "waiting for Review" is not OK and the line must be 8-Ced by the Survival RD I/C. He ensures all steps of the RD are being followed to the letter including the continuation of daily vitamins and exercise. PUBLIC AND STAFF SURVIVAL RUNDOWN I/Cs As with the Purification RD, many orgs have an I/C for the public and an I/C for the staff. This system can be applied to the Survival RD as well. (In this case the Staff I/C, if held from above, would most likely be held by the SSO. See HCO PL 29 Oct 79 SSO RESPONSIBILITY FOR STANDARD STAFF COURSES while the Public I/C would be held as covered on page 1.) It is certain that orgs and missions will get their public through the Survival RD. It is just as essential though, that staff members are gotten through the Survival RD. The most workable way to organize the staff onto and through the Survival RD is for the Survival RD I/C (whether he is handling only staff or both staff and public) to make up a master list of the org's staff members who have successfully completed the Purification RD and any that are currently on the Purif RD. This can be in a log or, better yet, on a board. He uses this as his guide to where individuals are at. He then knows who should be routed onto the Survival RD, who is on the Review step, who is on the Co-Audit steps, etc. This would look something like this: ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | NAME | ON PURIF | PURIF COMP | (Conditional) | SURVIVAL RD | SURVIVAL RD | | | | | REVIEW STEP | CO-AUDIT STEPS | COMP | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- The above is not a substitute for the course progress board but enables the I/C to keep track of where the staff members all are. There are plenty of org terminals keeping track of where the public are and 8-Cing them on to their next services, but staff members tend to get neglected. I want all staff members to receive the benefits of the Survival RD and I am charging the Qual Sec or SSO or Staff Survival RD I/C -- whoever is assigned the hat -- with getting their staff HCOB 2.5.80 II - 3 - members through this RD. Liaise with the C/S and get my staffs (including yourselves) through the Purif RD, the Survival RD and on up the bridge. It's time someone gets concerned about staff members' enhancement. I am especially making these new rundowns easy to deliver to staff and I expect them gotten through them and on up to Clear and OT: CASE SUPERVISOR The C/S reads the DRs every day and C/Ses every step of the Rundown. He makes sure the Rundown is done in the exact sequence and with no interjected or off-line case actions (Ref. C/S Series 29 & 38). This includes such actions as Post Purpose Clearing, Debug Checklist, False Data Stripping and Crashing MU Finding. These should be done before the Rundown is started. If needed during the Rundown for the person's post, the C/S would have to OK it and it would be limited to FDSing, Word Clearing and Debug actions not requiring L & N or other case handlings such as Service Fac Handling. Rudiments and word clearing in Cramming do not require C/S OK. The best action is to just get the pc through the program and he'll then be easier to debug. The Case Supervisor should be available during the co-audit course time if at all possible. The actions sometimes EP rapidly and if the Case Supervisor is not available, the co-auditors lose valuable auditing hours due to waiting for their next C/S. (If the Co-Audit Supervisor is qualified, he can C/S a co-auditor's session rather than having his co-auditors wait several hours or overnight for the Case Supervisor to get to the folders -- this is only a cope action though.) REVIEW AUDITORS The Survival RD Review Auditors must be Graduate Class IVs so that they can audit all of the required review steps. The Review Auditors deliver the Repair step of the Survival RD, step 00. They also do any review actions that come up during the Rundown that cannot be handled easily by the Co-Audit Supervisor. They handle students needing extensive word clearing per TWINNING HCOB. When you start the Rundown in an org, you would get the pcs who need the least Review in session first so that the co-audit can get rolling right away. The way you get the reviews done is you take your available Senior Class IV auditors (if you don't have enough, you better recruit and train them in a TTC), and assign as many pcs to each auditor as they can handle in one day. Then those pcs go in every day until their repair is complete. As you complete pcs, you start new ones and finish their repairs in the same way. You complete cycles of actions on pcs. Don't start everybody at once and leave them hanging in the middle for weeks. HCOB 2.5.80 II - 4 - By finishing programs, running co-audits and recruiting and training auditors, you will get your public and staff up the bridge. THEORY SUPERVISOR The Theory Supervisor is responsible for keeping WHAT IS A COURSE PL in on his Survival Rundown students. He calls roll for all the students (to ensure maximum 8-C) and after the roll call those who are working on practical report to the Co-Audit Supervisor. The Theory Supervisor makes sure that the twins study together and do any necessary M3s, M9s, theory coaching, etc. on each other to get through the course's theory materials. If both are doing fine on theory, they would not twin on the theory of course, but in the event one hits a rough spot, he would be coached through it by his twin. When holding the final muster for the day, enough time must be allowed the students to fully fill out their DRs. If this is not done you will end up with very little DR data as they will be hurriedly written. (This applies to the Co-Audit Super also.) CO-AUDIT SUPERVISOR The Co-Audit Supervisor is in charge of the Practical Section of the Survival Rundown TRs and Objectives Course. He supervises the drilling of TRs, processes, and the co-auditing of the Survival RD steps. In the morning before course starts he reviews all the folders which came out from the C/S. He separates them out and puts them on the proper stacks (D of P, Declare, to Co-Auditor, Co-Audit Sup handling, Ethics, to MO, to Review). Every student on the Rundown writes a Daily Report which the Survival RD Co-Audit Sup reads every day. The Survival RD Admin places these DRs in the folders after the Co-Audit Sup has read them and handled any BIs (he notes his handlings on the DR). They then go to the C/S, who also reviews them. The Co-Audit Sup is responsible for the quality of the DRs and keeping the students winning. He handles any Bad Indicators such as no wins or cogs mentioned or difficulties mentioned, by 2-way comm with the student and standard handling in liaison with the Theory Sup, Word Clearer and C/S as appropriate. He involves the twin in the handling per the TWINNING HCOB. The Co-Audit Sup should be a Survival RD completion or at least have received his Objectives. The Co-Audit Sup must be qualified to fly ruds, rehab overruns and do Interviews. He can be trained on all of these actions on the new Co-Audit Supervisor Checksheet (HCO PL 2 June 1980 CO-AUDIT SUPERVISOR COURSE). HCOB 2.5.80 II - 5 - If a co-audit session bogs, the co-auditor alerts the Co-Audit Sup before ending session and the Co-Audit Sup takes over and handles the pc exactly per CS Series 1 and HCOB 19 Mar 78 QUICKIE OBJECTIVES. If the pc was in the middle of an unflat process and not at a good flat point, the Co-Audit Sup, after repairing the pc, would quickly correct the auditor and the session would resume. Then both twins would be thoroughly corrected as needed, after the session was over. TIGHT SCHEDULING The Rundown must not be done on a loose schedule. Tight scheduling is very important. A proper personal schedule is also vital to the Rundown's success. Getting enough sleep, enough exercise and enough food and vitamins are obviously necessary for proper bio-physical handling. You don't want the body being a PTP to the thetan. SURVIVAL RUNDOWN ADMIN The Survival Rundown Admin has the responsibilities outlined in HCO PL 16 Mar 71R WHAT IS A COURSE as regards course materials. (If this function is double-hatted, it would most likely be held by the Co-Audit Supervisor.) As the student only needs one pack for the course and a few books, it is not hard to have numerous complete packs for the students and there is no excuse not to. A Progress Board must be kept up to show progress through the checksheet. This progress board should show the dates that the students are targetted to complete the various sections. The Admin sees that each student turns in a DR every day. When the Co-Audit Sup and the I/C have finished with the DRs, the Admin files the DRs in the pc folders and sends the folders to the C/S. The Survival Rundown Admin is the Folder Page for the Co-Audit and is the only one allowed to go into the C/S Office. When the Co-Audit Sup or a co-auditor needs a pc folder, the Admin rapidly locates and delivers it. The following is a list of some of the successful actions done by the SRD Admin on the pilot: 1. Using good 8-C on the students. 2. Keeping the progress board in PT. 3. Making sure that the DRs are gotten into the folders and the folders are gotten to the C/S in time, so that the folder is C/Sed for the next day. 4. Keeping the area in order (HCO PL 14 Feb 80 ORDER VERSUS DISORDER). 5. Keeping the files accurate and up to date. HCOB 2.5.80 II - 6 - 6. Ensuring admin supplies and course materials are readily available. 7. Keeping Dev-T off the lines. 8. Maintaining a high level of particle flow. 9. Grooving in each new student on the admin lines which consist of Daily Reports, where to report student points, where pc folders go, etc. 10. Rounding up students that didn't show up for course. 11. Keeping close track of all students, especially when in Qual or Ethics, allowing none to fall off the line. 12. Keeping up a daily log that lists each student enrolled on the course and shows: a. that the student has turned in his DR b. that the DR has been filed in the pc folder and the folder has been turned in to the C/S SAMPLE LOG [GRAPHICS INSERTED] A = Absent NR = No Report X = Student not scheduled for that day The sequence or flow line of handling DRs is: HCOB 2.5.80 II - 7 - 1. Students write their DRs and turn them in to the basket marked SRD DRs. (SRD = Survival Rundown) 2. a. The Admin picks up the DRs and logs them. b. If any student has not turned in a DR the Admin would write up a short report with the student's name at the top of the page and "No Report" written clearly in large letters in the middle of the page. This then takes the place of the student's omitted DR. c. If the student was absent the Admin would similarly write up a report. He would include data as to why the student was absent, if anyone tried to call him and any bad indicators that were noted. In this way there is a report for every student scheduled for class that day, whether the student wrote one or not. 3. The Admin hand routes the reports to the Co-Audit Sup. 4. The Co-Audit Sup reads the DRs and spots any with bad indicators. 5. a. Any bad indicator is plainly circled in red, by the Co-Audit Sup. b. If the bad indicator has to do with the student's auditing, the Co-Audit Sup makes note of it and ensures the student is available for a session the next day (even if the student was not scheduled to come in the next day). c. If the bad indicator is on study, the Co-Audit Sup makes a note of the report and writes in red on the report any other relevant data. The Co-Audit Sup would then ensure that the student is handled first thing the next day. This may necessitate word clearing, or the student may need to see the MO about his vitamins or his exercise. But whatever it is it is always handled as a first action. The full handling is then reported on the next day's student DR. 6. The Admin hand-routes the DRs to the I/C. 7. The I/C spot checks the DRs. 8. The Admin picks up all the DRs and files them in their respective pc folders, logs the folders as "to the C/S" and then immediately takes the folders to the C/S's IN stack. 9. The folders are C/Sed. 10. After the folders are C/Sed they are picked up from the C/S OUT stack by the Admin and are taken to the Co-Audit Sup. Drill these lines and get a smooth operation going. Really deliver! LRH:MM:mz L. RON HUBBARD Copyright $c 1980 FOUNDER by L. Ron Hubbard As assisted by ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Tech Project I/C HCOB 2.5.80 II ATTACHMENT SURVIVAL RD DAILY REPORT DATE: _______________________ NAME: __________________________________ POST: __________________________________ CASE LEVEL: ____________________________ TRAINING LEVEL: ________________________ DATE YOU STARTED THE RD: __________________________ RD STEP YOU ARE CURRENTLY ON: _________________________________________________ WINS OR COGS: _________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ ANY DIFFICULTIES: _____________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ ANY COMMENTS CONCERNING THE RD OR A RD STEP: __________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ HOW ARE YOU DOING ON CONTINUING YOUR DAILY EXERCISE AND VITAMINS? _______________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ WHAT VITAMINS TAKEN? __________________________________________________________ WHAT EXERCISE DONE? HOW LONG? _________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________ Signature Supervisor Comments: __________________________ _______________________________________________ _______________________________________________ _______________________________________________  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER As assisted by Tech Project I/C   Type = 11 iDate=2/5/80 Volnum=0 Issue=1 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Survival Rundown Series 2 SURVIVAL RUNDOWN PC PROGRAM   Survival RD Only  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 2 MAY 1980 Survival RD ISSUE I Only Survival Rundown Series 2 SURVIVAL RUNDOWN PC PROGRAM (REF: HCOB 1 May 80 SRD Series 1 SURVIVAL RUNDOWN HCOB 2 May 80 II SRD Series 3 SURVIVAL RUNDOWN ADMINISTRATION HCOB 4 May 80 SRD Series 4 C/SING THE SURVIVAL RUNDOWN) This program lays out the steps of the Survival RD. It is to be put in the front inside cover or the pc's PT folder and is to be used as the program for the RD. Its sequence is not to be altered in any way. The Survival RD is to be run only on SUCCESSFUL Purification RD completions and the C/S is responsible for verifying this before he begins anyone on his Survival RD Pgm. IF THE PC HAS RECEIVED ANY OF THE FOLLOWING STEPS PREVIOUSLY, THEY SHOULD BE VERIFIED/FLATTENED AT THE APPROPRIATE PLACE OP THE RD. 0. The pc continues daily vitamins and exercise _______ 00. A. Any needed correction of auditing repair given before the Purif RD _______ B. Any needed repair or completion of any failed auditing process given before the Purif RD _______ C. Any needed repair of cramming, correction or ESTO actions given before or during the Purif RD _______ 1. ENVIRONMENT LOCATIONAL _______ 2. REACH/WITHDRAW ON MEST LOCATIONS: A. OUTDOOR ENVIRONMENT _______ B. PC'S PERSONAL LIVING AREA AND MEST _______ C. PC'S WORKING AREA _______ 3. TRs (TRs 0-4, TRs 6-9) _______ 4. CCH 0 (Locational Processing Step) _______ 5. OBJECTIVE ARC _______ 6. CCH I-IV _______ 7. CCH V _______ 8. CCH VI _______ 9. CCH VII _______ 10. CCH VIII _______ 11. CCH IX _______ HCOB 2.5.80 I - 2 - 12. CCH X _______ 13. SCS ON AN OBJECT _______ 14. SCS ON THE BODY _______ 15. SOP S-C (omit if pc's next step is the Dianetic Drug RD) _______ 16. OP PRO BY DUP (omit if pc's next step is the Dianetic Drug RD) _______ 17. R2-69 PLEASE PASS THE OBJECT _______ 18. R2-22 SPANNING ATTENTION _______ 19. HANDLING DISORGANIZATION PROCESS _______ 20. ORDER VERSUS DISORDER PL STEPS _______ 21. FINAL REACH/WITHDRAW STEP _______ 22. ADMIN TRs _______ ______________________________________ Case Supervisor L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER LRH:mz Copyright $c 1980 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER   Type = 11 iDate=1/5/80 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Survival Rundown Series 1 THE SURVIVAL RUNDOWN   Remimeo Survival RD I/C Survival RD C/S Survival RD Supers Survival RD Review Auditors  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 1 MAY 1980 Remimeo Survival RD I/C Survival RD C/S Survival RD Supers Survival RD Review Auditors Survival Rundown Series 1 THE SURVIVAL RUNDOWN Ref: HCOB 2 May 80 SURVIVAL RUNDOWN PC PROGRAM SRD Series 2 HCOB 2 May 80 SURVIVAL RUNDOWN Issue II ADMINISTRATION SRD Series 3 HCOB 6 Feb 78RA THE PURIFICATION RD REPLACES THE SWEAT PROGRAM When a person has fully completed the Purification Rundown he is in shape to get the most possible gain from his auditing. We needed a rundown that would be exactly the right action after the Purification Rundown and so I have developed the SURVIVAL RUNDOWN, a very highly effective, life changing rundown! Done properly on successful Purification RD graduates, the Survival RD puts the being in a position where he can be at cause and really survive in this universe. It was quite obvious from the beginning that the next step after the Purification RD would be Objective Processing and this was stated in HCOB 6 Feb 78RA THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN REPLACES THE SWEAT PROGRAM. It was also found though that a thetan, upon completion of the Purif RD, feels he is on the road towards increased survival potential if this physical universe. The idea of giving Objective processing was then expanded upon, resulting in the overwhelmingly successful Survival Rundown which has been fully piloted and results in an individual with greatly increased survival potential who is in PT and able to control and put order into his environment. It is important that one understands just how the Purification RD and the Survival RD are related. The Purification Rundown is a BIOCHEMICAL handling. By this is meant "the interaction of life forms and chemical substances." It handles those factors which produce a constant restimulation or drugs and drug related pictures. Thus, when it is completed, gains from mental and spiritual processing can fully occur. The Survival RD is a BIOPHYSICAL handling. By biophysical we mean "the interaction and relationship of the being to the physical universe and the material things of the environment or universe." BIO means: life, of living things. (From the Greek "BIOS" which means life, or way of life.) PHYSICAL means: of or pertaining to the body or thing of a material nature, or to the material universe perceived by the senses; pertaining to or connected with matter; material. HCOB 1.5.80 - 2 - Thus, biophysical handling would be auditing the person on those processes which get him, as a thetan, better aware of his body and his physical surroundings, in better communication with these things and in better control of them. We have had, since the early years of Scientology, the Objective processes which accomplish this. That they now accomplish it more successfully than ever before when preceded by the handling of the effects of drugs and toxins on the being on the purification Rundown is a very rewarding discovery, but there is more than that that has been discovered. On the Survival Rundown this is amplified by the addition of brand new technology on the handling of disorganization and disorder. This is coupled with Objective Processes, a full battery of TRs and an array of drills which put a thetan at cause over handling MEST cycles of action and people (the Admin TRs). It is very simple but, after the Purification RD, it has produced very very dynamic results on all levels of cases. DEFINITION OF OBJECTIVES If the word "Objective" is not properly defined and is not understood, then one will not have any inkling as to why these processes work. DEFINITION OF OBJECTIVE: Noun: 1. Something real and observable. Adjective: 2. Existing outside the mind as an actual object and not merely in the mind as an idea; real. 3. About outward things, not about the thoughts or feelings of the speaker, etc. "Subjective" has to do with feelings and thoughts and internal mind things. OBJECTIVE is the reverse of subjective. Objectives are the reverse of thinking and significance. Thus, Objective Processes deal with the real and observable. They are processes which call for the preclear to spot or find something exterior to himself in order to carry out the auditing command. Broadly, Objective Processes also include: 1. Control Processes, which place the preclear's body and actions under the Auditor's control and which then invite the preclear's own control of his body and actions. 2. Duplication Processes, in which communication is established by having the preclear mimic and duplicate physical actions. There is a wide range of Objective Processes to use to accomplish the handling of biophysical factors for any pc. WHY OBJECTIVES FOLLOW PURIFICATION When one has taken a searching look at the biochemical scene, it becomes obvious how and why Objectives quite naturally HCOB 1.5.80 - 3 - follow the biochemical handling the person has had on the Purification Rundown. As covered in the original issue on the Purification Rundown, large segments of today's society have been subjected to drugs, medical or otherwise, and the intake of other biochemical poisons which are so much a part of our current scene. Effects of these substances can and do prevent the person from making case gain, or optimum case gain, from any type of processing, including Objective processing. One does not need to be a "druggie" in the common sense of the word to be affected by this. It is a factor to be dealt with by practically anyone who has been around and living in our biochemical-oriented society in recent past years. It is known that drugs, pain-killers, tranquilizers, etc. block off sensations. Any drug may be taken to drive a person out of an unbearable present time or out of consciousness altogether. In most cases, people who have taken street drugs or medical drugs have done so to avoid the pain of a sick or injured body or to avoid painful situations in the environment. Drugs however (whether alcohol, tranquilizers, marijuana, LSD or other biochemical substances) produce a,threat to the person like any other poison. This can be due to the blocking off of sensation and awareness or to their direct effect on the nervous system, cells or tissues, but is also in great extent due to the fact that they deplete the body of needed and important vitamins and minerals. They can and do create nutritional deficiencies and these can be severe and continuing. The immediate threat is to the body, but under threat the thetan often reacts by going out of present time. Anyone forced into a dangerous environment tends to go either fully into present time or retreat from present time. Without benefit of processing, the likelihood is the person goes out of P.T. in more cases than not. Residuals of these poisonous substances lodged in the body tend to have much the same effect. They can contribute to a continuation of any nutritional deficiency caused by the drug in the first place. They tend to put the person out of communication with his body or at the very least with those parts of the body most severely affected by toxic deposits. Hence, they also tend to put the person out of communication with his environment and with present time to a greater or lesser degree. Therefore, when one has handled the biochemical effects of such a situation on the Purification Rundown, the next logical step is the biophysical handling which gets the person into present time and in control of his body and in good communication with the things of his environment. It is done with Objective Processes. These processes can also work to un-fixate attention from the body where, for some, it may have been stuck for some time. REPAIR OF BRAIN DAMAGE OR OTHER CELLULAR DAMAGE FROM DRUGS There is another factor here, which is that many people are concerned over the possibility that marijuana, LSD and other drugs so damage the brain or the nervous system and cells as to make complete recovery impossible. HCOB 1.5.80 - 4 - There is probably more hope to be had here than was originally considered. There are soldiers who have experienced bullet wounds in the brain who totally lost the power of speech or some other facility, but it is a matter of record that, when carefully schooled and exercised, other new brain cells have become usable and the lost ability has been regained. Research may show that, even when drugs have damaged the nervous system or cells, the ability to think and act and react may probably be regained: a. if the residual effects of these drugs are handled, and b. if any damage is repaired by diet, vitamins, etc. Whether the drugs have harmed the body directly or harmed it by creating vitamin and mineral deficiencies, once the original drug poisons are handled and the damage bypassed or handled with correct nutrition, it is entirely possible that such recovery could take place. Thus, though many are worried about drug and poison damage being irreversible, based on the above research this may not necessarily be the case. Taking all possibilities into consideration, it may be that, with the proper spiritual handlings being done on the biochemical level (as with the Purification Rundown) and the biophysical level (as with the Survival Rundown) thoroughly and well, there could be considerable hope for a full resurgence of physical health and spiritual well-being for someone who has suffered from the harmful effects of drugs and toxins. WHO GETS AUDITED ON THE SURVIVAL RUNDOWN? For any starting pc, the beginning of the Bridge now consists of: 1. The Purification Rundown 2. The Survival Rundown 3. Full Drug Rundown And following that would come all of the remainder of the Dianetics and Scientology processes, mental and spiritual, in proper sequence, which make up the full Bridge. It is the responsibility of the C/S to ensure that any new pc is programmed and handled according to these steps, and to ensure that pcs already on the Bridge are not being prevented from making case gain due to any of the above having been omitted or quickied. Any person who has never had Objectives must be C/Sed for this Rundown as his next step after the Purification Rundown is completed. For those who have had Objectives prior to the Purification Rundown, it must be a matter of C/S adjudication as to whether the person would then be given further Objectives or not. (Those Objective Processes that were previously received would of course be verified at the proper place on the Survival RD and either rehabbed or flattened.) HCOB 1.5.80 - 5 - Many pcs now doing the Purification Rundown may have had many hours of Objectives and had valid and lasting gain from them. The C/S must establish whether this is the case and, if so, he would simply rehab each Objective run or, as needed in some cases, any overall EP of Objective processing is rehabbed or Date/Located. Many may have missed Objectives totally, or been quickied on them. For such cases, the Survival Rundown (preceded by successful completion of the Purif Rundown) is the point at which a lack of Objectives or quickied Objectives would be remedied. There will also be those who have had Objectives which were done over the effects of heavy drug and toxic restimulation, which could have prevented case gain even from Objectives if these were done before the Purification Rundown. In these cases the Objectives previously run would be verified and flattened as needed. Obviously, if there is evidence that Objectives have been quickied or omitted or if the person did not do well on them, the C/S would need to ensure that this was handled on the Survival Rundown. STEPS OF THE SURVIVAL RUNDOWN 0. CONTINUATION OF DAILY VITAMINS AND EXERCISE Not only does the continuation of daily vitamins and exercise make sense but this was in high demand by Purification RD graduates. They wanted to continue the daily regimen of properly maintaining their bodies after their completion of the Purif and so this is therefore included in the Survival RD. It is suggested that the minimum daily requirements of vitamins and minerals be continued while on the Survival RD, per HCOB 6 Feb 78RA THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN REPLACES THE SWEAT PROGRAM, page 18 under "End Phenomena" and HCOB 5 May 80 CONTINUATION OF DAILY VITAMINS AND EXERCISE. It is also recommended that the system of twinning on the daily exercising is followed on the Survival RD. This is for two reasons: (1) twins 8-C each other on maintaining the daily schedule and regimen and (2) it is a good safety precaution. Due to individual schedules, the person's course twin may not always be his exercise twin but it is usually preferred. 00. REPAIR OF PAST REPAIRS IN AUDITING With the benefit of increased case gain potential one receives from the Purification RD, you will find that cases who had bugged repair cycles, incomplete case actions, apparently failed case actions and botched or apparently unsuccessful Qual correction actions can now be set straight and swiftly repaired. This step of the RD is fully laid out in HCOB C/S Ser 109 CONDITIONAL STEP AFTER PURIF and HCOB 13 Jan 70 C/S Ser 3 SESSION PRIORITIES -- REPAIR PROGRAMS AND THEIR PRIORITIES. 1. ENVIRONMENT LOCATIONAL This step is extremely simple to do but produces very big wins on Purif grads. They are in a state of now having HCOB 1.5.80 - 6 - their attention unfixated from the body and this locational moves them right into communication with their present time environment. You'll be amazed at the responses this step gets! This step is laid out in HCOB 6 May 80 ENVIRONMENT LOCATIONAL. 2. REACH AND WITHDRAW ON MEST LOCATIONS The Survival RD issue which covers this step includes data about Reach and Withdraw that I discovered had never been broadly released. The theory of this action is contained in HCOB 7 May 80 REACH AND WITHDRAW ON MEST LOCATIONS. Once the thetan has been gotten into communication with his environment, his reach and confront is then raised on this step of the Survival RD. Three areas are covered -- the outdoor environment, the individual's personal living area & MEST, and his work space. This step alone has produced some of the most dramatic changes which occur on this Rundown. The Reach and Withdraw and the Environment Locational are not to be underestimated because of their simplicity. You must realize that, after the Purif, you have a thetan with a fresh clean viewpoint and an anxiousness to become reacquainted and causative over the physical universe which he is operating in. This Reach and Withdraw step does just that. (NOTE: Those co-auditing the Survival RD are purposely gotten onto the Locational and Reach and Withdraw steps before any admin hatting, TRs, etc. so that they get immediate wins on the course. It also improves their study.) 3. OT TR 0 - TR 4 and TRs 6 - 9 The TRs on the Survival RD are done on either Section II of the SURVIVAL RUNDOWN TRs AND CO-AUDIT COURSE CHECKSHEET (HCO PL 12 May 80) or on sections II - III of the SURVIVAL RUNDOWN TRs COURSE CHECKSHEET (HCO PL 13 May 80) (for HGC pcs on the Survival Rundown). The TRs 0-4 on the Survival RD incorporate some of the most recent technical breakthroughs in the area of TRs. Theory on the communication formula, ARC and TR basics is included. These are not Professional Auditor's TRs (Hard TRs) but are a gradient below that. The Training Drills on the Survival RD are done towards the purpose of improving an individual's understanding of communication, his ability to communicate and to raise his level of intention. They can be cycled through if necessary per study tech on gradients. It has been found that at this step of the Survival RD, many individuals truly duplicate the data about communication for the first time regardless of how many times they read it previously. Also, life ruins in the area of communication have been handled. Doing TRs at this point in an individual's auditing is actually very therapeutic. For those co-auditing the Survival RD, the above TRs of course are necessary drilling for their auditing of their twin. 4-16. OBJECTIVES The Objective Processes run at this point of the Survival Rundown are as follows: HCOB 1.5.80 - 7 - 4. CCH 0 (Locational processing Step -- per HCOB CCH 0 -- LOCATIONAL PROCESSING STEP) 5. Objective ARC 6. CCHs 1-4 7. CCH 5 8. CCH 6 9. CCH 7 10. CCH 8 11. CCH 9 12. CCH 10 13. Start-Change-Stop On An Object 14. Start-Change-Stop (Body) These are run in the above sequence, each fully to its EP. The remainder of these basics: 15. SOP 8-C 16. Opening Procedure by Duplication (Op Pro By Dup) are then given the person as the final part of his next auditing step, the NED Drug Rundown. In other words, when the person has not yet had a Dianetic Drug Rundown, SOP 8-C and Op Pro By Dup are the Objectives given after all of the steps of the NED Drug Handling are complete. (Ref: HCOB 15 July 71RC, Revised 31.1.79, C/S Series 48RD, NED Series 9RB, DRUG HANDLING.) Exception: If the pc is Clear or OT he would not be given the NED Drug RD or any other Dianetics but would simply get all of the above Objectives 4 - 16, in sequence, as part of the Survival RD. Any pc who is on or between R6EW, Clearing Course, OT I, OT II, OT III or who is a NED for OTs pc would not receive any other auditing action than the one he is on as he is in the Non-Interference Zone. Also, in other cases where the preclear has completed a Drug Rundown but is getting additional Objectives following his Purification Rundown, SOP 8-C and Op Pro By Dup are verified or run as part of the Survival Rundown. The list above comprises those Objective processes which have been chosen as the basic objective rundown. This does not mean that other objectives cannot be run. There are many, many more objective processes in Scientology, and these are covered extensively in HCOBs, PABs, books and tapes. The C/S is at liberty to get the pc run on other objectives if needed after the specified processes have been run to their full End Phenomena. Note: Objectives are also used early on when a person is first coming off drugs to prevent withdrawal symptoms, but that is not a full Objectives handling and such persons have HCOB 1.5.80 - 8 - to be fully completed on Objectives after Purification and TRs have been done. Note: A full list of Source references for the basic Objectives is given on the Attachment accompanying this bulletin. 17. R2-69 PLEASE PASS THE OBJECT This process is fully presented in the book CREATION OF HUMAN ABILITY. It is placed at this point on the Survival RD as a gradient to the Order versus Disorder step. On R2-69 the thetan is allowed to place an object in various locations. He even comes up to "games" on the subject and will regain the ability to causatively put an object somewhere. 18. R2-22 SPANNING ATTENTION This is also a CREATION OF HUMAN ABILITY process. The preclear now increases his attention concerning objects. He will be able to causatively put his attention on numerous objects and thus increase his ability to handle the MEST UNIVERSE. 19. HANDLING OF DISORGANIZATION I have developed this process just for the Survival RD. It is not run outside of the Survival RD or in any other place on this RD. R2-69 and R2-22 gives us a pc who knows he can causatively place an object somewhere and who can have his attention on more than one object at a time. Step A of the Handling of Disorganization process is geared towards the realization that (a) objects can exist in an orderly fashion, (b) one can do something with objects and, (c) it is a simple task to return an object to its original location after doing something with it. On step B of this process, the pc will realize that (a) he can self-determinedly organize objects,(b)the key to handling disorganization is to organize and locate MEST objects and return them to their original location once used, which is the EP of the process. It is laid out in HCOB 9 May 80 HANDLING OF DISORGANIZATION. The Handling of Disorganization Process was tailor-made to precede the Order Versus Disorder step. It is the gradient that really ensures the Order Versus Disorder step is completely effective. 20. ORDER VERSUS DISORDER PL STEPS The full theory of this step is' covered in HCO PL 14 Feb 80 ORDER VERSUS DISORDER. It is done exactly per the above PL with the exception of step #2 which has been expanded in HCO PL 10 May 80 ORDER VERSUS DISORDER -- STEP #2 EXPANDED. This step, quite obviously, gets an individual's personal and working environment into order. It increases his organization and helps him to causatively produce whatever his products are. It also would include the handling of anyone in the condition of Confusion (per page 7 of the Order Versus Disorder PL and per HCO PL 9 Feb 74R THE EXPANDED CONFUSION . FORMULA). HCOB 1.5.80 - 9 - An individual's survival depends to a large degree on his ability to put order into things and produce a valuable product. Without this, the individual is out exchange with his environment and other people. An individual who is not producing is not surviving and in fact becomes mentally or physically ill. He is incompetent. His morale is out the bottom and he is not expanding. An individual who can bring about order and who can produce a valuable product has high morale. He is in exchange with his environment and other people, and it is exchange which maintains the inflow and outflow that gives a person space around him and keeps the bank off of him. Such an individual has a high survival potential, indeed! 21. FINAL REACH AND WITHDRAW STEP The Order Versus Disorder step of the Survival RD can seem to be a bit of an other-determined action as the individual's working and living areas are inspected, he is 8-Ced into putting order into any disorder encountered and then re-inspected. (This is covered in HCOB 11 May 80 FINAL REACH AND WITHDRAW STEP.) This final Reach and Withdraw step raises the individual's Havingness and ARC towards the objects/areas he has now put into order. This also increases his causativeness in these areas so that he will maintain the order he has put them into. 22. ADMIN TRs The Admin TRs (HCOB 17 May 80 ADMINISTRATIVE TRs) increase one's causativeness over the everyday confusions, randomities, justifications, excuses, traps and insanities of MEST and people. They enable one to comfortably confront such things when encountered. All of the Admin TRs should be done at the end of the Survival RD even if previously done as the individual will get increased benefits from them after the gradient steps of the Survival RD. (The only exception is the fact that TR R/W MEST is not done on the Survival RD as its purpose is accomplished on an earlier RD step -- R/W ON MEST LOCATIONS.) At this point on the Survival RD, one's potential to handle the MEST Universe and other people is raised out the roof! EP The EP of the Survival Rundown is "Feeling in Present Time and able to control and put order into the environment. Greatly increased survival potential." CO-AUDIT VS HGC AUDITING The Survival RD is set up so that it can easily be delivered in any org or mission, on a co-audit basis or in an HGC. I do want you to know that in the piloting of the Survival RD, some of the biggest wins expressed were auditor wins from those co-auditing this Rundown. The Survival RD is now one of the first places an individual learns to audit. The issues and the checksheet are specially designed to make it very easy gradient for even the newest Scientologists. HCOB 1.5.80 - 10 - Becoming an auditor raises a person's self-respect and feeling of value. He becomes more effective as a being because he knows he can help others. His confront is higher. His case gain is twice that of someone who only receives auditing. THE SURVIVAL RD AND STAFF I want to make it very clear that the Survival RD is intended for staff as well as public. All staff that complete the Purification RD should be programmed for the Survival RD. They can easily co-audit it and should. It has everything to do with enhancing our staff members, making them into auditors, getting them up the Bridge and improving their production. Without able staff members we have no hope of flourishing and prospering. And besides, who more deserves to get up the Bridge than our staff? C/SING THE SURVIVAL RUNDOWN To C/S the Survival RD one must be a Graduate C1 IV C/S. He must be familiar with the co-audit technology and high crimed on all Survival Rundown issues and related tech. It is advised that he himself do the Survival RD at the soonest opportunity. Specific data concerning C/Sing the Survival RD is found in HCOB 4 May 80 C/SING THE SURVIVAL RUNDOWN. The Survival Rundown is the key to increased survival for your public, staff and the org. Run standardly it changes conditions beyond belief. It will directly affect stats and production and morale will soar, both for the individual and the org. Most importantly, it is a big step on the Bridge and opens the way to mental and spiritual processing with more gains than ever before. You will also be training auditors and paving the way for more people to get up the Bridge. Here's to the best, biggest and widest Bridge ever! L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER as assisted by TECH PROJECT I/C LRH:MM:nsp Copyright $c 1980 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED HCOB 1.5.80 - 11 - The Purification Rundown referred to in the above issue has as its sole purpose the handling of the restimulative effects of drugs and toxic residuals on a Spiritual Being. The Purification Rundown is a Spiritual activity based on and administered according to the doctrine and practices of the religion of Scientology as set forth in the writings of L. Ron Hubbard and adopted by the Church. No part of the Rundown is intended as the diagnosis, prescription for, or treatment of any bodily or physical condition or ill. The Church is not responsible for the handling of any bodily or physical condition or ill, it being the responsibility of the individual to seek the competent medical advice and treatment of his doctor in such matters. THE BOARDS OF DIRECTORS of the CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY HCOB 1.5.80 ATTACHMENT MATERIALS ON OBJECTIVES There is a wealth of data on Objectives in earlier Scientology materials, and these materials must be well known by any C/S or HGC auditor or Co-audit Supervisor attempting to deliver this Rundown. References for the basic Objectives are given here under each of the processes: CCH 0 HCOB 8 May 80 CCH 0 -- LOCATIONAL PROCESSING STEP HCOB 4 Dec 57 CLEAR PROCEDURE CONTINUED STEP ONE: PARTICIPATION IN SESSION BY THE PC PAB No. 133 1 Apr 58 PROCEDURE CCH HCOB 15 Oct 58 ACC CLEAR PROCEDURE OBJECTIVE ARC HCOB 19 Jun 78 NED Series 3 OBJECTIVE ARC CCHs 1-4 HCOB 1 Dec 65 CCHs HCOB 5 Apr 62 CCHs AUDITING ATTITUDE PAB 133 PROCEDURE CCH (Tech Vol III, pg 238) PAB 134 PROCEDURE CCH CONTINUED (Vol III, pg 247) HCOB 15 Oct 58 ACC CLEAR PROCEDURE PAB 150 DUMMY AUDITING STEP THREE: DUPLICATION (Vol III, pg 354) PAB 151 DUMMY AUDITING STEP FOUR: HANDLING ORIGINATIONS (Vol III, pg 370) PAB 154 CCH CONCLUDED (Vol III, pg 400) HCOB 5 Jun 81 PROCESSES ALLOWED HCOB 23 Jun 61 RUNNING CCHs HCOB 27 Jun 61 ROUTINE ONE HCOB 29 Mar 62 CCHs AGAIN. WHEN TO USE THE CCHs Tapes: 5707C05 FC-4 BASIC THEORY OF CCHs 5707C07 FC-15 CCH -- STEPS 1 THROUGH 4: DEMONSTRATION 6106C22 SH Spec 18 RUNNING CCHs 6203C29 SH Spec 126 CCHs CCHs 5-10 HCOB 11 Jun 57 TRAINING AND CCH PROCESSES PAB 135 PROCEDURE CCH CONTINUED (Vol III, pg 254) PAB 131 THE SCALE OF WITHHOLD (Vol III, pg 230) PAB 87 SCIENTOLOGY PROCESSING (Vol II, pg 441) HCOB 1.5.80 - 2 - ATTACHMENT CCHs IN GENERAL PAB 122 THE FIVE LEVELS OF INDOCTRINATION AND PROCEDURE CCH (Vol III, Pg 128) HCOB 4 Dec 57 CLEAR PROCEDURE CONTINUED BOOK: Scientology Clear Procedure Issue One (Vol III, pgs 172-193) HCOB 3 Jul 59 GENERAL INFORMATION HCOB 11 Apr 62 DETERMINING WHAT TO RUN HCOB 12 Apr 62 CCHs PURPOSE HCOB 26 Apr 62 RECOMMENDED PROCESSES HGC START-CHANGE-STOP BOOK: Control and the Mechanics of S-C-S PAB 97 START-CHANGE-STOP (Vol II, pg 521) HCOB 28 Jul 58 CLEAR PROCEDURE HCOB 2 Feb 81 UK CASES DIFFERENT SOP 8-C PAB 34 OPENING PROCEDURE SOP 8C (Vol II, Pg 76) PAB 47 OPENING PROCEDURE 8-C (Vol II, pg 146) BOOK: Creation of Human Ability, R2-18 BOOK: Phoenix Lectures, Chapter 18 BOOK: Dianetics 55!, Chapter XII OP PRO BY DUP HCOB 4 Feb 59 OP PRO BY DUP BOOK: Creation of Human Ability, R2-17 BOOK: Phoenix Lectures, Chapters 19 & 20 BOOK: Dianetics 55!, Chapter XII OBJECTIVES IN GENERAL HCOB 14 May 82 CASE REPAIR HCO PL 17 May 65 CCHs HCOB 19 Mar 78 QUICKIE OBJECTIVES HCOB 26 Aug 78 MORE ON DRUGS  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER as assisted by TECH PROJECT I/C THE BOARDS OF DIRECTORS of the CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY   Type = 11 iDate=29/4/80 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  PREPARED LISTS, THEIR VALUE AND PURPOSE   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 29 APRIL 1980 Remimeo PREPARED LISTS, THEIR VALUE AND PURPOSE No matter how complicated or confusing the environment is getting, if you have a stable datum of exact action it can see you through. The Prepared List provides the auditor with a stable action when a session or case is confusing and can bring things under control. The idea of such lists and their development are original to Dianetics and Scientology. They are made possible because these subjects embrace the full extent of thought, the spirit and actual and potential aberration. Thousands of hours of research and development have gone into these lists. Thousands of case histories have been reviewed and condensed to make the lists possible. They are, in themselves, a considerable tour de force. They have often meant the difference between a failed case and a spectacular result. Just as they are important, a knowledge of them and skill in their use is vital to auditing success. HISTORY Probably the oldest "prepared list" is the White Form, (now called THE ORIGINAL ASSESSMENT SHEET -- HCOB 24 Jun 78R). This provided a series of questions which would give one the background of the preclear. It dates from 1950. By it one can get the probable this life areas of the preclear's heaviest charge. SELF ANALYSIS was written in 1951. It contains processing lists a preclear could run on himself. Group Auditing materials of the middle 80s contained lists of commands which were run on groups. Done on a meter, it provides a case entrance. The "Joburg" of 1961 is probably the next historical point. It was a list of the possible withholds a preclear might have. It was called the "Joburg" because it was developed in Johannesburg, South Africa. The "L1" was probably next. The original gave a list of session rudiments which might have gone out and enabled the auditor to get the session rudiments back in. It is still in use as "L1C" or "List One C". The "Green Form" was developed in the early 60s so that Qual Review at Saint Hill would have a tool to analyze a case. Correction lists for various auditing actions began to appear. These corrected an action in progress that had gone awry. In 1973, the famous "C/S 53" (meaning "Case Supervisor Series 53") was devised and continued to be improved and reissued. HCOB 29.4.80 - 2 - Today there are dozens of Prepared Lists. There is even a prepared list to repair repaired lists in general. THEORY OF PREPARED LISTS A Prepared List is an assembly of the majority of things which can be wrong in a case, an auditing action or a session. Such lists are quite remarkable, actually. Only a thorough knowledge of aberration makes such a list possible. When you look over the extent of Prepared Lists, you will see that they contain a grasp of the subject of aberration never before available. USE While an auditor is expected to have studied and mastered all this theory, it is a bit much to expect that in the confusion of a case or session gone wrong he will be able to spot instantly, without help, exactly WHAT has gone wrong. Prepared Lists, where they exist, and his E-Meter will sort this out for him. All the auditor has to have is a general insight that something is going wrong, know in general what is being handled in the case, knows what list to use and then, with good TRs and metering, do an assessment of the Prepared List. Usually the trouble will come right, since the exact point will have been located. It is sometimes enough to merely indicate the point found to discharge it somewhat. One can F/N what is found or one can go into very wide, extensive handling. The point is, the use of the Prepared List has spotted the trouble. What is demanded of the auditor or C/S is WHICH Prepared List to use, but this is determined by what has been going on. TYPES OF PREPARED LISTS There are four general types of Prepared Lists. These are: A. An ANALYSIS list. This is a type of Prepared List which analyzes a case broadly or analyzes a session. The purpose of it is to find out what to address in the case in order to program it. The White Form, the Green Form and the C/S 53 can all be used for this purpose. There are other such lists and there is even a Prepared List to debug production. B. A direct AUDITING list. Prepared Lists exist which deliver direct auditing commands or questions which, run on the oc, produce an auditing result. The lists of SELF ANALYSIS and the various Confessional Lists form this type of Prepared List. C. A CORRECTION list. This type of list corrects an ongoing action. Examples are the Word Clearing Correction List, the Int Rundown Correction List, the Dianetic Correction List. There is a bit of a grey area in this type of list as one can also use some of them for analysis as in the case of a Course Supervisor Correction List or a Student Correction List. The C/S 53 can also serve as a correction list. The real difference is what the list is being used for -- to analyze to find out what to program or start or to correct something already in progress. D. DRILL lists. These are used in training as dummy lists to get an auditor used to handling the meter and Prepared Lists. Such lists are contained in the Book of E-Meter Drills. HCOB 29.4.80 - 3 - METHOD OF HANDLING There are three methods of handling Prepared Lists, depending on the type of list. There is simply the method of asking the questions in sequence and getting the answer from the preclear. This would apply to a White Form or to auditing Prepared Lists as in Self Analysis or in Group Auditing. Very few lists are handled in this way. The second way is called "Method 3" wherein the list is assessed on a meter and when a read is noted, the meter-reading question is taken up with the preclear and F/Ned. Method 3 is covered in HCOB 3 Jul 71 AUDITING BY LISTS. The third way is called "Method 5". This type of assessment assesses the whole Prepared List rapidly without getting the preclear to talk and the reads are then noted. The largest read or reads are then taken up and F/Ned. Method 5 is covered in HCOB 3 Jul 71 AUDITING BY LISTS. TRS AND METERING Whether or not a Prepared List reads depends upon the auditor's TRs and Metering. At one time or another Case Supervisors have had a great deal of trouble with this. Accuracy as to what really read was greatly in question. This came to view on Flag in the early 70s when Prepared Lists that had been assessed by Class IV trainees were then reassessed, same list, sane pc shortly after the first list assessment, by Class XIIs. Totally different results were found -- lists on which few or no reads were obtained by the Class Class IV trainees were found to be very live by the Class XIIs. The difference of quality of TRs and metering were what made the difference with the prepared list response. HCOB 22 April 1980 contains the drills which remedy this. It is the TRs and metering of the auditor that makes a prepared list reliable, not the list itself. The champion list of all time is the C/S 53. On one page, any general thing that can be aberrated in a thetan has been assembled. There are two forms of it -- Short Form for preclears who know the terms and Long Form for preclears who are unindoctrinated (they are the same lists but the Short Form is in single word and the Long Form is a full question). A Director of Processing giving a D of P Interview can use one of these and obtain enough material to enormously help a Case Supervisor. It is not the only D of P Interview action but it is very helpful when used. An auditor can debug a program or a session with it. It can analyze a case for programming and it can also be used to correct a program or to correct a session. Originally it was developed to handle high and low Tone Arm cases and although it still says this, it also says it can "correct case outnesses". And today, this is its greatest use. PRIORITY of handling outnesses is a vital part of C/S 53. The first three groups of items -- (Interiorization outnesses), B (List errors) and C (rudiments) -- give the necessary order of handling. If Int is reading, nothing else can be handled until it is. List errors take the next priority. Then rudiments. If one were to try to repair a case out of sequence, a mess could occur. So this Prepared List also gives the sequence in which outnesses must be handled. HCOB 29.4.80 - 4 - The main fault is using a C/S 53 is overuse -- an auditor reaching for it when he gets in trouble instead of improving the auditor's own TRs, metering or knowledge of programming in the first place. But the C/S 53 is one of the most valuable tools an Auditor or a Case Supervisor has. GENERAL CASE HANDLING The Prepared Lists of all types place in the hands of the Case Supervisor and the auditor a procedure by which a case can be analyzed and programmed. Some auditing can be done direct from Prepared Lists. WORD CLEARING PREPARED LISTS It can happen that a Prepared List gets stalled on misunderstood words. For many Prepared Lists there are also full word clearing lists which can be done on the pc. At one time it was thought that before one did a list one should ALWAYS word clear it. However, this has the liability that a pc who is in one kind of trouble can't sit still until a full word clearing action is done. The amount of trouble which came from Prepared Lists came more from assessing and metering errors than it did from misunderstood words. When one is using a prepared list on a pc who has never had it word cleared, it is usually enough to check that the read isn't coming from a Mis U. Early in a pc's auditing, about the time he gets a CS-1, the more critical prepared lists should be word cleared and the fact noted in his folder. But when one is doing this word clearing, tone arm action or significant reads should also be noted. One is liable to think he is word clearing whereas he is actually assessing. True, there are a lot of tech words on a prepared list that the pc isn't likely to know. Unfortunately, the discoveries of Scientology exceed common language and require terms of their own. But a pc catches on to this quite rapidly. They are new ideas to him (even though he was been living with them all the eons of his existence). When the word is cleared, the idea is also thrown into action. So it is important to note meter reads and and tone arm actions when clearing the words of prepared lists. No hard and fast rules can be drawn on this point of word clearing Prepared Lists. If you have already word cleared the key words of a key Prepared List before you need it, thank your stars. Otherwise, carry on and hope. SUMMARY A Case Supervisor and an auditor owe it to themselves to have a good command of this subject of Prepared Lists. There are many issues on the subject. There are dozens of Prepared Lists. HCOB 29.4.80 - 5 - Knowing what Prepared Lists exist is a vital step for a Case Supervisor and auditor. Knowing what each is used for is equally important. Knowing which lists have word clearing lists already prepared is of assistance. One has to know enough general tech in order to select what Prepared List to use. The ability to assess, as it applies to TRs and metering is extremely important in using Prepared Lists. When it comes to analyzing, auditing and correcting cases and actions, the Prepared Lists are a jewel box that glitters with potential success. L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER LRH:dr Copyright $c 1980 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER   Type = 11 iDate=22/4/80 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  ASSESSMENT DRILLS   Remimeo Auditors Surveyors Examiners Ethics Officers  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 22 April 1980 Remimeo Auditors Surveyors Examiners Ethics Officers ASSESSMENT DRILLS Ref: HCOB 6 Dec 73 C/S Series 90 THE PRIMARY FAILURE HCOB 28 Feb 71 C/S Series 24 METERING READING ITEMS HCOB 15 Oct 73 C/S Series S7 NULLING AND F/NING PREPARED LISTS HCOB 22 Jul 78 ASSESSMENT TRs THE BOOK OF E-METER DRILLS (Note: It is required that anyone doing the following drills shall have done a TR course, an Upper Indoc course and the drills of the E-Meter Drill Book.) According to HCOB 6 Dec 73, the make or break point of an auditor was his ability to get reads on a prepared list. This depended upon (a) His TR 1 and (b) His Metering. In 1978 this was further studied and in HCOB 22 Jul 78 ASSESSMENT TRs, it was found that correct voice pitches had everything to do with assessment. I have just developed drills which improve this ability to make lists read and to improve an auditor's auditing in general. These drills will also be found to have great value to people who do surveys, to Examiners and to Ethics Officers. E-METER To begin, an auditor should review his E-Meter drills and practice E-Meter Drill 27 on page 82 of the Book of E-Meter Drills, E-Meter Drill CR0000-4 and, if found necessary, E-Meter Drill CR0000-3. It is called to attention that E-Meter Drill 5 of the Book of E-Meter Drills has been replaced with E-Meter Drill 5RA and if not done, should be done. This E-Meter Drill 5RA is the only change in the original book. Further, it applies to the Mark VI just as well as it applied to the Mark V for which the book was written -- the controls and actions of the Mark V and Mark VI are practically identical, though the Mark VI moves up to higher level cases. Being able to see and read and operate an E-Meter has everything to do with getting reads off a prepared list. Where an auditor misses it is simply that he has not adequately done the drills in the Book of E-Meter Drills and has not practiced up to a point of full, easy familiarity with the E-Meter. The point of being able to make lists read is pointless unless the auditor can set up, handle and read an E-Meter. But the skill is easily acquired. ASSESSMENT TRAINING DRILLS The following drills have the letter "Q" after them to mean that they are used for QUESTIONS. The Q is followed by a number to show that they are drilled in that sequence. HCOB 22.4.80 - 2 - In these Q drills, the practice of twinning and any other TP tech normal to TRs is followed. TR 1-Q1 NUMBER: TR 1-Q1 NAME: Pitch of the Question. POSITION: Coach sitting at the keyboard of a piano or organ or any useable instrument, student standing beside instrument. PURPOSE: To establish the pitch differences of statements and questions. DATA: [GRAPHICS INSERTED] TRAINING PROCEDURE: If the student is a girl, the coach asks her to say "Apple" as a statement. The coach then strikes the C above middle C (as given in the data above) and then the C above middle C. If the student is a man, the coach asks him to say "Apple" as a statement and then strikes middle C and then the F below middle C. This is repeated -- saying "apple" and striking the two notes until the pitch of a statement can be duplicated by the student. (In the event, the student has a voice pitch at variance with these notes, other notes can be found and used by the coach so long as the higher note is first and the second note is four or five whole notes below the first note. It must sound like a statement with the higher, then lower note.) Once the student has grasped this and can duplicate it, have the student use other two syllable words (or single syllable words preceded by an article), using these notes of the statement. Then, using these two notes, have the student make up sentences as statements, the bulk of the sentence said at the pitch of the higher note, but the end of the sentence at the pitch of the lower note. Once the student has this down and can easily do it and it sounds natural and he is satisfied that it does, go on to the question step. The coach has the student say "apple" as a question. Then the coach (for a male student) strikes the F below middle C and then middle C. For a woman the coach strikes the A above middle C and then the D an octave above middle C. (In case this does not agree with the voice pitch of the student, the coach must work it out providing only that the upper note is three or four whole notes above the lower note. It must sound natural and must sound like a question.) The coach has the student say "apple" as a question and then strikes the lower and higher note until the student can duplicate it. Now take other two syllable words (or single syllable words preceded by an article) and have the student say these as a question, following each one with the two instrument notes, lower to higher. When the student can do this, is satisfied that it sounds natural and doesn't have to think about doing it, go on to the next step. Here the student makes up banal questions. The first part of the question is said at the lower note and the last part is said at the higher note. At each question, the coach strikes the lower note and then the upper note. When this sounds natural and the student does not have to think to do it and is satisfied with it, the drill is ended. HCOB 22.4.80 - 3 - END PHENOMENA: A person who can state statements and questions that sound like statements or questions. HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard, April 1980, while doing the script for the soon to be produced training film "Tone 40 Assessment". TR 1-Q2 NUMBER: TR 1-Q2 NAME: Walkabout Questions. POSITION: There is no coach. Two students separate and walk around their neighborhood and then meet and compare notes. The object is to detect personal habits in questioning. PURPOSE: To enlighten the student as to his own communication habits and people's reactions to his questions. COMMANDS: The most common everyday social questions such as "How's it going?" "Do you like the weather?", etc. appropriate to the activities and circumstances of the person. Only one or two questions to a separate person. The questions must be banal, social and ordinary but they must be questions. TRAINING STRESS: The two students agree on the areas they will cover and the time they will meet again. They then go off individually, not together. The student pauses next to people encountered and asks a social question, listens to his OWN voice tones and notes the reaction of the person asked. In this drill the student does not necessarily try to use TR 1-Q1 but is just himself, speaking as he would normally speak. The students then meet and compare notes and discuss what they have discovered about themselves on the subject of asking questions. If they have not learned or observed anything, the drill must be repeated. END PHENOMENA: A person who has detected any habits he has in handling pitch of voice in asking questions so that he can cure these in subsequent drills. HISTORY: Recommended by L. Ron Hubbard in February 1978, in the pilot for HCOB 22 Jul 78 ASSESSMENT TRs. Developed into a TR in April 1980, by L. Ron Hubbard. TR 1-Q3 NUMBER: TR 1-Q3 NAME: Single Word Question. POSITION: Student and coach facing each other with a table in between them. The E-Meter is not used. The Book of E-Meter Drills used by student and another copy by coach. PURPOSE: To be able to ask questions using a single word read from a list. COMMANDS: The coach uses the usual TR directions of start, flunk, that's it. The student uses single words from the prepared lists of the Book of E-Meter Drills, pages 66 to 72 of the Appendix. HCOB 22.4.80 - 4 - TRAINING STRESS: To get the student to use the pitch of his voice to deliver a question consisting of a single word. It must sound like a question per TR 1-Q1 and use similar pitches to TR 1-Q1. The student is flunked for out TR-1, for keeping his eyes glued to the list, for sounding unnatural. The student is also flunked for slow or comm laggy delivery or pauses. The coach designates the list to be used, changes lists. When the student can do this easily, a second part of the drill is entered and the coach begins to use the PC Origination List on Page 58 so as to interrupt the student and make him combine his questions with TR 4. In this case the student acknowledges appropriately, uses "I will repeat the Question." and does so. END PHENOMENA: The ability to ask single word questions that will be responded to as questions and to be able to handle pc origins while doing so. HISTORY: Developed in April 1980, by L. Ron Hubbard. TR 1-Q4 NUMBER: TR 1-Q4 NAME: Whole Sentence Questions. POSITION: Student and coach sit facing each other across a table. The E-Meter is set up and used. Copies of the Book of E-Meter Drills are used. PURPOSE: To train the student to ask whole questions that sound like questions, read an E-Meter and handle a session at the same time. COMMANDS: The usual coach commands of TR drills. The Prepared Lists of the Appendix of the Book of E-Meter Drills; the questions in these drills are reworded so that the item occurs as the last word; Example: List 2, pg 85 of the Book of E-Meter Drills states that the Assessment Question is "Which tree do you like best?". This is converted, for each question, to "Do you like _______ ?"; Prepared List 4 is converted to "Do you dislike _______ ?"; etc. A whole sentence is used in every case. TRAINING STRESS: The usual TR commands are used by the coach. E-Meter Drill #5RA must be used to start. Any TR errors or Metering errors may be flunked, but special attention is paid to the student's ability to ask a question that sounds like a question in accordance to TR 1-Q1 and that sounds natural. The drill has three parts. In the first part, although the coach is on the meter, the ability to ask the question is concentrated upon. The second part concentrates upon the student's ability to look at the written question and then ask the coach directly without undue comm lag or hesitation. The third part is to do the first two parts and read the meter (in accordance with E-Meter Drills 27 and CR0000-4 which may have to be reviewed if flubby) and to keep session admin, all smoothly and accurately. If a question arises about meter accuracy, a third person who can read a meter or a video tape is employed to ensure that the student is actually not missing or dubbing in reads. END PHENOMENA: A person who can do all the necessary actions of asking questions from a prepared list and run a session smoothly without errors or confusions and be confident he can. HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in April 1980. HCOB 22.4.80 - 5 - TR 8-Q NUMBER: TR 8-Q NAME: TONE 40 ASSESSMENT POSITION: Same as TR 8 where the student is in one chair facing another chair on which sits an ashtray, the coach sitting beside the student in a third chair. A square four-cornered ashtray is used. PURPOSE: To deliver the THOUGHT of a question into an exact position, wide or narrow at decision, that is a question, with or without words. COMMANDS: For the first part of the drill: Are you an ashtray? Are you made of glass? Are you sitting there? Second part of drill: Same questions silently. Third part of drill: Are you a corner? to each corner of the ashtray, verbal and with intention at the same time. Fourth part of drill: Any applicable question, verbal and with intention at the same time put broad and narrow at choice into the ashtray, exact parts of it and the surroundings. TRAINING STRESS: The coach uses usual TR coaching commands. There are four stages to the drill. The first stage is to land a verbal command into the ashtray. The second stage is to put the question with full intention silently into the ashtray. The third stage is to put verbal command and silent intention at the same time into exact parts of the ashtray. The fourth stage is to put any applicable question both verbally and with intention into any narrow or any broad portion of the ashtray or its surrounds at choice and at will. At the conclusion of the whole drill imagine the ashtray saying "Yes, yes, yes, yes" in an avalanche of yeses to balance the flow (in actual life, people, pcs and meters do respond and return the flow). END PHENOMENA: The ability to land a question with full intention into an exact target area, broad or narrow, at will and effectively, whether verbally or silently. HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in April 1980, as an extension of all earlier work on intention and Tone 40, as now applied to questions and assessments. TR 4/8-Q1 NUMBER: TR 4/8-Q1 (TR 4 for Pc Origin, TR 8 Intention + Q for Question, 1 for first part.) NAME: Tone 40 Assessment Prepared List Session Drill. POSITION: Student and coach sitting across from each other at a table, E-Meter set up and in use, session admin, using prepared lists. PURPOSE: To train a student to do all the actions necessary to a full, smooth, accurate session using prepared lists and to do Tone 40 Assessment of them. COMMANDS: Coach commands are the usual TR commands of start, flunk, that's it. For the student, all commands relating to starting a session, giving an R factor, assessing a prepared list, keeping the admin, indicating any item found and ending a session. The Book of E-Meter Drills for Prepared Lists as in TR 1-Q4. Origins for coach as per pages 58, 59 and 60 of that book. "Squeeze the HCOB 22.4.80 - 6 - cans", "Take a deep breath and let it out", "This is the session", "We are going to assess a prepared list" (assessment), "Your item is _______ " (indicate any F/N) "End of Assessment" "End of Session". TRAINING STRESS: Permit the student to continue to his first error, then have him drill and correct that error and continue. Finally, to conclude, let the student go through the entire sequence of the drill beginning to end three times without error or flunk for a final pass. It is expected that the student will not flub any TRs or metering or session patter. Metering may be finally verified by a third student or video. All assessing must be in proper Tone 40 with full intention exactly placed. The student must not walk to see if the meter read but catch the read of the last question as he starts the next one. His vision may shift from list to pc but at all times must embrace list, meter and pc. (This drill also would be the one used for tape or video passes as it includes all elements of metering and TRs.) END PHENOMENA: A person who can do a flawless and productive assessment session, Tone 40. HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard, April 1980. TR 4/8-Q2 NUMBER: TR 4/8-Q2 NAME: Listing and Nulling Tone 40 Assessment. POSITION: Same as TR 4/8-Q1. PURPOSE: To teach a student to do the action of Listing and Nulling with all metering and admin, using Tone 40 Assessment. COMMANDS: The usual coach TR commands. Two copies of the Book of E-Meter Drills. A prepared list is chosen by the coach and both use the same prepared list. The student reads the question and asks it and the coach reads the replies from the same list but in his own copy. The student must write down the answers in a proper session worksheet and note and write down any reads. (An F/N terminates the listing if it occurs.) The coach need not use the whole list of replies but only half a dozen chosen at random. The sequence of commands is the same as TR 4/8-Q1 except that the R factor is "We are going to list a question." And, if no item F/Ns and no significant read has occurred, the additional action of nulling the list is undertaken with the command, "I will now assess the list." TRAINING STRESS: The laws of Listing and Nulling HCOB 1 Aug 68 apply in full as these are very important laws and ignoring them can result in severe ARC breaks not so much in this drill but in actual sessions. The coach may also require suppress and invalidate buttons be put in on the whole list. All errors, omissions, hesitations and lapses from Tone 40 on the part of the student are flunked. Coach similarly to TR 4/8-Q1. Pass when the student can do it flawlessly three consecutive times. (This drill may be used for Interneship tapes and videos for assessing and metering passes.) END PHENOMENA: A person able to do a flawless L & N list as the session or as part of a session, with all TRs in, with perfect metering and proper admin and using Tone 40 in his listing and assessing. HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in April, 1980. HCOB 22.4.80 - 7 - SUMMARY The purpose of these drills is to train the student to ask questions that will get answers and to assess prepared lists that will get accurate reads. If a student doing these drills has difficulty it will be traced to false data, misunderstood words or not having passed earlier TRs including Upper Indoc or his metering drills as contained in the Book of E-Meter Drills. If a satisfactory result is not obtained, the faults in the above items should be located and remedied and these drills repeated. If any earlier omissions are found and repaired and if these drills are honestly done, heightened success as an auditor (or a surveyor or examiner or ethics officer) is assured. L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER LRH:dr Copyright $c 1980 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER   Type = 11 iDate=21/4/80 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  EXAMINER  Type = 22 iDate=26/1/70 Issue=0 Rev=1 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Remimeo Exam Hat Qual Tech All Auditors  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 21 APRIL 1980 Remimeo Exam Hat (Also issued as HCO PL 13 Oct 68R Qual Rev. 21 Apr 80) Tech All Auditors CANCELS BPL 26 Jan 70R EXAMINER AND FLOATING NEEDLE (Revisions in Script) EXAMINER An examination is given the preclear after each session, or when the pc wants to make any statement concerning his case, or when data is requested by the C/S. The preclear exam is done by the pc examiner in Qual. It is done on a meter. The whole duty of the examiner is to note the TA and needle behavior of the pc. This duty is done muzzled. No talk or chatter. The pc comes in. The examiner smiles, indicates for the pc to sit down. The examiner hands the pc the cans. If the pc says or asks something social that has nothing to do with the exam the examiner nods or acks politely. The examiner notes the TA and the needle and looks up at the pc for his statement. When the pc says what he wants to say, the examiner says "Thank you very much", and he indicates an F/N if he sees one. The examiner then indicates with an arm gesture the way out. This is the whole drill. To do, say, anything else will invalidate the pc and or lose the F/N he or she got in session. You don't as an examiner care about anything except TA, needle behavior, statement and pc indicators. The pc will tell you what he wants to. You don't have to ask for it. The only addition to the above would be that, should the pc have a Floating TA, the examiner would indicate it. The examiner should know the exact definition of Floating Ta, per the Tech Dictionary, and be drilled in being able to recognize such. L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER Revision assisted by Dan Osborne CMO Mission: Issues Revisions 2nd for the BDCS:LRH:DO:bk BOARDS OF DIRECTORS Copyright $c 1968, 1980 of the by L. Ron Hubbard CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER Revision assisted by Dan Osborne CMO Mission: Issues Revisions 2nd for the BOARDS OF DIRECTORS of the CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY   Type = 11 iDate=18/4/80 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  TR CRITICISM   Remimeo TR Supervisors Cramming Officers Auditors C/Ses Ds of T  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 18 APRIL 1980 Remimeo TR Supervisors Cramming Officers Auditors C/Ses Ds of T TR CRITICISM Ref: HCOB 24 Dec 79 TRs BASICS RESURRECTED HCOB 5 Apr 80 Q & A, THE REAL DEFINITION HCOB 10 Apr 80 AUDITOR BEINGNESS HCOB 16 Aug 71RA TRs REMODERNIZED During 1979, Ron made a thorough study of current TR training, examining the materials and checksheets in use, conducting TR course pilots, and critiquing video-recorded TRs done by students. He isolated and handled the difficulties that TR supervisors and students had been having. His reorganization of TR training is represented in HCOB 24 Dec 79 TRs BASICS RESURRECTED. During this period while Ron was sorting out TR training I had the privilege of working with him and being trained by him in criticizing TRs. This Paper summarizes what I learned from Ron, and my own experience in teaching TRs and getting them done from a C/S (Case Supervisor) point of view. COMMENTS ON FAULTS WITH STUDENTS ON TRs OT TR-0 Because this TR is so simple, students tend to make it complicated. It requires that the student do this TR in its simplicity and not add to it. All sorts of hidden standards get interjected into it by students, coaches and supervisors. One handling is to clear misunderstood words in the TR, restudy the TR and get them doing it again. An important clarification is that OT TR-0 is just being there -- the confront part is left until TR-0. The coaching on OT TR-0 is mostly done by the supervisor. It is an actual waste of time to have two students coaching each other on it as there is very little to do. A supervisor can note somebody twitching. Even if the supervisor ignores it and just insists that the class go on doing OT TR-0, the guy will come through. The supervisor can cover a whole classroom of OT TR-0. The students don't do any coaching, the supervisor does. Even an isolated student when the rest of the class has gone on -- the supervisor would keep his eye on him in spite of whatever else the supervisor was doing. And if he went to sleep or started boiling off or whatever, the supervisor would get him back onto it again. (But if a student flunked on a later TR and was returned to OT TR-0 it would be up to his twin to get him through. The twin does a lot of coaching only after somebody has been returned to it when the rest of the class is doing something else.) TR-0 All too often students and coaches tend to get into trying to get the student to do something with his body, like trying to HCOB 18.4.80 - 2 - hold it still, trying not to blink, trying to hold a poker face, etc. These of course violate TR-0, as then the student is not confronting the coach, but has attention fixated on his body (to such a degree sometimes that he can be oblivious of the coach). Not that the student should be allowed to writhe and twitch on TR-0, but the emphasis needs to be first and foremost on getting the student to confront the person opposite him (the coach). Then later in the TR, iron out physical manifestations, twitches, blinks, etc. (but if physical manifestations persist, OT TR-0 is unflat and must be flattened). Although OT TR-0 isn't coached by the coach, TR-0 does require some coaching, in order to get the student to sit there and confront -- which is the purpose of TR-0. TR-0 BULL-BAIT The purpose of TR-0 is just to get the guy to sit there and confront. But the purpose of TR-0 Bull-bait is to get the student able to confront a preclear. The purpose of these TRs must be stressed. OT TR-0 gets the student able to just be there. TR-0 gets the student able to be there and confront. TR-0 Bull-bait gets the student able to confront a preclear. The coach must use some sense and reality in his bull-baiting of the student, in order to present situations which test or could throw the student off his confront. Then the coach must flatten each of the student's buttons as it is encountered. A gradient scale of toughness is essential. First the coach presents the student with lighter situations to confront, flattens that, then steps it up gradiently until finally the student can confront anything that the coach (or a preclear) might say or do. Don't overwhelm the student at the start. Use a gradient. Always flatten each button encountered. Then step it up and make it tougher. Unfortunately coaches sometimes lose sight of the purpose of this TR -- to make the student able to confront a preclear -- and get off into doing something else such as dramatizing their own banks or trying to entertain or impress the rest of the class, neither of which has anything to do with coaching TR-0 Bull-bait. In fact on TR-0 Bull-bait, the coach must be in PT and be very alert in what he is doing, and in observing the student so that he can spot any break in the student's confront and flatten it. A coach who goes off into his own dramatizations is actually unflat on OT TR-0 and TR-0 himself and should be put back to flatten them; he won't be able to coach TR-0 Bull-bait, much less be able to drill it himself, until his own OT TR-0 and TR-0 are in. The coach must use a gradient scale of toughness in his bull-baiting, must be alert for and flatten any button of the student's that he encounters, and must get the student up to being able to confront a preclear. This requires good coaching with reality and with the purpose of this TR in mind. It is very much the supervisor's job to ensure that this gets done. TR-1 Most troubles on TR-1 go straight back to out earlier TRs (i.e., OT TR-0, TR-0, and TR-0 Bull-bait); for example, the student mumbles to himself as he is unaware of or unable to confront the person he is talking to. Or, does the reverse and talks loudly, harshly, mechanically, which is also a HCOB 18.4.80 - 3 - non-confront of the person to whom he is talking. Affinity level of the student-auditor is very important, and all too often the student or auditor whose TR-1 is out lacks affinity. He can't reach or be the other person (coach or pc), so has difficulty communicating. Sounding like a machine or robot is very not OK on TR-1. The student-auditor must be able to communicate naturally, with affinity, and reach the person he is talking to. TR-2 This used to be abused by an ultramechanical "Good", or "Thank you" to everything the pc or coach said. This was largely handled by the mid-78 revision of TR-2, in which it is stated that the auditor should acknowledge with a statement appropriate to what the pc said. A recognition of what would be an appropriate acknowledgement depends on the student's or auditor's reality. It isn't just a matter of clearing the words "appropriate" and "acknowledgement" (though this would help); it is also necessary that the student-auditor have a sufficiently high reality level that he can recognize what is, and what is not, appropriate. But this isn't really too difficult. If someone were to tell you that he had broken his leg, it would not be appropriate to say "Good"! Reality is important in TR-2. TR-3 Here most trouble comes from lack of understanding of what is meant by the term "Q & A", coupled with lack of understanding of the term "cycle of action" and why one should complete each cycle of action. Additionally, there is the bank tendency not to complete cycles but to Q & A instead. part of the trouble here is that the term "Q & A" has various different definitions and descriptions, like: "failure to complete a cycle of action", "changing when the pc changes", "accepting orders from the pc", and "question and answer". The materials on the subject of Q & A are contained in many different HCOBs and articles and tapes and unless a student takes the time and trouble to look up and study and work out all the various references (which very few people will do), he/she winds up with a misconception of what "Q & A" is. E.g., an auditor fixates on "not accepting orders from the pc about what to run on him" as a definition for "Q & A". The pc says "the room is too hot", and the auditor doesn't handle the room temperature as it would be (he thinks) "accepting an order"; or pc gets upset and suggests "Why don't you assess a BPC list?", and the auditor freezes because he feels that if he does so he will have Q & Aed. These may seem offbeat but I've seen them happen all too often. And yet these are usually accompanied by the auditor Q & Aing madly with every misdirection from the pc's bank and never getting a question answered -- or a cycle completed on the pc. I think this would be handled by: (a) a compilation of all the various texts on the subject of Q & A and on cycles of action into one comprehensive text; (b) an announcement to the effect that duplication processes (such as Opening Procedure by Duplication) cure the tendency to Q & A by increasing the ability to duplicate and to complete cycles of action. Run has now released HCOB 5 Apr 80 Q & A, THE REAL DEFINITION, which clarifies exactly what Q & A is. HCOB 18.4.80 - 4 - TR-4 The errors on this TR are most commonly either too abrupt a shift of attention or too slow a shift of attention back to the process (including no shift back to the process!). Beginning students love to get a pat phrase or set of phrases to use to mechanically/robotically "handle" all originations with. Then later they tend to get into all kinds of Q & A with originations. Basically it depends upon the student-auditor's ability to understand, which comes straight back to the student-auditor's own ARC level, as well as whether the student-auditor understands what he/she is supposed to be doing on the TR, and why. UPPER INDOC TRs TRs 8 - 9 (Upper Indoc TRs) are also essential to professional auditor training. TR-6 Here again the coach plays a vital role in that the coach must start off with a light gradient, and must ensure on this TR that the student becomes fully accustomed to, familiar with, and relaxed about controlling another's body. A lot of confusion is likely to blow off on this TR and the coach must get the student through it and to a point where the student learns that it is perfectly OK to run 8-C on another's body. The coaching here should be in the direction of encouragement and getting the student to do it. The coach should not present opposition as that is the subject of a later TR. This TR should concentrate on getting the student to do it, and showing him the importance of precision, accuracy and positiveness when running 8-C. TR-7 In this TR the coach starts presenting opposition on a gradient and getting the student more and more capable of continuing to run perfect control without being thrown or sinking to a lower tone level when faced with opposition. Hence the importance of getting the student very expert in TR-6 before embarking on this TR. And if the student has a hard time of it on this TR then drop back to and flatten TR-6, or any earlier out TR. Here again (as in TR-0 Bull-bait), the coach must be a coach, and not get carried away with his own dramatizations. Dramatization by the coach has nothing to do with coaching. (This doesn't mean that the coach shouldn't present dramatizations to the student, but the coach has to be in PT and not in his own bank.) Supervisors need to ensure that coaches do coach and neither overwhelm the student utterly, nor be so namby-pamby that the student's confront isn't raised. Hence the necessity for good coaching and for the supervisor to be on the ball and ensuring that the students and coaches are working on the TR. TR-8 An error on this is to fail to ensure that the term "tone 40" is well cleared, also the word "intention" as these terms are often subject to misinterpretation. HCOB 18.4.80 - 5 - The coach needs to ensure that the student does do the TR and doesn't become mechanical and just go through the motions. This is necessary because this TR has to do with intentions. It is however easy to observe whether the student is using intention or not, and to coax and persuade the student into doing so. The coach does have to get the student to do it. It is often a good idea to have the student and coach take turns in doing and coaching this TR, to increase reality on it. (The same is true of other TRs too.) TR-9 As this TR depends for its success on the student having mastered the earlier TRs 0-4, 6-8, any weaknesses in earlier TRs will show up here. The remedy for failure on this TR is to get the earlier unflat TRs fully in. The student and coach could err in either too readily quitting on TR-9, and drop back to earlier TRs rather than persist and get the student through and able to do it. Or, they will err in going on and on with the student failing. It is a point of supervisor judgement as to whether to keep them at it and get them through, or whether to return to and get in earlier TRs. The supervisor decides this on the basis of whether the student is making progress on the TR, whether the coach is coaching correctly, and handles accordingly. Earlier in TR training students were cycled through the TRs several times over. The idea here was to increase the gradient each time through, with the student getting better at it each time. This was to get the student more familiar with the TRs and to prevent the student from being stuck in a lose by miscoaching. The Professional TR Course is not run this way. The liability of cycling the student through the TRs is that the TR training then becomes permissive and doesn't result in professional auditors. Most auditors entering the Professional TR Course have already done lower level TR courses and have had objective processes. And where they haven't, cycling is an answer (but it isn't THE answer). Permissiveness in professional TR training is the main way that TR training for pro auditors went out. There are various purposes and uses for TRs. There are permissive TRs for new public, public Comm Course TRs, a therapeutic TR course as contained in the Survival Rundown, and there is the Professional TR Course. The uses and purposes of these various TR courses need to be kept separate. On the Professional TR Course we make a real pro auditor. The way to run the Professional TR Course is by getting the student to do it, one TR at a time, to a full pass on each TR. It is up to the twins to get each other through with professional coaching and high standards. The supervisor's job becomes very crucial. The supervisor is there to get them through to a full pass on each TR and graduated from the course as pro auditors. A supervisor who does his part in this diligently and effectively is worth his weight in gold as he is HCOB 18.4.80 - 6 - making pro auditors whose TRs will stand by them through the years of auditing ahead. Should the student fail on a TR on the Professional TR Course, he is started over from the beginning of the line-up, this time getting in each TR to a full pass, with his coach ensuring that he does, and the supervisor very actively in there making sure that the student becomes a real pro. COPYING It could be said with some humor that students on TR courses tend to obsessively copy. Unfortunately they do. They copy other students, they copy (or try to) what their auditor sounded like, or what they think he sounded like. And not infrequently, I have caught out students getting hold of another student's passing tape and trying to copy it. On TR critiquing there are repeating waves of all the students' TRs suddenly starting to sound alike. This usually traces to either an opinion leader (not someone who can get results as an auditor, but one who pretends to be an authority), or it traces to a bunch of students going out-ethics and trying to copy what they think students who passed sounded like. Invariably these copy the worst traits or characteristics in others' TRs, and after all that isn't surprising as if they understood the TRs materials in the first place, they wouldn't be compelled to try to copy others. It probably stems from some impulse to beat the system by attempting to steal the beingness of another whom they consider to be a winning valence = no beingness of their own. DRUGS I am convinced that most of the trouble with TR training in recent years is due to the increased incidence of heavy druggies arriving on TR courses. Now there is the point that doing TRs is therapeutic to druggies, helping them get over withdrawal symptoms as practiced by Narconon and in HGCs, and as an essential part of an effective Drug RD. But we need to differentiate between the use of TRs to help a druggie get over drugs, and the use of TRs in training a professional auditor. Of course TRs do give case gain even to nondruggies. One of the more obvious case gains visible on a lower level case from TRs is physical changes such as increased whiteness of the whites of the eyes, color changes in the iris, reduction or disappearance of creases and wrinkles from frowning and facial ridges, cessation of obsessive and continual body motion, and on many the awareness of a mind or bank as separate from themselves or their body. In order to avoid students on TR courses being cases and to preserve these two different uses of TRs, a delineation could be made of these two different uses, both valid in their own right: TRs for case gain, and TRs for pro auditor training. Heavy druggies have invariably failed in auditor training on TRs courses until their drugs were handled, the minimum being a Purification RD, but I think that many would also need Objectives and a Drug RD in order to succeed on a Professional TRs Course. OBJECTIVES Partly covered above under TRs 6-9, and under Drugs. HCOB 18.4.80 - 7 - A very successful action was done on Flag, on Ron's advice, of putting all tech trainees through a checksheet and course called the "Tech TRs Course and Objectives Co-audit". On that course the students did all TRs 0 - 4, 6 - 9, and co-audited a full battery of objective processes on each other (on a read it, drill it, do it basis). After this, they actually studied and drilled TRs 0-4, and did their electronic attest (getting TRs tapes passed on actual auditing sessions during their interneship). Those working on getting their TR tape passed had already co-audited a full battery of objective processes on each other. (And the additional advantage of co-auditing these processes is that they got it both ways, on themselves as a pc, and they learned the discipline of running Objectives as an auditor, both being important.) (This whole line-up of TRs 0-4, Upper Indocs, co-auditing Objectives and much more, is now available on the Survival Rundown.) In 1979 while viewing a batch of student TR videos, Ron analyzed the difficulty these students were having with TRs as due to their lack of "R" (Reality) and "A" (Affinity). He pointed out that they were trying to Communicate ("C"), but their own "A" and "R" were so depressed, that their "C" couldn't be brought up (without raising their "A" and "R"). In other words these students hadn't made the case gains available from objective processes and ARC Straightwire. Until a person has been audited on objective processes and ARC Straightwire, he can't see, and he is out "R" and out "A". Ron also stressed that these are essential to the making of a Scientologist, as on these processes a pc will make quite a breakthrough. He/she will realize the communication formula, and that something is really real, affinity goes up, and the pc goes into ARC with the environment and life. This is an important step in becoming a Scientologist. And these gains are a very necessary prerequisite to pro auditor training. (SOED 1367 INT, 14 Jan 80 SPEEDING UP SLOW OR BOGGED STUDENT AUDITORS AND INTERNES implements and gives a supervisor the ways to handle these points above when they are found out on tech trainees and Professional TR Course students.) AFFINITY, REALITY, COMMUNICATION & UNDERSTANDING As pointed out above, unless the student-auditor can rise to a high enough level of ARC, then he won't succeed on a pro TRs course (nor in sessions as an auditor). He probably needs to be at least 3.0 or 3.5 on the tone scale to be able to do pro TRs successfully (or to audit successfully). If he is lower on the tone scale, his own ARC level is insufficient to be able to engage in a positive or theta exchange of communication with another being. There is an essential basic that needs greater stress, and that is that we are seeking in TR training to bring about the ability in a being to be able to communicate (in ARC) with another being, to complete communication cycles, not to get sidetracked into another subject, etc. The fundamental being the ability to get into ARC with another person, and to maintain that ARC. That ability is partly acquired by case gain and partly by training. ESSENTIAL MATERIALS FOR STUDY IN TR TRAINING The following materials (which haven't always been on TR HCOB 18.4.80 - 8 - course checksheets) are essential in that the student must study and understand and be able to apply them to succeed on pro TR training: The ARC Triangle The Cycle of Action The Communication Formula Materials on Q & A The Axioms 21 - 28 (especially Axiom 28) Book: THE FUNDAMENTALS OF THOUGHT Book: DIANETICS '55! (chapters on communication) Book: THE PROBLEMS OF WORK (on A, R, and C) Book: THE MECHANICS OF CONTROL AND S-C-S Material on "Beingness", especially HCOB 10 Apr 80 AUDITOR BEINGNESS These materials above are in addition to the HCOBs on TRs. ESSENTIAL STUDY ACTIONS 1. Study of the ARC triangle. 2. Study of the cycle of action and the cycle of communication. 3. Study of the communication formula. 4. Representing the communication formula in clay. 5. Representing Chapter VII of DIANETICS '55! in clay. 6. Study of each TR, including clearing misunderstoods and getting off false data. 7. Work out how each TR relates to the communication formula. (Note: This is only useful when the student knows what the comm formula is and understands it.) 8. Study of the end phenomena and valuable final products of TRs (as given in HCOB 24 Dec 79 TRs BASICS RESURRECTED). OTHER DATUMS It is up to the supervisor to get the students to do the TRs, and to get them through each TR to a pass. This is the make-break point of any TR course -- the supervisor getting the students to do the TRs. Only supervisors who have done a Professional TRs Course and have themselves gotten a pass on TRs, have succeeded in running a TRs course. In practice I have had to dig the supervisor out of the video room. By which is meant that the TR supervisor starts spending all his time looking at videos that students have made of their TRs, to see if there is a video good enough to send up for a pass, instead of the supervisor spending most of his time on the floor in the course room getting the students' TRs in, and then when the student has made it on TRs, then and only then, make a video. Otherwise the supervisor gets glued to the TV screen. (This is also a kind of stat push instead of going for quality products.) TR courses have been subject to corruption in stat pushes in that different items on TR checksheets have different amounts of points and there have been certain items that give higher HCOB 18.4.80 - 9 - points than other items and in times of stat push the students are gotten to do or redo the items that yield higher points to get the student points up before Thursday 2:00 p.m., without any regard for training these students to be able to do TRs and thereby producing graduates who can apply what they have learned (i.e., quality products). Such a course can appear "upstat" due to "power" stats -- student points -- while crippling tech training in academy, internship and messing up the HGC with failed auditors. (A point of some bitterness with me.) Maybe a genuine desire to make auditors who can audit, on the part of the supervisors and executives in a training org, is amore important factor than I have realized, and possibly more of the difficulties over the past year on TR training are due to its lack. I think with some derision of a fellow who claimed ineffectiveness due to out tech on his case, but omitted to mention that he was audited and C/Sed by those he was responsible for training. So a possible solution is to permit the executives and supervisors over a tech training area to only be audited and C/Sed by those they have trained in order to give them more incentive to train auditors who will be able to audit successfully. TR CRITIQUING I feel there is a wide gap between being able to do TRs successfully oneself and being able to successfully critique another's TRs. It's quite another level of skill. Points in my experience in learning to critique TRs under Ron are: 1. There's a danger of not being certain enough and seeing an auditor or TR student do something that I wouldn't have done, but dismissing it on the basis that what I would or wouldn't do is not a valid criterion. That has always been a mistake as the reason I didn't like what I saw or heard was because it was a TR outness -- otherwise it wouldn't have jarred my attention. The handling I found for this was (whenever I saw or heard something I didn't like on a TR tape/video) to replay it until I could isolate exactly which of the TRs 0 - 4 had been violated and how exactly. Or, how it violated or omitted part of the comm formula or the ARC triangle. In other words, by comparing it to the basic technical data, reviewing the basic tech data, and isolating the exact departure from those basics. 2. Writing up critiques of TR videos before they were critiqued by Ron, and then after he had critiqued them, comparing his and my critiques, and on any that differed replaying the video and watching it again until I clearly saw what I had missed previously. Then again reviewing the basic tech data on that area. 3. Working out the ideal scene for a session (see definition of "in session"), and the auditor's TRs in relation to this. 4. Working out the purpose of TRs and of each TR. Comparing this to the purpose of auditing, the definition of "in session" and how these relate. 5. Having high ARC for auditors and for pcs generally and an earnest desire to help them succeed. HCOB 18.4.80 - 10 - 6. Not letting an auditor go on failing on a TR course but getting the guy debugged, or some act of compassion even if as little as a letter to let him know that someone cared and to get some hope back up, getting O/Ws pulled, word clearing done, inspection of the course for WIAC PL outnesses, coming down on any dilettante attitude, verbal tech, or out-ethics. 7. A measure of humility borne of awareness of goofs I have made so as not to become authoritarian or out of reach and thus communication, with the students and supervisors. 8. Asking myself the question: "Would I want to be audited by this TR student or auditor?", and if not, establishing why not, and what would have to be done to correct it. 9. Always narrowing down and establishing the tech data or tech basic that was violated in any error and getting the guy onto the HCOB or book that covered this point so as to get him on source and avoid verbal tech or interpretation. 10. Withstanding the make-wrongs or bids-for-sympathy from those not up to a pass, seeking another way through than by achieving competence. 11. Knowing that it is possible to do the TRs and to do them right and an awareness of how valuable correct TRs are in auditing, both from my own experiences as an auditor and as a pc, on both good TRs and flubbed TRs. EXAMPLES AND REMEDIES 1. Student and coach don't seem to know what they are supposed to be doing on any TR, or are doing something they ought not to be doing, or are omitting part of the TR. Remedy: Get them both word cleared on the TR, and, have them both restudy the TR materials. Then get them back onto and doing the TR. 2. Despite word clearing and restudy of the TR, the student and coach can't apply what they have studied or are misapplying the data, or get confused and can't think with the basic data. Remedy: Get any verbal tech off per HCOB/PL 9 Feb 79 HOW TO DEFEAT VERBAL TECH. Get FALSE DATA STRIPPING done on both student and coach. 3. Despite drilling, the student cannot seem to be brought up to confronting. Or the student sounds and acts "dead". Or the student is nattery, critical or gets into "joking and degrading". Remedy: See HCOB 3 Feb 79 Issue II CONFRONT TECH HAS TO BE PART OF THE TR CHECKSHEET. Get the person's O/Ws pulled, especially tech O/Ws. 4. Student is displaying roller-coaster, or is NCG (no case gain) as a student, or is being out-ethics. Remedy: Route to ethics for handling (per HCO PL 5 Apr 65 THE NO-GAIN-CASE STUDENT). 5. Student is showing a lack of perception, is wooden, out of PT, stuck back on the track or in drug pictures, can't learn despite word clearing, is dull, lacks self-determinism. Remedy: Put the person onto and through the Purification RD. HCOB 18.4.80 - 11 - 6. Student has done the Purification RD, but is not fully in PT, lacks perception or coordination. Doesn't perceive PT environment rapidly and with clarity. Or, lacks experience on TRs and objective processes. Remedy: Put him onto the Survival Rundown. 7. Student is lacking in Affinity, Reality, Communication or Understanding. Remedy: Get the student to do the parts of and the whole ARC triangle in clay. (Use the books: THE PROBLEMS OF WORK, THE FUNDAMENTALS OF THOUGHT, and DIANETICS '55! as references.) 8. If after the above the student is still lacking in ARC, or doesn't seem sufficiently high toned to have and maintain ARC. Remedy: Have the student's ARC Straightwire Grade looked into and repaired and completed to its full result. Or get the Expanded ARC Straightwire Grade run if not previously run. 9. The student doesn't understand or can't apply the communication formula, or doesn't see how the TRs relate to the comm formula. Remedy: Get the student word cleared on the comm formula, then restudy it and demonstrate it in clay. (Note: After doing the comm formula in clay, the student can work out how each TR relates to the comm formula, and how the TRs relate to auditing. But this comes after doing the comm formula in clay, as otherwise he may not have sufficient comprehension of the comm formula. 10. The student doesn't understand or can't apply the comm formula and communication cycle, or the mechanics of communication. Remedy: Get the student to demonstrate in clay, Chapter VII, of DIANETICS '55! 11. Students or coaches not working or coaching in the direction of getting the TRs in better, or coaching without reality; unaware of how the TRs relate to auditing. Remedy: Thoroughly word clear and study the primary and secondary valuable final products of TRs and the end phenomenon of TRs (HCOB 24 Dec 79 TRs BASICS RESURRECTED). Work out the ideal scene for a session (see def: "in session"), and how each TR contributes to this when in, and detracts from it when out. 12. Student feels that he has gotten a TR done correctly once or twice or very briefly, and is afraid of "overrunning" it or that he might not get it right the next time or thereafter. Remedy: Pro auditor training is not a case action, but drilling to consistent and continual perfection of TR rendition. Once a person's TRs have been gotten in, they don't go out. A real pro can audit from there on out with perfect TRs. Point this out as the standard and get the student to continue the drill until fully and consistently competent. 13. The student gets part-way through the TRs and hangs up on a TR and can't make it to a pass on that TR. Or, the student has undue difficulty on a later TR. Remedy: Realize that the reason for the trouble is an outness an an earlier TR (or TRs). put the student back to the earliest TR that is out, and get these in fully. 14. The student gets through to the end of the TRs but hasn't made it fully, or cannot get a tape pass. Remedy: Realize that this is due to earlier TR outnesses and that he won't succeed until all earlier TRs are fully in. Put the student back to the beginning of the line-up (by which is HCOB 18.4.80 - 12 - meant he re-word clears, restudies the materials, does the clay demos again and starts at OT TR-0). Take each TR, from OT TR-0 on up, to a full pass. 15. Student failing and other remedies haven't handled. Remedy: Get the "TR Debug Assessment" assessed and handled to and F/N on each line. Do any additional handlings indicated as needed by this assessment. 16. For any lack of progress at an acceptable speed and to an excellent result. Remedy: Get the supervisor out on the floor in the course room actively and energetically getting the students to DO THE TRs! 17. After having done all the above, and the student's TR rendition is mechanically correct, and he has been very thoroughly drilled in all the TRs, including Upper Indoc TRs, there is something lacking in his attitude or presence that leaves him short of being a pro auditor. Remedy: Have him study and apply the data on auditor beingness. (Note: This data may only be studied or attempted after the student has become very proficient in and is thoroughly drilled in all the TRs including Upper Indocs. To attempt this action earlier would be a waste of the tech as it would be premature and out gradient. But when the student has been very thoroughly drilled in the TRs and has fully mastered them, then this action of doing the "Auditor Beingness" step will put the final polish on his TRs and will make him into a real professional auditor whose pcs go "into session" on his TRs alone and stay in session throughout the session. His pcs will rave about his auditing and the case gains they make. And there is the final reward for honestly and thoroughly doing each of the TRs, exactly the way Ron has laid them out in the materials, each to a full pass!) IDEAL TR TRAINING LINE-UP 1. Beginning or public TR training course, Comm Course. 2. The Purification Rundown. 3. The Survival Rundown. 4. A Drug Rundown. 5. Method One Word Clearing (preferably co-audited). 6. Expanded ARC Straightwire Grade (again preferably co-audited). 7. THE PROFESSIONAL TR COURSE. (Done to professional auditor standard, but not only for auditors, as the quality of having TRs of pro auditor standard is of great value to any Scientologist and will last with him as an ability from here on out.) L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER As assisted by Senior C/S Int LRH:DM:bk Copyright $c 1980 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER As assisted by Senior C/S Int   Type = 11 iDate=10/4/80 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  AUDITOR BEINGNESS   Remimeo C1 IV Auditors and above Acad Supers and above  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 10 APRIL 1980 Remimeo RELEASED 31 JULY 1981 C1 IV Auditors and above Acad Supers and above AUDITOR BEINGNESS Ref: HCOB 18 Aug 71RA II TRAINING DRILLS REMODERNIZED Re-rev. 4 Sep 80 HCOB 24 Dec 79 TRS BASICS RESURRECTED HCOB 18 Apr 80 TR CRITICISM HCOB 26 Apr 71 I TRS AND COGNITIONS HCOB 10 Jun 79 Art Series 8 A PROFESSIONAL The data in this bulletin is for use by a student auditor or an auditor only after he has been thoroughly trained and drilled in TRs including Upper Indoc TRs, and after he has been trained in metering. When one is free of uncertainties on the technical basics of his profession and has mastered the mechanics of those technical basics he can move up into another strata and assume the full beingness of a professional in his field. So an auditor applies the Auditor Beingness step after he has acquired a good mastery of his basics, TRs and metering. To do otherwise would be out gradient, out sequence and would rarely, if ever, be successful. BEINGNESS, correctly defined, is: THE RESULT OF HAVING ASSUMED AN IDENTITY. ATTITUDE IS: THE OPINION ONE HOLDS OR THE BEHAVIOR ONE EXPRESSES TOWARD SOME PERSON, PLACE, THING OR SYMBOL AS A RESULT OF THE CONCEPT HE HAS OF IT. TRs reflect an auditor's attitude. And what is back of attitude? It is certainty and beingness. Your beingness and attitude toward the pc are the things which your TRs measure. If you as an auditor simply go into a robotic imitation of a tone level or attitude or identity you aren't there at all. It will be apparent in your TRs. It is the beingness which comes first and that gets reflected in your attitude and your attitude, in turn, is then reflected in your TRs. And what directly influences beingness? Certainty. Before one can assume the beingness of an auditor he must have certainty on the materials of auditing. That means certainty on TRs and certainty on the meter and his own metering. The importance of all these factors is based on the fact that they, each one, immediately and directly affect the pc's "in-sessionness." HCOB 10.4.80 - 2 - TRS AND METERING: THE TWO FOREMOST ACTIONS There is a very good reason why you do TRs and metering as your two foremost actions. It has to do with the pc being "in session." Any auditor worthy of the title has the goal of his pc achieving case gain. Toward that end, the first aim of the auditor is to put the pc in session. Until and unless that happens, nothing else is going to happen in the way of case gain for the pc. With your TRs in, the pc is confident that he is being listened to and that he is getting the attention that is desirable for the resolution of his case. Therefore he's willing to talk to you. If your metering is very exact and you're not leaving the pc up in the air or plowed in with mis-reads or false reads, he has confidence in what you're saying because what you say reads is what he feels. There's a coordination there. So between these two things we get the definition of "in session" for a pc which is: INTERESTED IN OWN CASE AND WILLING TO TALK TO THE AUDITOR. If your TRs are rough and your metering is bad you won't get that reaction in a pc and you won't get enough case gain to bother with. THE BASIC THING THAT MONITORS CASE GAIN IS: PC INTERESTED IN OWN CASE AND WILLING TO TALK TO THE AUDITOR. Without that, you won't get any case gain on a pc. With it, given that he is audited on the correct processes, the pc's case progress is assured. TRs And In-Sessionness There is some interesting data which points up this matter of TRs and in-sessionness. Back in the days before we had TRs I had a funny phenomenon occurring. I would audit somebody in London, then go away and time would march on. I'd come back, pick up the same pc and find him at the exact point where I'd left him, even though he had been audited by a lot of other auditors. That would be 6 or 8 months and lots of auditing hours later. It would be explained away with, "Well, of course, Ron is a good auditor," and naturally they were saying that. Actually, that would be quite a critical thing to say about the other auditors as, while we didn't have pc programs then, we did have processes that advanced a pc's case. That being true, how did it happen that that pc stayed parked right where I had left him? The answer is elementary. When I was auditing him he was interested in his own case and willing to talk to the auditor. That was all. The phenomenon was pronounced and it showed up in other ways. Every now and then I would arrive at the London Org and people would come in from the surrounding cities or areas and hang around in the hall. I was moving around the org a lot and as I would move out into the hall someone would rush up to me and tell me an awful tale of woe. This person's husband had just left her, or that person had just gone through a bankruptcy or something horrible. They would give me these stories and I would acknowledge them and then start to say something about HCOB 10.4.80 - 3 - what we might do about it. But they didn't listen any further to what I was saying after the acknowledgement; at that point they would go off and seem perfectly happy. It didn't just happen once; it wan rather a consistent phenomenon. I never did anything to solve any of those problems, and they were legion -- there were hordes of them. Very peculiar. I began wondering what exactly this phenomenon was and the HCO Area Secretary at the time volunteered: "They just want you to know about it and that makes them feel better." But the truth of the matter was that it was simply TR-2. They were willing to talk to me about their troubles and I was concerned, I was interested in them, and I did acknowledge that it was a rough scene, etc. And apparently that was adequate to convey to them that they had now talked about their troubles and been heard, and that was it. Somebody was willing to listen to them and acknowledge and that, apparently, would blow it. That's TR-2. I am not holding myself up here as the last word in TRs. The whole point I am making is the fact that if your TRs were good enough you could almost bypass processes and get a surface level of case gain. You wouldn't get anything in depth but you would get a surface level of case gain. The phenomenon described above has been going on for a long time. It's been going on since the earliest days of Christianity and I'm sure the Christians picked it up from somebody before that. It's a basic mechanism so somebody picked up this confessional idea somewhere along the line. It's very far from the only mechanism there is in the mind, but it in itself was good enough to carry the Roman Catholic Church through hundreds of years over the out TRs of those father confessors. (There is no way that confront and TR 0 could be construed as in when the father confessor goes into his box, pulls the curtain and then listens to a confessional.) Also, anything that Freudian analysis ever had to offer depends exclusively upon this same mechanism -- the person feeling that he has been listened to. But there is not a psychoanalyst in the business who ever heard of TR-2. You want to know how someone being analyzed can sit there and talk for hours and hours on the same subject? Obviously the psychoanalyst's TR-2 is out because he's making the pc overrun. And all the psychiatrists know how to do is give the person another pound of tranquilizers or electric shock. That is lousy TR-2. It is not even a substitute. Some years ago I didn't even know TRs existed, that they were anything special or could be broken down into anything. But in Phoenix, Arizona, when I was giving live demonstrations on closed circuit TV for students, one staff member came out very, very excited about a discovery he had made. His discovery was: "You acknowledge what the pc says!" There apparently wasn't another auditor the length and breadth of the world who was doing that, so I decided I had better study this. It led into, over the years, a very deep analysis of the cycle of communication. Apparently nobody had ever analyzed this before but there is a very full analysis of cycles of communication now and the bulk of it is contained in the early Saint Hill lectures. You are now studying the near ultimate of this strata of auditing. HCOB 10.4.80 - 4 - The whole point here is: if your TRs were good enough you would be known as a great auditor without doing a single thing. I'm not advising that you shouldn't do another single thing but I want to point up that just this factor alone -- good TRs -- makes people feel better. It becomes safe to talk to the auditor and they become willing to talk to the auditor with confidence they will be listened to and acknowledged. It comes down to the definition of "in session": interested in own case and willing to talk to the auditor. That definition of in session is such that I can C/S and spot, even from fragmentary worksheets, whether or not the pc is in session. When I am first C/Sing on a new line that is really all I look for. If it's out, I mend it. When I've got it mended then we can begin to get someplace. If you've got thousands of years of background history where they were getting along without knowing a blasted thing about TRs and it still had a workability, you can see where you could get if you really knew your TRs. The potential is there and it is up to every auditor to realize it. Metering And In-Sessionness The pc's in-sessionness is going to be influenced by your understanding of the meter and your metering. When you have confidence in the meter and your metering ability you build greater confidence on the part of the pc. First, it's got to be real to you as an auditor that the meter has something to do with the being you have it attached to, that it does connect up with that person's bank and that the meter works. It is important for the pc to realize that too. There is a drill which makes this real to both auditor and pc. It's called the pinch test. Whenever I have a new meter to test I put someone on the cans, give him an R-factor on what I'm going to do, and then I just reach over and pinch the person. Then I ask him to recall the pinch and when he does I see a meter read occur. I know then whether that meter works or not. The theory behind this is quite simple. Life has the ability to register an impingement and to retain it or reduplicate it. Life has that ability and that is all the meter measures. So, when you do a pinch test you'll see the meter read. You can actually see the meter read before you pinch if you reach up and then don't pinch. It is simply a matter of reactions. The meter is measuring reactions to impingements in life. That is all there is to it. In a pinch test it is measuring the reaction to the impingement of the pinch. There is another datum that can be stated here to make it even clearer to an auditor how the meter connects up with the pc's bank. The E-Meter is an interlocking device with the electrons of the bank. With the bank you have a sheet of energy there and it is made out of electricity. When you pass a current of electricity near the thing it is going to monitor that current of electricity and that is what shows up on the meter. HCOB 10.4.80 - 5 - The auditor who understands that datum will have certainty on the fact that when the meter reads it is reading on something. If the meter reads when you ask about "ARC break" it is reading either on the fact that the pc has an ARC break or that he is startled to be asked if he has an ARC break when he really has a problem, but it is reading on something. You don't just walk on by it. This is what I had to teach Class VIIIs: that you check Suppress and False when all is not running well. Because for a meter to read something must exist for it to read on. And normally it is exactly what you said. You said "Do fish fly?" and it read. There is something there. An accurate meter does not idly read. Your knowledge of the meter and Four skill with a good operating meter has to be such that you have certainty on this and can't be given a sales talk and sold on the idea that "There's nothing there, really; it just happened to read." Without that certainty it goes off the rails. Instead of asking, "What was that withhold?" and really cleaning it up, you'll say, "Well, maybe. . . All right, maybe it was in some part life or something so let's go on to the next question ...." NO! There goes your pc out of session. That's it. He can't be interested in his own case now. His own case has just been alter-ised. Without certainty on the fact that when the meter reads it reads on something, you're going to waffle on what you ask the pc. That will deteriorate your beingness and your attitude and put the pc out of session. An auditor must also be a technician on meter interpretation. He observes the meter reaction; that's an observation. After observation there is a point of interpretation. Those are two different steps. You have to get observation down pat before you get into interpretation. So sandwiched in between your auditing question and interpretation is observation. What the auditor must not miss is his observation of the needle on the dial, that it moves and that it reacts and that it does so because it is connected to the pc. So there is a point of action in there which is observation. An auditor determines to find out something. That is an interrogation. It is followed by an observation, and that is followed by an interpretation. You've got to single out the observation as to what it is, and then the interpretation as to what it is, and the causation that makes the meter read as to what it is. You will then have these things unstuck and separated out from each other. There is nothing complicated about any of this unless someone makes it complicated. You can have a million interpretations and one truth. What makes the road hard to travel is that the interpretations (or alter-ises) are, every one of them, liable to be given the same importance as the truth. HCOB 10.4.80 - 6 - There can be an infinity of "facts" and only one truth, so that one truth gets lost like a drop of water in the ocean. Which is the drop of water? I'll tell you what the drop of water is: it is the point of observation. And part of that observation is the fact that the meter is connected to the pc and the pc does have a bank. It then becomes clear that the meter reads because there is something there for it to read on. So there is an area of confidence in the meter for the auditor which contributes to his auditor beingness. This results in greater confidence on the part of the pc which, in turn, contributes to the pc's ability to be in session. BEINGNESS AND ATTITUDE Once you have acquired certainty on your TRs and metering, the next step is beingness. This can give rise to an infinity of questions: "What is this 'beingness'?" "How do I assume a beingness?" "Is it an artificial beingness I'm wearing?" "Do I need to adopt a different beingness?" It is NOT a matter of a listing question, such as "what am I being?" It is something you simply have to work out for yourself; there isn't anybody who can do it for you. In sorting this out, one can get into such matters as interesting and interested. It should help to realize there is nothing worse than an interesting auditor. It's a wrong beingness. If you're disturbed by having to sit on a hard chair as an auditor, it will color your beingness. It will color your attitude. If your confront of evil is very low it will show up especially on your TR 0 and will cause you to do all sorts of odd-ball things with your TRs. What does confront of evil have to do with beingness? Well, what being can confront evil? It is not necessarily an evil being. Let us say a pc comes in and says, "I have just strangled a dog and took a great deal of pleasure in it," and you say "WHAT???!!!" You are never going to get him in the kind of shape where he doesn't go around strangling dogs. Why? Because he has just learned that he shouldn't talk to the auditor. Whatever you're doing as an auditor, if you're doing it through a colored beingness you've got a mis-attitude and your pc becomes unwilling. You start developing session withholds in the pc. These will be innocent withholds, such as "I don't have any interest in that but I won't tell him so," or "I didn't really think that read......" They will most likely be innocent withholds, but you now have a pc who isn't in there pitching. And that's the point at which the session deteriorates. If you're not sure of your beingness, if you haven't decided upon your beingness, if your beingness is wobbly, then your attitude toward the pc will be uncertain and wobbly. And your attitude toward the pc will then color your TRs. In that case you can ask "Do fish fly?" until hell freezes over and drill and drill and drill continuously and religiously. HCOB 10.4.80 - 7 - And you are not going to get anywhere until you get your beingness and your attitude settled. What IS auditor beingness? Well, what are you being as you sit in the auditing chair auditing the pc? Are you a beingness somebody would be willing to talk to? The general attitude connected with your TRs is what signals this. Your beingness as an auditor is something you yourself must DECIDE upon. It's a step to be taken when you are certain of your auditing basics. It could be done in minutes or it could require hours or days. But if you take a look at all of this data and apply it, you actually could simply decide "What is my beingness as an auditor?" and "Exactly what is my attitude toward pcs?" and your beingness as an auditor might suddenly go click. Your attitude then will fall comfortably into place, and that will be reflected in your TRs. These are the skills you need to acquire. But it is basic simplicities you are after, as I have described them here. I've given you an analysis of the scene that hasn't been stated quite this way before. It begins with certainty on technical basics, TRs and metering. It's then a matter of assuming an auditor beingness which comes across in your attitude. At that point your TRs, already well drilled, can be brought up easily to a point of flawlessness. And from there it's a short step to your pcs, each and every one, interested in own case and willing to talk to the auditor. L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER Accepted by the BOARD OF DIRECTORS of the CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY of CALIFORNIA BDCSC:LRH:bk Copyright $c 1980, 1981 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER Accepted by the BOARD OF DIRECTORS of the CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY of CALIFORNIA   Type = 11 iDate=5/4/80 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Q & A, THE REAL DIFFERENCE   TR Courses  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 5 APRIL 1980 TR Courses Q & A, THE REAL DIFFERENCE There are several definitions for the term "Q & A". In Scientologese it is often used to mean "undecisive", not making up one's mind. Q stands for "Question". A stands for "Answer". In "perfect duplication" the answer to a Question would be the Question. The real definition as it applies to TRs is "The Question proceeding from the last Answer." Example: Question: How are you? Answer: I'm fine. Question: How fine? Answer: My stomach hurts. Question: When did your stomach begin hurting? Answer: About four. Question: Where were you at four? etc., etc. The above example is a grievous auditing fault. As each question is based on the last answer, it is called "Q and A". It could also be called "Q based on last A". It never completes any cycle. It tangles pcs up. It violates TR 8. Don't do it. I trust the above handles any confusion on this subject. L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER for the BOARDS OF DIRECTORS of the CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY BDCS:LRH:dr Copyright $c 1980 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER for the BOARDS OF DIRECTORS of the CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY   Type = 11 iDate=13/3/80 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=1 rDate=22/11/81 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 109R CONDITIONAL STEP FOLLOWING THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN AND OBJECTIVES   Remimeo C/Ses Qual Tech Auditors Cramming Officers Supervisors  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 13 MARCH 1980R Remimeo REVISED 22 NOVEMBER 1981 C/Ses Qual (Revisions not in Script) Tech Auditors Cramming Officers Supervisors C/S Series 109R CONDITIONAL STEP FOLLOWING THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN AND OBJECTIVES (REF: HCOB 6 Feb 78RA THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN REPLACES THE SWEAT PROGRAM HCOB 16 Oct 78 REPAIR CORRECTION LIST HCOB 24 Nov 73RD C/S Series 53RL SF or LF HCOB 2 Jun 78RA CRAMMING REPAIR ASSESSMENT LIST HCOB 12 May 80 DRUGS AND OBJECTIVE PROCESSES) This bulletin has been revised to position its conditional repair step more correctly after the Purification Rundown and Objectives have been done, as that is where the majority of those who need the step will benefit from it most. The technical reason for this lies in the fact that Objective processing is a lower gradient than Subjective processing. The following from HCOB 12 May 80, DRUGS AND OBJECTIVE PROCESSES, gives an even more precise statement as to why this is so: "As the (Objective) process is orienting the person in the present time of the physical universe and as this present time is not threatening, he has a time point and a location point from which to sort out his confusions." HCOB 12 May 80 should be studied in its entirety for an understanding of the effects of drugs and of Objective Processes. But the statement above clarifies at once why most pcs who need repair and who have not flattened Objectives are not yet up to being audited on subjective repair actions (or at least not with maximum gain) until Objectives are handled. Such repair, attempted over undone but needed Objectives, can drag on, be ineffective and delay a pc from getting onto his next step and up the Bridge. It has done so in several reported cases. Occasionally a pc might need some type of repair following his Purification RD and before Objectives (such as Int or Out Lists). And certainly not all Purification pcs who need repair of earlier actions are incapable of handling subjective processes. These are points for C/S adjudication, and the C/S is guided in this by his understanding of how and why Objectives work and what they accomplish. When a person has completed the Purification Rundown and has had full Objectives, before he then goes onto or back onto a subjective auditing program of any kind, it may be necessary to: HCOB 13.3.80R - 2 - Rev. 22.11.81 1. CORRECT ANY FAILED AUDITING REPAIR HE WAS GIVEN BEFORE THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN. 2. REPAIR AND COMPLETE ANY FAILED AUDITING PROCESS HE WAS GIVEN BEFORE THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN. 3. REPAIR ANY FAILED CRAMMING, CORRECTION OR ESTO ACTIONS HE WAS GIVEN BEFORE OR DURING THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN. These are not necessarily actions that would be done on every pc, one for one. They are steps to be considered by the C/S in each such case he programs, particularly if the person has had a rough auditing history or a rough study or training history. THE WHY FOR REPAIR OF REPAIR FOLLOWING PURIFICATION AND OBJECTIVES We know that deposits of drugs and biochemical substances in the body can prevent or inhibit case gain. Thus, where a case has been in rough shape and/or had extensive repair before the Purification Rundown, it is possible he could receive limited gain at that time. He may be hung up in failed auditing actions or errors in the repair from that period. To simply continue to give him subjective auditing over such hang-ups could give him losses or limited benefit. But when he has eliminated the debilitating effects of drug residuals on the Purification Rundown and when Objective Processing has brought him into present time, in better control and in better communication with his environment, auditing repair and other actions can be effectively carried out with full realization and/or resurgence of case gain. Additionally, we know that mental auditing actions and even sometimes Objectives do not work in the presence of drugs or other harmful deposits. We also know that drugs and drug residues impede learning. So it is obvious that persons loaded up with street or medical drugs or other harmful toxins would not be able to be crammed or repaired before or during the Purification Rundown or Objective Processing with the same effectiveness as they would be once these actions were complete. Thus you are likely to find cases around who were mis-crammed or messed up on cramming who now, after Purification and Objectives, need a sort-out on those actions and the errors in all of it handled. A civilization on drugs or made up of unhandled ex-druggies cannot learn. The Purification Rundown, coupled with well-run Objectives, can reverse that. What has now been borne out conclusively (and quite resoundingly in some cases) is that once a person is free of these harmful residues and is well-oriented in present time he can now study more efficiently and learn, perhaps for the first time. He is now better able to absorb and use information, and he often can also better appreciate what is going on around him. For our purposes in programming cases this tells us that any failed cramming or correction actions undertaken prior to or during Purification can now be effectively handled to get the person back on the rails and winning. HCOB 13.3.80R - 3 - Rev. 22.11.81 Failed cramming or correction can hang a person up and affect his auditing gain as well as his post performance. Mishandled auditing or mishandled auditing repair and auditing losses can affect the person's post performance as well as his case gain. So one checks both areas (auditing and cramming) for any failed handling that may need repair. SEQUENCE OF ACTIONS TO TAKE When the person has completed the Purification Rundown, and has gone on to receive full Objectives or filled in any Objective Processes previously missed, these are the steps one would follow: 1. Ensure the person is maintaining a proper personal schedule and has not dropped out any supplementary nutrition, exercise or adequate sleep in the amounts he needs now to function best. (Ref: HCOB 6.2.78RA THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN REPLACES THE SWEAT PROGRAM, page 18.) 2. A. Check, by folder study or FES, to determine whether or not correction of auditing repairs, or the repair or completion of auditing processes given prior to the Purification Rundown, is needed. (Note: As auditing is not done concurrently with the Purification Rundown, these would be actions that preceded the Rundown. However, if any such action was done during the Rundown, this would also need to be checked for result.) B. If case repair is indicated, use: HCOB 16 Oct 78 REPAIR CORRECTION LIST and/or HCOB 24 Nov 73RD C/S Series 53RL Short or Long Form or other appropriate list to detect and get handled the exact outness. 3. A. Determine if cramming or correction repair would be needed by a review of any cramming, correction, Esto or hatting action the person was given before or during the Purification Rundown, and the results of these. B. If, per folder study, cramming or correction repair is indicated, use: 1. HCOB 2 Jun 78RA Cramming Series 18R Rev. 30.8.81 CRAMMING REPAIR ASSESSMENT LIST to detect and get handled the exact outness. 4. When any past failed actions are fully handled to VGIs, re-program. One wouldn't harass or hold up a pc with any unnecessary repair or over-repair or overrun, either in auditing or cramming. But to omit or ignore any of these actions where they are needed would be to lead the person into losses in his future auditing or losses and failure on his post or in his job. So let's not risk that, as it's totally avoidable. A person complete on the Purification Rundown and Objectives, with his long-standing barriers to successful auditing, study or training removed and his confront and awareness up, is ripe for all the gains to be had, repair-wise or otherwise. He'll get all the gains to be had if he's handled and programmed correctly. HCOB 13.3.80R - 4 - Rev. 22.11.81 A wise and skilled C/S will get the needed actions and only the needed actions done, on a spot-on basis. There are now hundreds of completed preclears rolling off the Purification Rundown and through the SRD, many of them ready to take off and fly on their next auditing. The others may only need one or more of the actions listed in this bulletin to clear the way for all the latent and potential gains awaiting them. I count on you to get each and every one of them flying! L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER Assisted by Research and Technical Compilations Unit Accepted by the BOARD OF DIRECTORS of the CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY OF CALIFORNIA BDCSC:LRH:RTC:drm Copyright $c 1980, 1981 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER Assisted by Research and Technical Compilations Unit Accepted by the BOARD OF DIRECTORS of the CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY OF CALIFORNIA   Type = 11 iDate=7/3/80 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  DIETS, COMMENTS UPON   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 7 MARCH 1980 Remimeo DIETS, COMMENTS UPON (Nothing in this HCOB should be interpreted as prescribing or recommending dieting or diets. It is a summary of personal opinions reached after research into the field.) Locating and remedying deficiencies and excesses in vitamins, minerals, enzymes, sugar, protein, oil and fats, carbohydrates and bulk fiber as well as other dietary elements is the keynote of dieting. No special substance or food or abstinence from it is a whole answer. Diet should be considered a subject where one seeks a balance of body support elements and determines quantity. The problem of weight is resolved by counting daily calories of consumption of the diet as a whole. This is the only contemporary successful method which proves itself. Fasting, magic foods eaten to the exclusion of others, dozens of dietary fads alike tend to be more harmful than beneficial. At times, personal allergies have to be taken into account. In some persons, disease or illness has to be allowed for. But in both cases the artificial creation of deficiencies in vitamins, minerals and other elements must be guarded against and made up for in some other way. When large dosages of certain vitamins, minerals or foodstuffs are given, an artificial deficiency can apparently be created in others not given. Increase of some elements, just by the fact of being increased, demands increases in others. When intake of some elements is markedly increased, balance must be maintained by proportionately increasing others. vitamin or mineral does not work alone -- it must be accompanied by other elements with which it combines to do its work. It will even rob bones, muscles and tissue to obtain the missing elements. Artificial deficiencies can be so created. Any vital substance on which body support depends, when too reduced or omitted from consumption, can be depended upon to result in a nonoptimum physical condition. When very obvious, it becomes a "disease". And when less obvious and even undetected, it becomes a "not feeling good". There is a distinct possibility (after mental and spiritual factors) that the largest distinctive contributive factor in aging is the composite of cumulative deficiencies. Predisposition to other types of illness is in many instances occasioned by these deficiencies even when the precipitation is viral or bacterial. Prolongation of illness is guaranteed when deficiencies remain present and unremedied. HCOB 7.3.80 - 2 - A lot of people probably go on drugs because they feel so terrible due to dietary deficiencies. And drugs, themselves, cause wholesale vitamin and mineral deficiencies, which then progressively worsen. Recovery from drugs requires a full repair of these deficiencies. The bugbear is that man does not know what man's optimum diet really is. And another difficulty arises in that not all essential elements to life support have been isolated. Improvement in these two areas of research is what will produce greater longevity and better health for man, barring mental factors, which of course we have now isolated and resolved. As we are dealing with a being in an organism, our work is impeded by man's slow progress in biochemical and physiological spheres and the attendant authoritarianisms and faddisms which always arise around uncodified or little known subjects. The most useful published, popular compilations on the subject of diets and biochemistry to date were done by the late Adelle Davis in her four books: "Let's Get Well", "Let's Eat Right To Keep Fit", "Let's Cook It Right" and "Let's Have Healthy Children". An improperly fed and cared for body is a kind of trap. And as long as one is pushing a body around, he should make a sincere attempt, without becoming its slave, to provide it with the fuel, care and exercise required to keep it functioning. L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER LRH:pb:gal Copyright $c 1980 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER   Type = 11 iDate=29/2/80 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN: PREGNANCY AND BREAST-FEEDING   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 29 FEBRUARY 1980 Remimeo THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN: PREGNANCY AND BREAST-FEEDING (Ref: HCOB 6 Feb 78RA THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN Rev. 4.12.79 REPLACES THE SWEAT PROGRAM BOOK: DIANETICS: THE MODERN SCIENCE OF MENTAL HEALTH) Pregnant women should not be routed onto the Purification Rundown. During pregnancy there is a certain amount of fluid exchange between the mother and the fetus, via the placenta. It has been found that on the Purification Rundown, toxins which might have been lying dormant in the body are released and eliminated via sweat-out. In the case of pregnancy, some of these toxins, instead of being eliminated, could be transmitted to the fetus in a flow of fluids from the mother to the unborn child. There is no reason to risk the possibility of subjecting the unborn child to the effects of such toxins which, even if present but remaining dormant, might not otherwise reach him. Similarly, mothers who are breast-feeding their babies should not do the Purification Rundown until the baby is no longer being breast-fed, as any toxins released during the Rundown could be imparted to the baby in the mother's milk. The Purification Rundown would be done by the mother after the birth of the child and after any final medical check which pronounced the mother in good health, and, in the case of breast-feeding, when the baby had been completely weaned and was on his own formula. L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER Assisted by LRH Technical Compilations Unit for the BOARDS OF DIRECTORS of the BDCS:LRH:RTC:gal CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY Copyright $c 1980 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER Assisted by LRH Technical Compilations Unit for the BOARDS OF DIRECTORS of the CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY   Type = 11 iDate=14/2/80 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  RESEARCH DATA ON NUTRITIONAL VITAMIN INCREASES ON THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 14 FEBRUARY 1980 Remimeo RESEARCH DATA ON NUTRITIONAL VITAMIN INCREASES ON THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN (Ref: HCOB 6 Feb 78RA THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN Re-rev. 4.12.79 REPLACES THE SWEAT PROGRAM HCOB 6 Feb 78RA-1 THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN Add of 20.12.79 -- ERRATA & ADDITIONS HCOB 3 Jan 80 PURIFICATION RUNDOWN AND ATOMIC WAR) The original bulletin on the Purification Rundown (HCOB 6 Feb 78RA THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN REPLACES THE SWEAT PROGRAM) contains, as a record of researches and results, the approximate amounts of the various nutritional vitamins on which most persons were started on the Rundown. The table below gives further research data on approximately how these vitamins were increased, in ratio, when the Niacin was increased as the person progressed on the Rundown. VIT VIT VIT VIT VIT B VIT MINERAL NIACIN A D C E COMPLEX B1 TABLETS 100 5,000 400 250 800 2 350 1 to 2 to to I.U. to I.U. Capsules to tabs 400 mg 10 000 1000 600 mg I.U. mg 500 20,000 800 2 1200 3 400 2 to 3 to I.U. I.U. to I.U. Capsules to 1400 mg 3 gm 650 mg 1500 30,000 1200 3 1600 4 450 3 to 4 to I.U. I.U. to I.U. Capsules to 2400 mg 4 gm 700 mg 2500 50,000 2000 4 2000 5 750 4 to 5 to I.U. I.U. to I.U. Capsules to 3400 mg 5 gm 1250 mg 3500 50,000 2000 5 2400 6 800 5 to 6 to I.U. I.U. to I.U. Capsules to 5000 mg 6 gm 1300 mg Cal Mag was increased from 1 to 1 1/2 to 2 glasses daily, depending upon individual need. The dosages in the table above show the variations of individual tolerances encountered and the ranges of increase which proved most effective in the majority of cases. The table does not include any additional vitamins which might be needed in cases of other specific vitamin deficiencies an individual may have, which may need to be determined by a medical doctor. HCOB 14.2.80 - 2 - It should be stressed here that individual tolerances were and always must be taken into consideration in each case. Quantities of Vitamin C especially would need to be carefully increased according to the person's tolerance of it, as too much Vitamin C results in stomach upsets or diarrhea for some people. The Vitamin B Complex used was one which contained: B1 - 50 mg Folic Acid - 100 mcg B2 - 50 mg Biotin - 50 mcg B6 - 50 mg Choline - 50 mg B12 - 50 mcg (Bitartrate) Pantothenic Acid - 50 mg Niacinamide - 50 mg PABA - 50 mg Inositol - 50 mg all in a base of Lecithin, parsley, rice bran, watercress and alfalfa. NOTE: The majority of Vitamin B Complex tablets on the market include Niacinamide in small amounts, which is the substance invented to keep from turning on the Niacin flush and as such is worthless. (Ref: HCOB 6 Feb 78RA THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN REPLACES THE SWEAT PROGRAM, page 11.) The likelihood is that this amount of Niacinamide in a B Complex tablet acts only upon its own Niacin content to eliminate any flush from its own content. Results from the piloting of the Rundown, where plenty of Niacin flush was experienced on different dosages of Niacin itself, in combination with other vitamins and minerals, indicate that the inclusion of the Niacinamide in the B Complex had little if any effect upon the flush that resulted from the additional dosages of Niacin taken. However, where a B Complex tablet can be found that includes Niacin rather than Niacinamide, that would be the preferable tablet to use. It is also possible to have a B Complex tablet especially made up that includes actual Niacin in amounts equal to the B1 and B6 amounts instead of Niacinamide, particularly if one is ordering it in fairly large amounts. Where a B Complex tablet that includes Niacin is used this adds that much more to the daily Niacin intake and this must be taken into consideration when increasing Niacin and B Complex dosages. The multi-mineral tablet used contained the following mineral amounts per each 9 tablets (in other words, one tablet would provide only 1/9 of the following mineral amounts): 500 mg calcium 250 mg magnesium 18 mg iron 15 mg zinc 4 mg manganese 2 mg copper 45 mg potassium (protein complex) .225 mg iodine (kelp). In this tablet the minerals, except the potassium and iodine, were "chelated"* (bonded with) super amino acids*, in a base of selenium, yeast, DNA, RNA, ginseng, alfalfa leaf flour, parsley, watercress and cabbage. *AMINO ACIDS, to define them very simply, are basic organic compounds which are essential to the body's breakdown and absorption of foods. *"CHELATION" is taken from a Greek word meaning "claw". It is a process by which minerals are held, as if by a claw, by amino acids. This bonding of a mineral with an amino acid exists in nature as a necessary step for the mineral to be absorbed and used by the body. Thus, with this step already provided, the mineral is more easily absorbed and used. HCOB 14.2.80 - 3 - Most multiple mineral formulas include the major mineral elements required by the body but not all of the trace minerals. "Trace" minerals are those minerals which have been found essential to maintaining life even though they are found in the body in very small -- i.e. "trace" -- amounts. The main trace minerals currently include: cobalt, copper, iodine, manganese, molybdenum, zinc, selenium, chromium and lithium. Tin was also added as an essential trace mineral as late as 1970. Nutritional researchists are the first to admit that the work in this field is very far from complete, and there will undoubtedly be other trace minerals added to the list as such research is continued. Currently, also, there are fairly wide differences of opinion among nutritionists as to the minimum daily requirements of the various minerals and especially the trace minerals. Minerals are found in a wide variety of foods. Natural foods, undamaged by processing, are the best sources of minerals as they exist in unprocessed foods in the combinations in which they are most effective. But minerals can also be lacking in foods grown in mineral-depleted soil. Additionally, of course, there is no one food that supplies them all. Therefore, it may be necessary to use more than one type of multi-mineral tablet to ensure one is getting all of the minerals, including the trace minerals, that are required by the body. The additional research data released in this issue is not to be construed as a recommendation of medical treatment or medication. It is given here as a record of the food supplements in the form of nutritional vitamins and minerals which were found effective in the piloting and development of the Purification Rundown. Three of the more informative books on the subject of nutritional vitamins and minerals are: "Let's Get Well", by Adelle Davis. Published by Harcourt, Brace & World, New York, N.Y. "Body, Mind and The B Vitamins", by Ruth Adams and Frank Murray. Published by Larchmont Books, 25 W. 145th Street, New York, N.Y. 10036 "New Life Through Nutrition", by Dr. Sheldon C. Deal. Published by New Life Publishing, 1001 North Swan Road, Tucson, Arizona, 85711. L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER As assisted by LRH Technical Compilations Unit BDCS:LRH:RTCU:gal for the Copyright $c 1980 BOARDS OF DIRECTORS by L. Ron Hubbard of the ALL RIGHTS RESERVED CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER As assisted by LRH Technical Compilations Unit for the BOARDS OF DIRECTORS of the CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY   Type = 11 iDate=11/2/80 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  ILLEGAL PCS, ACCEPTANCE OF ADDITION REGARDING PURIFICATION RD   Remimeo All Registrars All Case Supervisors All Ds of P All Auditors All Ethics Officers GO  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 11 FEBRUARY 1980 (Also issued as HCO PL of 11 Feb 80, same title) Remimeo All Registrars All Case Supervisors All Ds of P All Auditors All Ethics Officers GO ILLEGAL PCS, ACCEPTANCE OF ADDITION REGARDING PURIFICATION RD Ref: HCOB/PL 6 Dec 76 ILLEGAL PCS, ACCEPTANCE OF, HIGH CRIME BULLETIN HCOB 6 Feb 78RA THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN Rev. 4.12.79 REPLACES THE SWEAT PROGRAM This bulletin enforces Church Policy of not accepting psychiatric cases for services and makes it known that this includes the Purification Rundown. (These policies are stated in HCO PL/HCOB 6 Dec 76, ILLEGAL PCS, ACCEPTANCE OF, HIGH CRIME BULLETIN and these policies apply in full to the Purification Rundown as well as other services currently being delivered, and to any future services.) While psychiatric cases could possibly benefit from the Purification Rundown, it would have to be administered under clinical conditions and medical supervision and at the signed responsibility of those responsible for the case. Such cases could not be included in the general normal run of persons undergoing the Purification Rundown. This is issued not because of any inability to help such persons, but because of the fact that such persons are often, after psychiatric treatment, in a state of risk to themselves, to others and to their environments. L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER As assisted by Senior C/S Int for the BOARDS OF DIRECTORS of the CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY BDCS:LRH:DM:dr Copyright $c 1980 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER As assisted by Senior C/S Int for the BOARDS OF DIRECTORS of the CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY   Type = 11 iDate=12/1/80 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Art Series 9   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 12 JANUARY 1980 Remimeo Art Series 9 To do a montage, shot or work of art that talks one must: 1. Figure out what your message is. 2. Decide to communicate the message. 3. Put things or arrangements in that contribute to the message. 4. Take out or exclude things or arrangements which don't contribute to it. It also helps to know what is meant by "message". (Def: Message -- is a unit communication of a significance.) It also helps to know the definition of "montage" which is -- a series of shots with one message. One should also know the definition of a shot and should understand that a short cut or glimpse of something is just a blip or some frames as opposed to a scene or a "picture" and there is really a missing word for this in the English language. A scene is a picture with a message in its own right. A shot is anything and it has no message in its own right and doesn't talk unless connected to other shots or scenes. One should also know what is a sequence and what is an action sequence. A sequence is a series of scenes related by location or general subject. In films or a photo story it is comparable to a chapter in a book. An action sequence is often fast cut to give the appearance of rapid movement and will never be a montage as each picture in it is a scene and therefore has its own message. Individual shots in a montage have little meaning in themselves individually but when cut together deliver a single message. By confusing an action sequence and a montage or a montage shot and a scene, one gets very little audience reaction and after all, that's the name of the game. Doing things for self-satisfaction is for professors who can't. All of this comes under the heading of integration. Integration consists of uniting the similar. If you try to unite the totally dissimilar and unrelated you don't have integration and you don't have art. You have chaos. HCOB 12.1.80 - 2 - The principle of integration applies to all editing and composition in all fields. The above 1, 2, 3 and 4 is a formula that helps one to achieve clear aesthetic communication of art. L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER LRH:gal Copyright $c 1980 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER   Type = 11 iDate=11/1/80 Volnum=0 Issue=1 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 108 Cramming Series 21 QUAL CORRECTIVE ACTIONS ON OTs   Remimeo Cramming Officers C/Ses Tech/Qual  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 11 JANUARY 1980 Remimeo ISSUE I Cramming Officers C/Ses Tech/Qual C/S Series 108 Cramming Series 21 QUAL CORRECTIVE ACTIONS ON OTs References: C/S Series 107 AUDITOR ASSIGNMENT POLICIES, CRAMMING ASSIGNMENT POLICIES C/S Series 98 "AUDITING FOLDERS, OMISSIONS IN COMPLETENESS" The reason why it is necessary to have OT versions of the various Qual corrective actions is that an OT's case can be messed up if mis-audited or mis-crammed, and the purpose of Qual corrective actions is to improve or correct the staff member. The major cause of trouble in seeking to correct OTs has been violations of the auditor assignment policy, whereby a person of lower case level than the OT was trying to audit or cram the OT. Not only does this put the OT on a withhold of confidential data, but a person of lower case level has no reality on the materials of the case level of the OT and can easily stir up aspects of the case that should have been left alone, or, if taken up handled fully. Additionally if the OT did get messed up, then he could only be repaired by using repair actions appropriate to his case level. A non-OT III Cramming Officer or auditor could not possibly repair BPC on an OT III. Where Cramming Officers have limited their actions to simply word clearing the materials that the person had gone past misunderstoods on, it has worked out OK. But if the action being done led into the person's case then there is a liability of a messed up case and ineffective staff member. Some of the Qual corrective actions such as False Data Stripping and some of the questions on the Product Debug Checklist are not directed toward the person's post alone but are directed towards the person's case by asking about intentions or reactions or considerations or directing the person to recall past events. The statement: "I'm not auditing you.", doesn't prevent a case action from occurring if one then proceeds to ask auditing questions. The worst repercussions of all have stemmed from offline case actions done as some sort of squirrelly "2WC" which wasn't a valid part of the cramming action anyway. When subjective questions are asked one invariably is into a case action. Definition of "Subjective": "Consultation with the preclear's own universe, with his mock ups, and with his own thoughts and considerations." (Book: The Creation of Human Ability, p. 167.) "Recall, think, remember or return on the time track processes are subjective." (HCOB 2 Nov 57RA.) HCOB 11.1.80 I - 2 - Subjective actions, especially when metered, lead into the person's case. If mis-done, particularly if mis-metered, these can ball the case up. OTs when correctly handled with the correct tech appropriate to their case level, handle very quickly and easily. So it is important to know what to do and what not to do. The solution to this is in having specialized lists for OTs, and forbidding the use of non-OT actions on OTs, and forbidding non-OTs from seeking to audit or cram OTs. HOW TO DETECT FLUBBED CRAMMING There are ways to detect and isolate what happened in a mis-done cramming: - The person crammed has any BIs about the cramming action; - The person continues to goof in the same area or subject; - The person Red Tags on the cramming or within three days after the cramming action; - The person gets sick, misemotional on the subject of the cram, or turns on somatics, within three days of the cramming action; - The person is introverted on the subject of the cram; - The person comes to next session after the cram with TA or needle behavior worsened from what it was prior to the cram (such as TA used to be in normal range and now is high or low, or Sens setting for 1/3rd dial drop on can squeeze is now higher due to tighter needle, an unusual needle pattern has now appeared, etc.). A sharp C/S can usually spot a mis-done cram from the worksheets of the cramming action and must insist that these are legible and accurate (ref: HCOB C/8 Series 98, AUDITING FOLDERS, OMISSIONS IN COMPLETENESS). These indicators above apply to flubbed cramming at any case level, (not just OTs), and must be repaired within 24 hours. Where the person is of an upper case level, the C/S and auditor must be of comparable case Level (C/S Series 107). ACTIONS THAT CAN BE DONE There are actions that are OK to do in Cramming and will not get into the person's case. These relate to his post or study and are objective. Definition of "objective": "Of or having to do with a material object as distinguished from a mental concept, idea or belief" (dictionary). "Means here and now objects in PT as opposed to 'subjective'." (HCOB 2 Nov 57RA.) Questions or actions by the Cramming Officer which are objective and pertain to the person's post, the materials which cover his post, the materials he is studying, clearing words misunderstood, hatting actions and post or product debugs (provided subjective questions are not asked on OTs) are all OK. HCOB 11.1.80 I - 3 - The most usual and successful cramming action is simply to take the materials or text that covers the subject of the cramming order and word clear and cram those materials. This is always safe and OK to do. (The only other caution is not to give verbal data, nor to evaluate or invalidate or throw the person's Ruds out while doing the cram!) Word Clearing Methods 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9 are OK to do on OTs (but not Method One, which asks for "earlier similar?"). Finding and clearing Crashing Misunderstood Words is OK. Demonstrating meanings of words and terms and principles either with a Demo Kit or on Clay Table are OK. Starrate checkouts on materials are OK. Product Debug Tech is OK to do on OTs (provided the subjective questions on the assessments are omitted). All of the actions given in this section can and should be used in Cramming, and these have no liability. OTs when handled correctly in Cramming (or in auditing) are very fast and easy to handle, and correct very readily. L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER As assisted by Senior C/S Int LRH:DM:nc Copyright $c 1980 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER As assisted by Senior C/S Int   Type = 11 iDate=3/1/80 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=1 rDate=10/4/80 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  PURIFICATION RUNDOWN AND ATOMIC WAR   Remimeo All Staff BPI  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 3 JANUARY 1980R Remimeo REVISED 10 APRIL 1980 All Staff BPI (Revisions in Script) (Ellipses indicate Deletions) PURIFICATION RUNDOWN AND ATOMIC WAR References: HCOB 6 Feb 78RA THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN REPLACES Rev. 4.12.79 THE SWEAT PROGRAM HCOB 6 Feb 78RA-1 THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN -- Add. 20.12.79 ERRATA AND ADDITIONS PAB 74, 6 Mar 56 OFFICE IN IRELAND Technical Bulletins Vol II, pg 376 ABILITY 47, 1957, ca THE RADIATION PICTURE AND mid-May SCIENTOLOGY Technical Bulletins Vol III, pg 44 HCOB 3 Jun 57 EXPLANATION OF THE ABERRATIVE CHARACTER OF RADIATION Technical Bulletins Vol III, pg 52 PAB 119, 1 Sep 57 THE BIG AUDITING PROBLEM Technical Bulletins Vol III, pg 107 HCOB 27 Dec 65 VITAMINS Technical Bulletins Vol VI, pg 123 BOOK: ALL ABOUT RADIATION, May 1957 I want Scientologists to live through World War III. And I want them to be able to continue to make all the spiritual gain which is there to be had in their Dianetics and Scientology guidance and counseling. There are factors in the society today which contribute to the restimulation of the effects of toxic substances in the environment upon the thetan, the being himself. Atomic War has been more or less neglected as a news subject since the late '50s. But that doesn't make it any less a threat. All it takes is one psychopath politician with access to the war-peace button. And today there are a dozen atomic armed nations. Further, the increased use of atomic power for electrical supply (without also developing proper tech and safeguards in its use) poses a non-military threat. And the deterioration of the upper atmosphere of the planet, by jets and pollutants, is year by year letting more and more sun radiation through to the planetary surface. Apparently, radiation can cause a cumulative effect. And, like an engram; has earlier similars back to a basic engram. It would seem therefore, that the more one is exposed to radiation the greater the restimulation and the less resistance he has and the more effect the radiation has on him. In other words, a build up occurs. The primary purpose of the Purification Rundown is the Spiritual improvement of the person by handling the restimulative effects of the accumulation of drugs and toxic substances.... And, according to the success stories pouring in, it certainly does that. HCOB 3 Jan 80R - 2 - Rev. 10.4.80 One of the parts of the Purification Rundown is Niacin. The discoveries I made with this vitamin in the '50s began with its apparent effect on the restimulation of the being by radiation exposure. At that time there was a lot of bomb testing and general radiation exposure and we had lots and lots of preclears who had been subjected to atomic tests, atomic accidents and, in at least one case, to materials that had been part of an old atomic explosion. We were engaged in the spiritual salvaging of these people and we succeeded in that. As radiation would seem to be cumulative, once one has gotten rid of the cumulative effect of it and the restimulation of the spiritual being that this engenders, one could be far less subject to new blasts of it and their restimulative effects. In other words, once a basic has been run out or handled, new incidents of a similar kind become very minor. While there is no claim that one would be made wholly immune to new incidents, he could be far less spiritually affected by them and freer spiritually as an individual to cope with them. ... Bombarded by radiation from atomic plant fallout, from lessened atmosphere protection, people today are far more subject to being victims in the time of atomic war. The cumulative effect of radiation has set them up to a rapid demise in the face of heavy atomic fallout. With individuals thus far more subject to being spiritually affected by all of this, it brings us to the interesting probability that those who have had a full and competent Purification Rundown could fare better than others not so fortunate.... And that poses the interesting possibility that only Scientologists will have had the spiritual gain that would enable them to function in areas experiencing heavy fallout in an Atomic War. I want all Scientologists to have the benefit of such spiritual improvement. L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER The Purification Rundown has as its sole purpose the handling of the restimulative effects of drugs and toxic residuals on a Spiritual Being. The Purification Rundown is a Spiritual activity based on and administered according to the doctrine and practices of the religion of Scientology as set forth by L. Ron Hubbard. No part of the Rundown is intended as the diagnosis, prescription for, or treatment of any bodily or physical condition or ill. The Church is not responsible for the handling of any bodily or physical condition or ill, it being the responsibility of the individual to seek the competent medical advice and treatment of his doctor in such matters. THE BOARDS OF DIRECTORS of the CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY BDCS:LRH:dr Copyright $c 1980 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER THE BOARDS OF DIRECTORS of the CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY   Type = 11 iDate=24/9/79 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=1 rDate=26/8/81 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Cramming Series 19R FLYING RUDS IN CRAMMING   Remimeo Cramming Officers C/Ses Review Auditors Qual  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 24 SEPTEMBER 1979R Remimeo REVISED 26 AUGUST 1981 Cramming Officers (Revisions in Script) C/Ses (Ellipses Indicate Deletions) Review Auditors Qual Cramming Series 19R FLYING RUDS IN CRAMMING Ref: HCOB 15 Oct 74 Cramming Series 14 CRAMMING OVER OUT RUDS HCOB 2 Jun 78RA Cramming Series 18RA Re-rev. 30.8.81 CRAMMING REPAIR ASSESSMENT LIST HCOB 21 Dec 79 C/S Series 107, Cramming Series 20 AUDITOR ASSIGNMENT POLICIES. CRAMMING ASSIGNMENT POLICIES HCOB 11 Jan 80 I C/S Series 108, Cramming Series 21 QUAL CORRECTIVE ACTIONS ON OTS HCOB 11 Aug 78 I RUDIMENTS DEFINITIONS AND PATTER BEFORE BEGINNING THE CRAMMING CYCLE: FIRST CHECK THE PERSON'S PC FOLDER TO ENSURE HE IS NOT IN THE MIDDLE OF (OR C/SED FOR) INT REPAIR, INT HANDLING OR THE HANDLING OF OUT LISTS. IF INT OR LISTS ARE OUT THESE MUST BE HANDLED BEFORE ANY OTHER METERED ACTION IS DONE. ALSO CHECK TO ENSURE THE PERSON IS NOT IN THE MIDDLE OF AN ENGRAM CHAIN OR ANOTHER QUAL CORRECTIVE ACTION SUCH AS PRODUCT DEBUG OR CRASHING MU FINDING, ETC. AND THAT THE PC IS NOT C/SED TO GET A FLUBBED ACTION REPAIRED. IF YOU FIND ANY OF THE ABOVE, ENSURE THE PERSON IS GOTTEN INTO CRAMMING AS SOON AS THE INCOMPLETE CASE OR CORRECTIVE ACTIONS ARE COMPLETED. Per HCOB 15 Oct 74 CRAMMING OVER OUT RUDS, a Cramming Officer must not try to cram over out-ruds. Despite this, there still have been instances of persons being "handled" in cramming without the ruds having been gotten in, so no handling got done at all. HOW TO FLY RUDS IN CRAMMING TO BEGIN ... CRAMMING ..., ASSESS THE RUDS INCLUDING OVERTS, INVALIDATION AND EVALUATION AND FLY ANY THAT READ. THEN WHEN YOU HAVE CLEARED UP THE READS TO F/Ns AND HAVE AN F/N. BEGIN THE EXACT CRAMMING ORDERS INDICATED. You can mimeo a small form on which to assess these and mark reads which will save time. The form would look like this: "Is there ....... (normally used when flying ruds at the beginning of cramming) or, (used when the Cramming "On (subject) , is there ....... Officer wishes to address the rudiments to a specific subject) an ARC break?" _______ a present time problem?" _______ a withhold?" _______ an overt?" _______ HCOB 24.9.79R - 2 - Rev. 26.8.81 "Is there an ....... Invalidation?" _______ Evaluation?" _______ The Cramming Officer would assess on the form above and clip it to the worksheets. (If no reads on the list but person is not F/Ning, check Suppress or Invalidate on the list and handle.) Note: A person's ruds can also go out during a cram, at which point they must be put in. PREVIOUSLY MIS-DONE CRAMMING Mis-done crammings and failure to fly the ruds in cramming will mess up staff members, and undisclosed overts and withholds will prevent any gain, not just in auditing but in word clearing or cramming or other Qual corrective actions. Resistance to cramming, protest of cramming or natter about cramming, or other Qual corrective actions are indicative of out-ruds, especially overts and withholds against cramming or Qual or on the subject on which the cramming order was written. These symptoms of resistance or natter can also stem from having been crammed over out-ruds in the past, or having been mishandled in cramming. The way to handle someone who has been crammed over out-ruds in the past is to assess the following and fly each reading line to F/N (check Suppress or Invalidate if no reads on the list): "Has cramming been done over ....... an ARC break?" _______ a present time problem?" _______ a withhold?" _______ an overt?" _______ an Invalidation?" _______ an Evaluation?" _______ If someone is nattery or upset about Cramming, Qual correction actions, or Qual, use the assessment above on the subject of their complaint. E.g. you could assess: "Has word clearing been done over ....... ?" If the above does not resolve the matter fully, use the Cramming Repair Assessment List (HCOB 2 Jun 78RA), or other specific lists such as the Word Clearing Correction List (WCCL). CRAMMING OFFICER QUALIFICATIONS Because the Cramming Officer is required to do these actions, he or she must get checked out on how to do them. Possibly a reason why some did not fly the ruds despite HCOB 15 Oct 74 CRAMMING OVER OUT RUDS, is that the Cramming Officer did not know how to fly ruds and had not gotten himself trained to do so, then either didn't fly ruds before he attempted to do the cramming order, or did not do the cramming order at all "because the ruds were out." Both or these errors show an effect attitude that no real Cramming Officer (or Scientologist HCOB 24.9.79R - 3 - Rev. 26.8.81 for that matter) would be guilty of. Cramming Officers get tech in and being applied, staff members successful and winning on their post and are therefore very causative. A CRAMMING OFFICER MUST GET CHECKED OUT ON FLYING RUDS AND OVERTS AS THESE ARE VITAL TECH OF THE CRAMMING HAT. IF A CLASSED AUDITOR, HE MUST GET CHECKED OUT ON USE OF CORRECTION LISTS SUCH AS THE CRAMMING REPAIR ASSESSMENT LIST, WCCL, ETC. FAILURE TO CHECK OUT ON AND USE THE TECH OF THE POST IS AN ETHICS MATTER. CAUTION It has happened that Cramming Officers have made flying someone's ruds overly complex. Formal sessions have been done to get a person's ruds in before a cram when the person was already F/N, VGIs. This and other complications stem from not understanding what rudiments are, how to recognize when they are out and how to put them in. The definition of rudiment as "that which is used to get the pc in shape to be audited that session" could be applied to cramming to mean "that which is used to get the person in shape to be crammed." If the person is not in shape to be crammed you must get him in shape to be crammed or you risk getting no result or even messing the person up. But when the person is F/Ning and ready to get on with it, get on with it. Additionally, a Cramming Officer who knows how to fly ruds should also know to check that the person has had enough food and rest and to check the person's metabolism. (Done by having the person take a deep breath and let it out. The needle should give a latent fall in order to fly ruds. Ref. HCOB 4 Dec 77, CHECKLIST FOR SETTING UP SESSIONS AND AN E-METER) WORKSHEETS The worksheets (W/Ses) of all such actions (i.e. ruds, word clearing, crammings, Cramming Repair Lists, Product Debug Assessments and any other Qual corrective action), are put in the pc folder and sent to the Case Supervisor (C/S). The C/S will correct any out-tech or failure to fully handle, and in the case of no F/N at Exams or other out-tech, red tags the folder, until the matter is fully repaired. These worksheets must be complete, accurate and legible. In the case of a non-F/N Exam or other Bad Indicator, these have rush priority and must be handled fast. All the rules regarding worksheets apply to cramming and any other Qual corrective actions. IS A C/S NEEDED BEFORE FLYING RUDS IN CRAMMING? Someone may wonder if he needs to get a C/S to fly the ruds before doing so in a cramming action. The answer is: no. You do not need to get the pc's folder to the C/S before you fly the ruds in cramming. To do so would make an unnecessary delay, and you don't need a C/S to fly somebody's ruds. The C/S (Case Supervisor instruction) is contained in this issue, and that is what you do. HCOB 24.9.79R - 4 - Rev. 26.8.81 FOLDER CHECK BEFORE CRAMMING Sometimes a staff member has been known to have been started on and left incomplete on several different actions. E.g. the staff member is started on a cramming order, but before this is complete, someone starts doing a Crashing Misunderstood handling on him, they end for lunch and after lunch someone tries to start yet another action on the staff member. This is a serious situation indeed and it could be enough to spin somebody. So it is mandatory that before starting an action, you must check the folder first. Cramming orders and flying ruds in cramming and other Qual corrective actions do not require C/S OK before doing them as this would put an unnecessary and arbitrary delay on the line, and could be used as an excuse not to do the action. (E.g. "I couldn't fly his ruds because I didn't have a C/S to 'Fly the Ruds,' so I didn't do anything.") But since one would not start a new cycle in the middle of another incomplete cycle, and would not try to fly ruds or word clear over out-Int or out-lists (provided these really were out and not just a False or Protest read), the folder must be checked by the person who is going to do the action (this only takes a minute to do). BEFORE STARTING A CRAMMING OR OTHER QUAL CORRECTIVE ACTION, LOOK IN THE FOLDER TO ENSURE THE PERSON ISN'T IN THE MIDDLE OF ANOTHER QUAL CORRECTIVE ACTION, OR C/SED TO GET A FLUBBED ACTION REPAIRED. AFTER THE CRAMMING OR OTHER QUAL CORRECTIVE ACTION, SEND THE FOLDER TO THE CASE SUPERVISOR WITH LEGIBLE WORKSHEETS ON WHAT YOU DID AND THE EXAM FORM. FESing If a person has been "crammed" or has had other Qual corrective actions and has gotten worse, or made no improvement, then get all Qual corrective actions done on the person FESed by the Case Supervisor, and a program and C/S to repair these, and get that program done. Comm Ev anyone who interrupts or cross-orders or prevents such a program from being done, as that would be suppressive. Such a program has the priority of repairing a flubbed session and the folder is red tagged, until handled. USE THE TECH There are several new Qual corrective actions as well as all the earlier tools of cramming. These produce spectacular results when done correctly. Use this tech to make greatly enhanced staff members. YOUR CRAMMING WILL BE MANY TIMES MORE EFFECTIVE AND POPULAR IF YOU DO IT WITH THE CORRECT TECH. L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER As assisted by Snr C/S Int Revision assisted by Research and Technical Compilations Unit BDCSC:LRH:RTC:DM:bk Accepted by the Copyright $c 1979, 1981 BOARD OF DIRECTORS of the by L. Ron Hubbard CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY ALL RIGHTS RESERVED of CALIFORNIA HCOB 24.9.79R Rev. 26.8.81 ATTACHMENT 1 You can mimeo a small form on which to assess these and mark reads which will save time. The form would look like this: "Is there ....... or, "On (subject) , is there ....... an ARC break?" _______ a present time problem?" _______ a withhold?" _______ an overt?" _______ "Is there an ........ Invalidation?" _______ Evaluation?" _______ The Cramming Officer would assess on the form above and clip it to the worksheets. (If no reads on the list but the person is not F/Ning, check Suppress or Invalidate on the list and handle.) HCOB 24.9.79R Rev. 26.8.81 ATTACHMENT 2 The way to handle someone who has been crammed over out-ruds in the past is to assess the following and fly each reading line to F/N. (Check Suppress or Invalidate if no reads the list): "Has cramming been done over ....... an ARC break?" _______ a present time problem?" _______ a withhold?" _______ an overt?" _______ an Invalidation?" _______ an Evaluation?" _______ If someone is nattery about Cramming, Qual Correction actions, or Qual, use the assessment above on the subject of their complaint. E.g. you could assess: "Has word clearing been done over ........?" If the above does not resolve the matter fully, use the Cramming Repair Assessment List (HCOB 2 June 78RA), or other specific list such as the Word Clearing Correction List (WCCL).  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER As assisted by Snr C/S Int Revision assisted by Research and Technical Compilations Unit Accepted by the BOARD OF DIRECTORS of the CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY of CALIFORNIA   Type = 11 iDate=19/8/79 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=1 rDate=30/6/80 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  HIGH CRIME -- ADDITION HIGH CRIME CHECKOUTS AND WORD CLEARING   Remimeo Exec Hats Tech & Qual Hats HAS Hat Dir I&R LRH Comm Hats Interns KOTs All Orgs All Missions All Auditors All C/Ses All Cramming Officers  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 19 AUGUST 1979R Remimeo REVISED 30 JUNE 1980 Exec Hats Tech & Qual (Also issued as an HCO PL of same date, same title.) Hats HAS Hat Dir I&R (Revisions in Script) LRH Comm Hats Interns KOTs All Orgs All Missions All Auditors All C/Ses All Cramming Officers (With the revision of this issue, Method 9 Word Clearing is no longer mandatory in High Crime checkouts or on Internships. As the requirement of M9 resulted in High Crime checkouts taking too long and being backlogged or completely omitted, a new and highly successful method of word clearing and doing High Crime checkouts has been developed. This new method has been thoroughly tested and takes 80% less time to do but has resulted in zero flubs and crams on materials checked out in this way.) HIGH CRIME -- ADDITION HIGH CRIME CHECKOUTS AND WORD CLEARING Ref: HCOB 24 Oct 76R C/S Series 96R (Modified by this HCOB/PL) HCOB 30 Jan 73RB Word Clearing Series 48RB METHOD 9 WORD CLEARING THE RIGHT WAY HCOB/PL 26 Mar 79R Esto Series 35R Rev. 25.5.79 Word Clearing Series 60R MISUNDERSTOOD WORDS AND CYCLES OF ACTION HCOB 16 Jul 79 Product Debug Series 5 Word Clearing Series 63 THE "ELUSIVE" MIS-U OR CRASHING MIS-U HCO PL 8 Mar 66 HIGH CRIME HCO PL 4 Apr 72R III ETHICS AND STUDY TECH HCO PL 24 Sep 64 INSTRUCTION AND EXAMINATION, RAISING THE STANDARD OF HCO PL 4 Oct 64 THEORY CHECKOUT DATA Reiss. 21.5.67 For many years the top Auditors, Case Supervisors and Supervisors have used word clearing in their High Crime Checkouts, but until now there has not been an issue that makes this a mandatory action. From now on, High Crime Checkouts require word clearing in addition to starrates. The miracle results of word clearing make all the difference in the world to the quality of technical delivery. HCOB 19.8.79R - 2 - Rev. 30.6.80 CONSEQUENCES OF NO WORD CLEARING Lack of word clearing has recently brought about some false declares and a return of Quickie Grades. In many orgs it was found that new HCOBs were not being word cleared AT ALL. The right thing to do is make full use of Word Clearing Technology. If a persons goes past a misunderstood in the materials he is trying to study, he will go blank on the following section of the materials, he will not understand the materials, will not be able to apply them, will often get very confused ideas about what he thinks the materials stated, and will alter tech! WORD CLEARING REQUIREMENTS The purpose of High Crime Checkouts on anyone doing Tech or Qual functions, is to ensure that the materials have been studied, duplicated, understood and will be applied exactly. This is done in order to guarantee 100% Standard Tech in training and processing. From now on the following is required in all High Crime Checkouts: 1. Go through the material, look for and clear the definitions of each word or term you do not fully understand, and use the word or term in sentences until you understand it conceptually. 2. Then study the material for understanding, and for how you are going to apply it. 3. With your twin, demonstrate the important theory principles and rules. Drill commands, questions and actions. 4. Get a meter check done on each page of the material to find out if there is any misunderstood on it (Method 4). If there is any misunderstood or confusion, it is to be cleared, and then study that page again (as the section following the misunderstood would have been a blank in the student's memory). Each page of the material is to be handled this way. 5. Then get a starrated checkout, done in accordance with: HCO PL 24 Sep 64 INSTRUCTION AND EXAMINATION, RAISING THE STANDARD OF; HCO PL 4 Oct 64, Reiss. 21 May 67, THEORY CHECKOUT DATA; HCO PL & Mar 66 HIGH CRIME. If this checkout is flunked, repeat steps 1 through 5. MATERIALS STUDIED MUST BE FULLY CLEARED OF MISUNDERSTOODS, AND STUDIED AND DEMONSTRATED TO FULL CONCEPTUAL UNDERSTANDING. COMMANDS AND ACTIONS MUST BE DRILLS UNTIL FLUBLESS. When the checkout has been passed it is recorded on the intern's checksheet, or in the case of Tech/Qual personnel, in the High Crime log, in the Qualifications Division. HCOB 19.8.79R Rev. 30.6.80 Should anyone bog doing the steps 1 through 5 above, then Qual personnel are expected to handle with False Data Stripping, Crashing Misunderstood handling, Method 9 Word Clearing, Debug Tech, Word Clearing Correction List, Cramming Repair List, Study or Student Correction Lists. ETHICS PENALTY Violations of High Crime policy are High Crimes per the Justice Code. High Crime Checkouts are required of Tech and Qual staff in order to safeguard Technology and to Keep Scientology Working. Therefore, the following are actionable: 1. WHENEVER A CASE IS FOUND TO HAVE BEEN LOUSED UP AND THE AUDITOR AND/OR CASE SUPERVISOR HAS NOT DONE HIS HIGH CRIME CHECKOUTS ON THE ACTIONS BEING AUDITED, AND/OR C/Sed ON THE CASE, THE AUDITOR AND/OR CASE SUPERVISOR IS SUBJECT TO AN IMMEDIATE COMM EV. 2. IF THE HIGH CRIME LOG IS NOT KEPT UP TO DATE THEN THE CRAMMING OFFICER IS SUBJECT TO AN IMMEDIATE COURT OF ETHICS, AND IF REPEATED, TO A COMM EV. 3. IF ANY STUDENT BLOWS OR IS LATER FOUND TO BE UNABLE TO APPLY THE MATERIALS HE HAS STUDIED, THEN THE SUPERVISOR RESPONSIBLE IS LIABLE TO COMM EV IF HIS/HER HIGH CRIMES ON SUPERVISION HAVEN'T BEEN DONE. 4. ALL TECH/QUAL EXECUTIVES SHARE RESPONSIBILITY FOR ENSURING THAT HIGH CRIMES ARE DONE BY THEIR STAFF, AND MAY BE NAMED AS INTERESTED PARTIES IN ANY JUSTICE ACTION TAKEN ON HIGH CRIME POLICY VIOLATIONS. 5. ANY FAILURE TO KEEP HIGH CRIME POLICY IN, OR ANY NEGLIGENCE ABOUT IT, OR PERMITTING HIGH CRIME CHECKOUTS TO BACKLOG, CAN RESULT IN A JUSTICE ACTION NOT ONLY ON THE TECH/QUAL PERSONNEL INVOLVED, BUT ALSO ON THE EXECUTIVES THAT ARE SENIOR TO THE TECH/QUAL DIVISIONS, THE LOCAL KEEPER OF TECH, AND THE EXECUTIVES OF THE ORGANIZATION. WHETHER TECHNICALLY TRAINED OR NOT, ALL OF THE ABOVE ARE SUBJECT TO SUCH A JUSTICE ACTION. FORMER HIGH CRIME CHECKOUTS Where High Crime Checkouts have been done previously and attested they remain valid. But, if the Auditor, Case Supervisor or Word Clearer is later crammed on those materials the cramming must include full use of Word Clearing, Student Corrective actions and Qual Corrective actions. Where False Data Stripping, Crashing Mis-U Tech, O/W handling and Service Facsimile Tech are available and in use, these are to be employed in Qual (but not as part of a High Crime Checkout, as the "checkout" is done to ensure that the person has studied, does understand and can apply the material). A new method of doing High Crime Checkouts has been given in this issue. This does not relieve Qual of its usual function of fully using Word Clearing, Study Tech, and other Qual Corrective actions. And when Qual finds that any of these actions have been flubbed, Qual ensures that the person who flubbed the action is corrected, as well as correcting the person the action was flubbed on. HCOB 19.8.79R - 4 - Rev. 30.6.80 TECHNICAL RESULTS The Technology works when it is applied exactly. Exact application depends on complete understanding. Complete understanding depends on freedom from misunderstood words. L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER Revision assisted by Senior C/S Int for the BOARDS OF DIRECTORS of the CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY BDCS:LRH:DM:gal:dr Copyright $c 1979, 1980 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER Revision assisted by Senior C/S Int for the BOARDS OF DIRECTORS of the CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY   Type = 11 iDate=17/7/79 Volnum=0 Issue=1 Rev=1 rDate=2/9/81 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Word Clearing Series 64R THE MISUNDERSTOOD WORD DEFINED   Remimeo Word Clearers Tech Qual Staff  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex Remimeo HCO BULLETIN OF 17 JULY 1979R Word Clearers ISSUE I Tech REVISED 2 SEPTEMBER 1981 Qual Staff (The only revision is to clarify, in the first paragraph, how any error or omission in the comprehension of status classifies as a misunderstood, by giving examples of misunderstood status.) (Revision in Script) Word Clearing Series 64R THE MISUNDERSTOOD WORD DEFINED Ref: HCOB 23 Mar 78RA Word Clearing Series 59RA Rev. 14.11.79 CLEARING WORDS HCOB 25 Jun 71R Word Clearing Series 3R Rev. 25.11.74 BARRIERS TO STUDY HCOB 26 Mar 79RB Esto Series 35RB Rev. 2.9.79 Word Clearing Series 60RB Product Debug Series 7R MISUNDERSTOOD WORDS AND CYCLES OF ACTION "MIS-UNDERSTOOD" or "NOT-UNDERSTOOD" are terms used to define any error or omission in comprehension of a word, concept, symbol or status. (As examples of misunderstood status, one could misunderstand an object's location or its time factor, or the state or condition of someone or something.) Most people go around thinking that a misunderstood is just something they obviously don't know -- a "not-understood". A "not-understood" is a misunderstood but there are additional ways a person can misunderstand a word. A MISUNDERSTOOD WORD OR SYMBOL IS DEFINED AS A WORD OR SYMBOL FOR WHICH THE STUDENT HAS: 1. A FALSE (TOTALLY WRONG) DEFINITION: A definition that has has no relationship to the actual meaning of the word or symbol whatsoever. Example: The person reads or hears the word "cat" and thinks that "cat" means "box". You can't get more wrong. Example: A person sees an equals sign (=) and thinks it means to subtract something twice. 2. AN INVENTED DEFINITION: An invented definition is a version of a false definition. The person has made it up himself or has been given an invented definition. Not knowing the actual definition he invents one for it. This is sometimes difficult to detect because he is certain he knows it, after all he invented it himself. There is enough protest preceding his invention of it to make it read on a meter. In such a case he will be certain he knows the definition of the word or symbol. HCOB 17.7.79R I - 2 - Rev. 2.9.81 Example: The person when very young was always called "a girl" by his pals when he refused to do anything daring. He invents the definition of "girl" to be "a cowardly person". Example: A person never knew the meaning of the symbol for an exclamation point (!) but seeing it in comic strips as representing swear words invents the definition for it "a foul curse" and regards it accordingly in everything he reads. 3. AN INCORRECT DEFINITION: A definition that is not right but may have some relationship to the word or symbol or be in a similar category. Example: The person reads or hears the word "computer" and thinks it is "typewriter". This is an incorrect meaning for "computer" even though a typewriter and a computer are both types of machines. Example: A person thinks a period (.) after an abbreviation means that you halt in reading at that point. 4. AN INCOMPLETE DEFINITION: A definition that is inadequate. Example: The person reads the word "office" and thinks it means "room". The definition of the word "office" is: "a room or building in which a person transacts his business or carries on his stated occupation". (Ref: Funk and Wagnalls Standard Dictionary of the English Language) The person's definition is incomplete for the word "office". Example: The person sees an apostrophe (') and knows that it means that something is owned ('s) but does not know that it also is used to show that a letter has been left out of a word. He sees the word "can't" and immediately tries to figure out who can is. 5. AN UNSUITABLE DEFINITION: A definition that does not fit the word as it is used in the context of the sentence one has heard or read. Example: The person hears the sentence: "I am dressing a turkey". The person's understanding of "dressing" is "putting clothes on". That is one definition of "dressing" but it is an unsuitable definition for the word as it is used in the sentence he has heard. Because he has an unsuitable definition he thinks someone is putting clothes on a turkey. As a result the sentence he has heard doesn't really make sense to him. The definition of "dressing" that correctly applies in the sentence he has heard is: "to prepare for use as food, by making ready to cook, or by cooking". (Ref: The Oxford English Dictionary) The person will only truly understand what he is hearing when he has fully cleared the word "dressing" in all its meanings, as he will then also have the definition that correctly applies in the context. Example: The person sees a dash (-) in the sentence: "I finished numbers 3 - 7 today". He thinks a dash is a minus sign, realizes you cannot subtract 7 from 3 and so cannot understand it. HCOB 17.7.79R I - 3 - Rev. 2.9.81 6. A HOMONYMIC (one word which has two or more distinctly separate meanings) DEFINITION: A homonym is a word that is used to designate several different things which have totally different meanings; or a homonym can be one of two or more words that have the same sound, sometimes the same spelling, but differ in meaning. Example: The person reads the sentence: "I like to box". The person understands this sentence to mean that someone likes to put things in "containers". The person has the right meaning for the word "box", but he has the wrong word! There is another word "box" which is being used in the sentence he has just read and means: "to fight another in a boxing match". (Ref: Funk and Wagnalls Standard Dictionary of the English Language) The person has a misunderstood because he has a homonymic definition for the word "box" and will have to clear the second word "box" before he understands the sentence. Example: The person sees a plus sign (+) and as it resembles a cross he thinks it is something religious. Example: The person hears the word "period" in the sentence: "It was a disorderly period in history" and knowing that "period" comes at the end of a sentence and means stop, supposes that the world ended at that point. Example: Homonymic misunderstoods can also occur when a person does not know the informal or slang usage of a word. The person hears someone on the radio singing: "When my Honey walks down the street". The person thinks "a thick, sweet, yellow or golden liquid, good to eat, that bees make out of the nectar they collect from flowers" is walking down the street! He doesn't know the informal definition of "honey" which is: "sweet one: a pet name", which is how it is being used in the song. (Ref: Funk and Wagnalls Standard Dictionary of the English Language) 7. A SUBSTITUTE (SYNONYM -- a word which has a similar but not the same meaning) DEFINITION: A substitute definition occurs when a person uses a synonym for the definition of a word. A synonym is not a definition. A synonym is a word having a meaning similar to that of another word. Example: The person reads the word "portly" and thinks the definition of the word is "fat". "Fat" is a synonym for the word "portly". The person, has a misunderstood because the word "portly" means: "of a stately appearance and carriage; impressive, especially on account of size". (Ref: Funk and Wagnalls Standard Dictionary of the English Language) The person does not have the full meaning of "portly" if he thinks it just means "fat". Knowing synonyms for words increases your vocabulary but it does not mean you understand the meaning of a word. Learn the full definition for a word as well as its synonyms. 8. AN OMITTED (MISSING) DEFINITION: An omitted definition is a definition of a word that the person is missing or is omitted from the dictionary he is using. HCOB 17.7.79R I - 4 - Rev. 2.9.81 Example: The person hears the line "The food here is too rich". This person knows two definitions for the word "rich". He knows that "rich" means "having much money, land, goods, etc." and "wealthy people". Neither of these definitions make much sense to him in the sentence he has just heard. He cannot understand what food could have to do with having a lot of money. Omitted definitions can come about from using dinky dictionaries. If the person had looked up "rich" in a small paperback dictionary, he would probably still be stuck with his misunderstood. A dinky dictionary probably will not give him the definition he needs. In order to understand the word he would have to get a good sized dictionary to ensure it gives him the omitted definition which is: "having in a high degree qualities pleasing to the senses; luscious to the taste: often implying an unwholesome excess of butter, fats, flavoring, etc." (Ref: Funk and Wagnalls Standard Dictionary of the English Language) Example: The person reads "He estimated the light at f 5.6." He can't figure what this "f" is, so he looks up "f" in the American Heritage Dictionary and wonders if it is temperature or money or sports for "foul" or maybe the money "franc". The text doesn't refer to France so he can't figure it out. Omitted in the American Heritage is the photography definition of "f" which simply means "the number which shows the width of the hole the light goes through in the lens". The moral of this is to have enough dictionaries around. NOTE: It can occur that an accurate definition for a word is not given in any dictionary which is an error in the language itself. 9. A NO-DEFINITION: A no-definition is a "not-understood" word or symbol. Example: The person reads the sentence "The business produced no lucre". No understanding occurs, as he has no definition for "lucre". The word means: "money, especially as the object of greed; gain". (Ref: Funk and Wagnalls Standard Dictionary of the English Language) It isn't that he has the word incorrectly, unsuitable or any other way defined, he has no definition for it at all. He has never looked it up and gotten it defined. Thus he does not understand it. The definition does not exist for him until he looks it up and gets it clearly understood. Example: The person sees a dot at the end of a word on a printed page and having no definition for "a period (.)" tends to run all of his sentences together. 10. A REJECTED DEFINITION: A rejected definition is a definition of a word which the person will not accept. The reasons why he will not accept it are usually based on emotional reactions connected with it. The person finds the definition degrading to himself or his friends or group in some imagined way or restimulative to him in some fashion. Although he may have a total misunderstood on the word he may refuse to have it explained or look it up. HCOB 17.7.79R I - 5 - Rev. 2.9.81 Example: The person refuses to look up the word "mathematics". He doesn't know what it means, he doesn't want to know what it means, and he won't have anything to do with it. A discussion of why he refuses to look it up discloses that he was expelled from school because he flunked with violence his first month of his first course in mathematics. If he were to realize that he flunked because he didn't know what he was supposed to study he would then be willing to look the word up. Example: The person refuses to look up the definition of asterisk (*). On discussion it turns out that every time he sees an asterisk on the page he knows the material will be "very hard to read" and is "literary", "difficult" and "highbrow". Discussion of why he won't look it up usually reveals and releases the emotional charge connected with it which he may never have looked at before. Properly handled he will now want to look it up, having gained an insight into why he wouldn't. Any word you come across which fits one or more of the above definitions of a misunderstood word or symbol must be cleared up, using a good size dictionary or more than one dictionary or text book or encyclopedia. It is catastrophic to go on past or ignore a misunderstood word or symbol as one simply will not understand what he is studying. A student must discipline himself not to go past misunderstood words. He should learn to recognize from his reaction to what he is reading, especially the mental blankness which usually ensues right after one, that he has gone by a misunderstood. He should look them up and get them fully defined before going on with his reading. Students must be persuaded to do this. It is a self-discipline that has to be learned. The definitions of "misunderstood" and "not-understood" and their different types, must be clearly understood by a person seeking to clear them in himself and others. The commonest error in word clearing is for the person being word cleared to believe that a misunderstood is something he simply does not know. With this limited definition he cannot adequately be word cleared nor can he adequately word clear others. So these definitions of "misunderstood" and "not-understood" should be very well known as it will often be necessary to clarify them to the person being word cleared. Good reading. L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER As Accepted by the BDCSC:LRH:gal:dr BOARD OF DIRECTORS Copyright $c 1979, 1981 of the by L. Ron Hubbard CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY ALL RIGHTS RESERVED OF CALIFORNIA  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER As Accepted by the BOARD OF DIRECTORS of the CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY OF CALIFORNIA   Type = 11 iDate=30/4/79 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=1 rDate=31/3/81 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Dianetic Clear Series 12 C/S Series 106R AUDITING THE DIANETIC CLEAR   All Orgs & Missions All C/Ses NED Auditors Scn Auditors Qual/Tech Staff HCO KOTs  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 30 APRIL 1979R REVISED 31 MARCH 81 All Orgs & Missions All C/Ses NED Auditors Scn Auditors Qual/Tech Staff HCO KOTs (This bulletin has been revised to update its references, extend its distribution and to include the issue as part of the Dianetic Clear Series.) (Revisions in Script) Dianetic Clear Series 12 C/S Series 106R AUDITING THE DIANETIC CLEAR REF: HCOB 1 Dec 78R Dianetic Clear Series 10 Rev. 31 Mar 81 PROGRAMMING THE DIANETIC CLEAR FOR HIS NEXT STEP HCOB 8 Oct 70 C/S Series 20 PERSISTENT F/N HCOB 19 Apr 72 C/S Series 77 "QUICKIE" DEFINED It has recently come to my attention that some auditors are delivering Grades in outrageously short periods of time to Dianetic Clear pcs and only giving Quad Grades to the Dianetic Clear without making full use of the Expanded Grades. Such pcs are being denied the full gains of the grade processes due to Quickie Grades -- out-tech. From this point forward, anyone auditing Grades on a pc who has attested to Clear before Clearing Course level must: 1) M9 and starrate HCOB 8 Oct 70 C/S Series 20 PERSISTENT F/N, 2) M9 and starrate HCOB 19 Apr 72 C/S Series 77 "QUICKIE" DEFINED, and 3) Clay Demo the consequences of Quickie Grades. It is the responsibility of the C/S to see that the above checkouts occur without stopping or slowing delivery lines. These actions will ensure that the Dianetic Clear has the opportunity to attain all the benefits of the Grades. In addition to the immediate abilities gained from the Grades being properly delivered, having his Grades really IN will prevent the pre-OT from running into difficulties on the OT Levels. The Grades are a very essential part of the Grade Chart and must not be delivered over a persistent F/N or skimped on in any way. Let's Keep Scientology Working! L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER BDCSC:LRH:jk:bk Approved & Accepted by the Copyright $c 1979, 1981 BOARD OF DIRECTORS of the by L. Ron Hubbard CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY of ALL RIGHTS RESERVED CALIFORNIA  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER Approved & Accepted by the BOARD OF DIRECTORS of the CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY of CALIFORNIA   Type = 11 iDate=5/3/79 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=2 rDate=31/3/81 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Dianetic Clear Series 11 DIANETIC CLEAR FALSE DECLARES   Remimeo All Orgs All Missions C/Ses Auditors Ds of P Tech Qual HCO Ethics Officers KOTs  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 5 MARCH 1979RA RE-REVISED 31 MARCH 1981 Remimeo All Orgs All Missions C/Ses Auditors Ds of P Tech Qual HCO Ethics Officers KOTs (Revised to clarify paragraph 5, to give references which apply to this issue and to include this issue as part of the Dianetic Clear Series.) (Revisions in Script) Dianetic Clear Series 11 DIANETIC CLEAR FALSE DECLARES REF: HCOB 29 Aug 80 KSW Series 23 HOW NOT TO MISS OUT ON GAINS FROM YOUR AUDITING HCOB 19 Jun 71 C/S Series 46 DECLARES Any org or mission staff declaring a Dianetic Clear "achieved in other practices" is subject to expulsion from the Church. Technically, a very few thetans have never been anything but Clear. These few didn't "go Clear" on anything; they have simply always been Clear. When a natural Clear is found it should be so stated. To assign this condition to some other practice is a suppression of Dianetics and Scientology. Anyone evaluating for or feeding a preclear data to persuade him to declare Dianetic Clear is also actionable. Anyone suppressively validating squirrel practices or groups by stating they are producing Dianetic Clears is also actionable as above, as it is not possible. It requires the exact application of Scientology and/or Dianetic technology to bring a preclear up to the state of Clear. Falsely declaring a person Clear, Dianetic Clear or natural Clear who isn't, and failing to declare one who made it on Dianetics or the Clearing Course or who has always been Clear, are also actionable. People don't go Clear in garbage eating or psychiatry -- they perish. Thus herding people into their hands by falsely validating them is suppressive. Any and all such false declares are cancelled. L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER LRH:kjm:bk Copyright $c 1979, 1981 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER   Type = 11 iDate=9/2/79 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Keeping Scientology Working Series 23 HOW TO DEFEAT VERBAL TECH   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 9 FEBRUARY 1979 Remimeo REISSUED 12 APRIL 1988 (Reissued as part of the Keeping Scientology Working Series.) (Also issued as HCO PL 9 Feb 79, Issue II, same title.) Keeping Scientology Working Series 23 HOW TO DEFEAT VERBAL TECH 1. If it isn't written it isn't true. 2. If it's written, read it. 3. If you can't understand it, clarify it. 4. If you can't clarify it, clear the Mis Us. 5. If the Mis Us won't clear, query it. 6. Get it validated as a written order. 7. Force others to read it. IF IT CAN'T BE RUN THROUGH AS ABOVE IT'S FALSE! L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER LRH:dg:kc:ch:clb:ks Copyright $c 1979, 1983 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER   Type = 11 iDate=15/2/79 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Keeping Scientology Working Series 24 VERBAL TECH: PENALTIES   Remimeo Tech Qual HCO  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 15 FEBRUARY 1979 Remimeo REISSUED 12 APRIL 1983 Tech Qual (Reissued as part of the Keeping Scientology Working Series.) HCO (Also issued as HCO PL 15 Feb 79, same title.) Keeping Scientology Working Series 24 VERBAL TECH: PENALTIES (Ref: HCOB/HCO PL 9 Feb 79, HOW TO DEFEAT VERBAL TECH) ANY PERSON FOUND TO BE USING VERBAL TECH SHALL BE SUBJECT TO A COURT OF ETHICS. THE CHARGES ARE: GIVING OUT DATA WHICH IS CONTRARY TO HCO BULLETINS OR POLICY LETTERS, OR OBSTRUCTING THEIR USE OR APPLICATION. CORRUPTING THEIR INTENT, ALTERING THEIR CONTENT IN ANY WAY. INTERPRETING THEM VERBALLY OR OTHERWISE FOR ANOTHER, OR PRETENDING TO QUOTE THEM WITHOUT SHOWING THE ACTUAL ISSUE. ANY ONE OF THESE CATEGORIES CONSTITUTES VERBAL TECH AND IS ACTIONABLE PER THE ABOVE. L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER LRH:jk:ks Copyright $c 1979, 1983 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER   Type = 11 iDate=5/12/78 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=1 rDate=31/3/81 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 105R Dianetic Clear Series 9 DIANETIC CLEAR ATTESTS -- ADDITIONAL DATA   All C/Ses Auditors D of P Tech/Qual HCO  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 5 DECEMBER 1978R All C/Ses REVISED 31 MARCH 1981 Auditors D of P Tech/Qual HCO (This bulletin has been revised to delete actions given originally for the verification of Dianetic Clear and its rehabilitation, as the actions for verifying and rehabilitating the state are now done in a more exact sequence of steps on the Dianetic Clear Special Intensive; to correct the statement that indicated a Floating TA would be present in all cases when Clear is successfully rehabbed, and to include additional technical references from the Keeping Scientology Working and Dianetic Clear Series. This bulletin is also now incorporated as a part of the Dianetic Clear Series.) (Revisions Not in Script) C/S Series 105R Dianetic Clear Series 9 DIANETIC CLEAR ATTESTS -- ADDITIONAL DATA REFS: HCOB 24 Sep 78R III Dianetic Clear Series 1 Rev. 31.3.81 DIANETIC CLEAR HCOB 2 May 79R Dianetic Clear Series 4 Rev. 25.3.81 DIANETIC CLEAR SPECIAL INTENSIVE HCOB 29 Nov 78R Dianetic Clear Series 8 Rev. 31.3.81 C/S Series 104R DIANETIC CLEAR ATTESTS HCOB 19 Jun 71 II C/S Series 46 DECLARES HCOB 5 Mar 79RA Dianetic Clear Series 11 Re-rev. 31.3.81 DIANETIC CLEAR FALSE DECLARES Keeping Scientology Working Series 21 through 25 Since the HCOBs on Dianetic Clear have come out there have been many attests and many cases unbugged, and there will continue to be more Dianetic Clears as pcs continue to get standard processing. This bulletin gives some additional guidelines to help smooth the lines and prevent needless stops for the person who has made Dianetic Clear. Used in conjunction with the Dianetic Clear Special Intensive and the issues referenced above, it will also help handle the person who hasn't made it so that he may achieve all the gains available to him. UNACKNOWLEDGED DIANETIC CLEARS A person who has reached the State of Dianetic Clear without it being acknowledged can run into difficulties afterwards. You may find that he's been in ethics trouble or had a low OCA or poor case gain since that point. It's not only lack of acknowledgement but also invalidation by running certain processes that a Clear wouldn't respond to, such as engrams, or continuing to run a Grade on which the person went Clear, or continuing goals processing, etc. HCOB 5.12.78R - 2 - Rev. 31.3.81 Also, with Clears and OTs who went Clear before they did the Clearing Course and never knew it or spotted it, by-passed charge results because they are running something which is trying to achieve what they have already achieved. It serves as an overrun. In the case where a pc has this unacknowledged, invalidated Dianetic Clear state, you would most likely find a point in his auditing where it looks as if he had made it and a slump occurred afterwards. This point could have occurred many years back. The appropriate list or lists used to clean up such a case (C/S 53, Green Form, L3RG, etc.) could show up a valid read on a question concerning Dianetic Clear. Or the person might simply originate this himself. In any of these instances, the handling is to program the pc for the Dianetic Clear Special Intensive and ensure each needed step of the Intensive is standardly done. This Intensive is designed to fully rehabilitate the state of Clear when it validly exists. NOTE: The Dianetic Clear Special Intensive (HCOB 2 May 79R I, Dianetic Clear Series 4, DIANETIC CLEAR SPECIAL INTENSIVE) may only be delivered by duly authorized orgs who have C/Ses and auditors qualified to deliver this tech. ETHICS The fact that a person may currently be in ethics trouble is no basis on which to adjudicate whether or not he has achieved the State of Clear. It is not a criterion to be used to refuse to allow the person to attest. Clear is Clear. When a Clear is audited on R3RA, when the state is invalidated or goes unacknowledged, he can get into trouble. If you have ethics trouble during or immediately after auditing it is an indicator of possible by-passed charge or out tech on the case. So apply this to your understanding and analysis of cases. The MAA interview and A to J Check on the Dianetic Clear Routing Form, which is done prior to the Dianetic Clear Special Intensive, is not to imply he's out-ethics but will furnish the C/S with data on the case which may or may not come up otherwise. It will also detect the rare case where the person is attempting to attest in order to save money or for status reasons. In one instance it was discovered that the person routing through was actually a plant. These last examples are a very, very small percentage of the cases. METER PHENOMENA When the state of Dianetic Clear has been verified, with any invalidation or other by-passed charge cleaned off the line, and when it has been fully rehabbed to end phenomena on the Dianetic Clear Special Intensive, you'll see a very floppy needle, at low sensitivity, an F/N that nothing can break up and, in many cases, a floating TA. A low sensitivity setting (1 to 4) will often be needed to even keep the needle on the dial, and the TA will be riding between 2.0 and 3.0 You'll find in many cases that the meter now reads on the pc's postulates -- i.e., a Clear's postulates read as a surge. A read therefore does not mean invariably "Yes" or that the question is charged. "No" can read if the pc says it or thinks it to himself as an answer to a question. (Ref. HCOB 18 Apr 68 NEEDLE REACTIONS ABOVE GRADE IV) HCOB 5.12.78R - 3 - Rev. 31.3.81 Bear in mind that you might not get the above meter phenomena immediately on a Dianetic Clear where the state has been by-passed, even though the state is valid. In some cases the TA and needle can be packed up prior to cleaning up any by-passed charge or Date/Locating the exact time the pc went Clear, all of which would be handled on the DCSI. The pc may have out-Int to be handled. (The handling of out-Int on a person who may be Dianetic Clear is THE END OF ENDLESS INT REPAIR RD, HCOB 24 Sep 78RA I Re-rev. 21.2.79 Int RD Series 4RA.) The person may still be hung up on misrun R3R or Dianetics run after he went Clear, or on some point of eval or inval that has occurred. The steps of the Dianetic Clear Special Intensive provide for the full handling of all such cases, and when they are properly done they result in the full resurgence of the state of Clear, when it validly exists. PRIOR DIANETIC CLEARS AND KEYED-OUT CLEARS The definitions of Dianetic Clear and Keyed-Out Clear in HCOB 24 Sep 78R III, Dianetic Clear Series 1, DIANETIC CLEAR, replace the definitions in the Tech Dictionary. The person who attested to Dianetic Clear or Keyed-Out Clear in past years would not necessarily qualify as a Dianetic Clear now, though the chances are good he did make it. Any pc who has attested to Dianetic Clear or Keyed-Out Clear in the past should be called in for correct case handling, including a DCSI, as indicated, to ascertain the state. This would only be done by an AO C/S or by an org C/S who is Clear and fully trained and qualified to C/S the DCSI. (Ref. HCOB 8 May 79R, Dianetic Clear Series 7, DIANETIC CLEAR SPECIAL INTENSIVE C/S AND AUDITOR REQUIREMENTS) You will find that many of those who attested to Dianetic Clear earlier on actually did make it, and after confirmation of this they will need to be issued Clear Certs and Clear numbers and be properly programmed to move on up the Bridge. (See HCOB 1 Dec 78R, Dn Clear Series 10, C/S Series 113, PROGRAMMING THE DIANETIC CLEAR FOR HIS NEXT STEP.) Additionally, where a qualified DCSI C/S knows of a case where it looks very likely, from folder study, that the pc went Dianetic Clear but it was unsuspected at the time and never originated, he should have such pcs called in for full clean-up and programming for a DCSI. THE PERSON WHO HASN'T MADE IT Where it is obvious from the results of a standardly done DCSI that a person who has already been allowed to attest hasn't attained Dianetic Clear, the pc would be given a good R-factor that the person handling the attest cycle didn't have all the data. He is also handled on any loss he experiences. He must also be given the R-factor that he is being programmed so as not to be denied any of the gains on the Grade Chart and so that he will be adequately prepared to do the OT Levels. The DCSI-trained C/S then programs the case so that this can occur and the pc is informed he should continue with his auditing program. In the case where the person wanting to attest clearly hasn't made it (as evidenced from results or the DCSI steps), he would be told so. There may be some ability or state of being he did achieve that he may wish to attest to and he should be allowed to do so. HCOB 5.12.78R - 4 - Rev. 31.3.81 In both the above cases the person very likely has made some big gain or achieved a new ability, so this would be validated and he would be given an appropriate acknowledgement on his win. (Refs: HCOB/PL 29 Aug 80, KSW Series 23, HOW NOT TO MISS OUT ON GAINS FROM YOUR AUDITING HCOB/PL 30 Aug 80, KSW Series 24, WINS, "STATES", AND GRADE CHART DECLARES) NEXT STEP FOR DIANETIC CLEARS Use HCOB 1 Dec 78R, Dianetic Clear Series 10, PROGRAMMING THE DIANETIC CLEAR FOR HIS NEXT STEP, as a guide when programming the Dianetic Clear for his next action. SUMMARY Keep in mind that a good percentage of the cases you see who by origination want to attest to Dianetic Clear will have achieved the state. The C/S, trained in C/Sing the DCSI, follows the guidelines set forth here and applies all the HCOBs on the subject, so that those who have attained Dianetic Clear as well as those who haven't will be able to move on swiftly up the Bridge on the right gradient. All C/Ses should get trained on the delivery of DCSIs, maintain their Ivory Towers, make full use of the C/S Series, the data in this bulletin, the Keeping Scientology Working Series and the Dianetic Clear Series. It is already going well and this additional data will handle the various situations that come to light. L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER Accepted by the BOARD OF DIRECTORS of the CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY of CALIFORNIA BDCSC:LRH:jk:bk Copyright $c 1978, 1981 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER Accepted by the BOARD OF DIRECTORS of the CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY of CALIFORNIA   Type = 11 iDate=1/12/78 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=1 rDate=31/3/81 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 113 Dianetic Clear Series 10 PROGRAMMING THE DIANETIC CLEAR FOR HIS NEXT STEP   Remimeo AOs SHs Class IV Orgs All Auditors All C/Ses HCOs Tech/Qual Missions  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 1 DECEMBER 1978R Remimeo REVISED 31 MARCH 1981 AOs SHs (Revised to emphasize and update the correct Class IV Orgs programming of Dianetic Clears and to include All Auditors additional references on such programming as All C/Ses well as on the FESing of folders.) HCOs Tech/Qual Missions (Revisions Not in Script) C/S Series 113 Dianetic Clear Series 10 PROGRAMMING THE DIANETIC CLEAR FOR HIS NEXT STEP REFS: HCOB 24 Sep 78R III Dianetic Clear Series 1 Rev. 21.2.81 DIANETIC CLEAR HCOB 12 Jun 70 C/S Series 2 PROGRAMMING OF CASES HCOB 26 Aug 70R C/S Series 17R Rev. & Reiss. 22.9.80 KSW Series 15 INCOMPLETE CASES HCO PL 23 Oct 80 II CHART OF ABILITIES GAINED FOR LOWER LEVELS AND EXPANDED LOWER GRADES HCOB 4 Apr 81 THE BIOCHEMICAL PERSONALITY Keeping Scientology Working Series 21 through 25 The 1980 Classification and Gradation Chart The following are the guidelines for programming a Dianetic Clear after the state has been declared: The Purification Rundown, if not yet done. The Survival Rundown, if not yet done or unless full Objectives have been run to EP. The Scientology Drug Rundown, given at C/S adjudication (Ref. HCOB 4 Apr 81 THE BIOCHEMICAL PERSONALITY). This modifies the mandatory requirement of a Scientology Drug RD for all Dianetic Clears who have not had a Drug Rundown, as given in HCOB 21 Dec 80 THE SCIENTOLOGY DRUG RUNDOWN, HCOB/PL 29 Aug 80, KSW Series 23, HOW NOT TO MISS OUT ON GAINS FROM YOUR AUDITING, and the 1980 Grade Chart. Expanded Grades -- ARC S/W, 0-IV, for all cases, if not yet done. EXPANDED GRADES 1. If a Dianetic Clear has had no previous auditing on the Grades, you can run him on Expanded Grades -- ARC Straightwire and 0-IV. This includes Service Fac handling on Grade IV, with the R3RA steps on Service Facs omitted, per HCOB 6 Sep 78 III ROUTINE THREE SC-A, FULL SERVICE FACSIMILE HANDLING UPDATED WITH NEW ERA DIANETICS. HCOB 1.12.78R - 2 - Rev. 31.3.81 2. If a Dianetic Clear was incomplete on Grades 0-IV prior to the Dianetic Clear attest (i.e. mid-Grades), you would program him through to Expanded Grade IV (omitting the R3RA steps on Service Facs). 3. If a pc goes Clear on a Grade then you can give him the other Grades, but you'd end off that Grade and not continue it. 4. If a Dianetic Clear is an old timer who has had a out of pre-Grades Scientology processes run (before formal Grades existed), you would still program him to ensure he has achieved or achieves the full Ability Gained for each Grade, but great care must be taken not to re-run actions that have already been run to EP. 5. If a Dianetic Clear has previously completed ARC Straightwire and Grades 0-IV and these are each verified as having been run to full Ability Gained, they obviously would not be run further. The Dianetic Clear is not run on power, R6EW or the Clearing Course. With the necessary Grade Chart actions in and upon completing of the Solo Auditor Course, he goes directly onto OT I. Correct programming ensures the Dianetic Clear gets the full benefits to be gained from each of the vital Grade Chart actions. It also prepares him stably for handling the upper level materials. FULL FES AND OBJECTIVES TABLE REQUIRED BY AOs AND SHs It is mandatory that the folders of any pc or pre-OT sent to an Advanced Org or Saint Hill preparatory to the person going onto the Solo Course or onto Advanced Courses at the AO, have a full FES to PT of all auditing, showing all required Grade Chart actions completed to full EP, including a full Objectives Table completed. This is to be done per: HCOB 6 Oct 70, C/S Series 19, FOLDER ERROR SUMMARIES; HCOB 29 Jan 81, I Auditor Admin Series 24R, FES CHECKLISTS AND SUMMARY; and HCOB 16 May 80 PREPARING AN OBJECTIVES TABLE. The AO or SH C/S can then verify from this data that all the Grade Chart actions prior to Solo and/or Advanced Courses have been done. The AO C/S would also need to see that the pc received any set-ups or repair that might be required, per HCOB 8 Jan 72RE II Re-rev. 17.9.80, Solo C/S Series 11RE, ADVANCED COURSES C/S CHECKLIST ON FOLDERS OF NEW STUDENTS ONTO ADV COURSES, to ensure the person's full eligibility for Advanced Courses. L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER Accepted by the BDCSC:LRH:nc:bk BOARD OF DIRECTORS Copyright $c 1978, 1981 of the by L. Ron Hubbard CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY ALL RIGHTS RESERVED of CALIFORNIA  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER Accepted by the BOARD OF DIRECTORS of the CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY of CALIFORNIA   Type = 11 iDate=29/11/78 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=1 rDate=31/3/81 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 104R Dianetic Clear Series 8 DIANETIC CLEAR ATTESTS   Remimeo All C/Ses NED Auditors Scn Auditors  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 29 NOVEMBER 1978R Remimeo REVISED 31 MARCH 1981 All C/Ses NED Auditors Scn Auditors (This Bulletin has been revised to include references on Declares as well as references on Dianetic Clear released after its original issue; to update and align it with the Dianetic Clear Special Intensive, and to incorporate it as part of the Dianetic Clear Series.) (Revisions Not in Script) C/S Series 104R Dianetic Clear Series 8 DIANETIC CLEAR ATTESTS References: HCOB 24 Sep 78R III Dianetic Clear Series 1 Rev. 31.3.81 DIANETIC CLEAR HCOB 5 Mar 79RA Dianetic Clear Series 11 Rev. 31.3.81 DIANETIC CLEAR FALSE DECLARES HCOB 19 Jun 71 II C/S Series 46 DECLARES HCOB 11 Nov 73 PRECLEAR DECLARE? PROCEDURE and Keeping Scientology Working Series 5, 21-24 Well, well. I seem to have been right in Book One about making Clears, but it seems to have exceeded mass reality. WARNING TO NED AND SCN AUDITORS If the case you are auditing has a fantastic win and then seems to go into a decline, beware -- the pc might have become a pre-OT and that funny behavior of the needle and tone arm might have been a floating TA, when he went Clear. NOTE FOR C/Ses I have found some very interesting case phenomena being resolved since past Dianetic Clears are attesting to the state. Some of the manifestations of some of the cases who were audited past Dianetic Clear (unrecognized and unattested to) are: (a) Manifesting PTSness and illnesses until the state was acknowledged and attested to. (b) Appearing to be no case gain, out-ethics cases. (c) Not moving up the Bridge but remaining "parked" at some point. (They have many "reasons" for this.) (d) Becoming inactive as a Scientologist. HCOB 29.11.78R - 2 - Rev. 31.3.81 A C/S should look for these cases and recognize them when he sees them. This in no way means that every PTS or out-ethics case has an unacknowledged state of Clear underlying it but this fact certainly needs to be included in any C/S's case debug line-up. In the cases mentioned above, you will almost always find that the condition started at a certain point in the pc's auditing (or in his last life, as a pc). If you do a thorough folder study and get the pc through a standard Dianetic Clear Special Intensive, you might very likely find that he went Dianetic Clear just prior to the case going awry. (Or, by the same procedure, you might find he went Dianetic Clear in auditing in his last life.) NOTE: The Dianetic Clear Special Intensive (HCOB 2 May 79R Issue I Rev. 25.3.81, Dn Clear Series 4, DIANETIC CLEAR SPECIAL INTENSIVE) may only be delivered by those orgs qualified to do so. Advance Scheduling Registrars and those working in the Central Files of an org can go through CF folders and ask the Org C/S to check the folders of those who have drifted off lines or stopped going up the processing side of the Bridge, as an unacknowledged Dianetic Clear state may just be the cause. C/S WARNING A C/S who is C/Sing pcs on the DCSI or sending pcs through to attest to Clear must be a graduate of the Dianetic Clear Special Intensive Delivery Course and meet the qualifications expressed in HCOB 3 May 79R Dn Clear Series 7, DIANETIC CLEAR SPECIAL INTENSIVE C/S AND AUDITOR REQUIREMENTS. Otherwise, he is C/Sing illegally. THE ATTEST ITSELF When a person validly attains the state of Clear, whether this is reached on the Clearing Course or at any point earlier in his auditing, he attests to "the State of Clear." Clear is Clear and there are no qualifying remarks at the attest such as "Dianetic Clear" or anything else. Depending on the outcome of a DCSI and whether or not the pc had already attested to Clear, there are four possibilities which may be declared as a result of a DCSI. 1. When a pc successfully completes a DCSI and is verified as having reached Clear he attests to "the state of Clear." 2. If a person had attested to Clear earlier and then received a successful DCSI which verified the state, he would simply attest to completion of the DCSI. (He wouldn't need to re-attest to Clear.) 3. When a person receives a DCSI and it is established that he is not yet Clear, he attests to completion of the DCSI, but only after being cleaned up to F/N and VGIs and eager to progress up the Bridge. 4. Someone who formerly attested to Clear who then received a DCSI which established that he had, in fact, not yet reached Clear (and so had the false declare cancelled) would simply attest to the completion of the DCSI but only after being cleaned up to F/N and VGIs and eager to progress up the Bridge. HCOB 29.11.78R - 3 - Rev. 31.3.81 The procedure for handling attest cycles is fully described in HCOB 11 Nov 73 PRECLEAR DECLARE? PROCEDURE. CLEAR IN LAST LIFE Some people didn't believe one had lived before this life. Also some people wondered what happened to old Dianeticists and Scientologists who had died. But others used to have the phrase "Well, we'll pick them up in the next lifetime," or "the next time around." Well it seems like the former shouldn't have wondered and the latter were right. We are coming up with quite a few pcs who had gone Clear in their last lifetime during Book One auditing, Goals Processing, etc. This is something that the pc originates or something he has been "wondering about" but invalidated. INVAL/EVAL The state of Clear having been truly attained yet not acknowledged and attested to, can cause an extraordinary amount of invalidation. Evaluation also occurs on this subject and comes from others and even the pc himself. These things are cleared up on the Dianetic Clear Special Intensive so that the rehab of the state can easily be accomplished. ETHICS WARNING It is a Comm-Evable offense to coach the pc with data about Clear in any way. You also do not evaluate for any pc and try to convince him he has gone Dianetic Clear when he hasn't. You do not turn to "the pc must have gone Dianetic Clear" when you can't easily solve a pc's case. You use the C/S Series in full. To send a pc through to attest to Dianetic Clear when he hasn't truly made it is a suppressive act as that preclear will not make it on the OT Levels. An org that does not have a Clear C/S and a Clear auditor who are qualified to deliver the Dianetic Clear Special Intensive must send a person who has originated he might be Dianetic Clear, and his folders, to the nearest org with tech terminals who are qualified to deliver this Intensive. THE POWER OF AUDITING The power of modern auditing shouldn't be underestimated. It was pretty hot in 1950, but realize there were 28 years of research and development. This has been enormously stepped up. For 28 years, apparently, the power of auditing has been underestimated. With better trained auditors than ever, and with their TRs and metering really in, the C/S who is keeping tech in on his lines can expect a lot more of this sort of thing, so he must be alert to it, without at the same time going delusory or failing to handle cases that really are bogged for quite some other reason. Given standard tech used by standard auditors and C/Sed by standard C/Ses, there is no reason why we cannot Clear the planet. HCOB 29.11.78R - 4 - Rev. 31.3.81 L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER Accepted by the BOARD OF DIRECTORS of the CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY of CALIFORNIA BDCSC:LRH:mm:nc:bk Copyright $c 1978, 1981 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER Accepted by the BOARD OF DIRECTORS of the CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY of CALIFORNIA   Type = 11 iDate=27/11/78 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=1 rDate=31/3/82 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Word Clearing Correction Word Clearing Series 35RG WORD CLEARING CORRECTION LIST  Type = 12 iDate=21/7/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=6 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Remimeo Word Clearers Class IV Grad and above Auditors C/Ses  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 27 NOVEMBER 1978R Remimeo REVISED 31 MARCH 1982 Word Clearers (Cancels BTB 21 July 1971RE Class IV Grad Word Clearing Correction and above List Revised) Auditors C/Ses (Revised to include missed withhold handling to Item #12 and to add new questions, Items #13 & #14,to the list.) (Revisions in Script) Word Clearing Series 35RG WORD CLEARING CORRECTION LIST The WCCL is the list to use when any form of Word Clearing bogs down. Any and all trouble with Word Clearing should be corrected by assessing and handling this list. The WCCL has been designed to parallel errors made in Word Clearing, not study, not the person's case, and it is to be used in Word Clearing sessions to correct Word Clearing errors. If, after the Word Clearing Correction List has been fully handled, there seems to be other bypassed charge connected with the subject of study, a Study Green Form should be done. This list can be assessed Method 3 or Method 5. All Word Clearers are to check out on and use this list to correct Word Clearing errors. 1. IS THERE SOMETHING WRONG WITH YOUR CASE? _______ If this list is being assessed during course room metered Word Clearing, end off for C/S instructions, otherwise assess and handle a C/S Series 53. 2. HAVE YOU BEEN WORD CLEARED OVER OUT-RUDS? _______ Find out which and handle to F/N and VGIs. 3. IS A WORD STILL MISUNDERSTOOD? _______ Find out which and get it cleared to F/N. (If Method 1 Word Clearing, clear it E/S to EP.) 4. WAS A WORD IN A DEFINITION MISUNDERSTOOD? _______ Find out which word and get it cleared to F/N. 5. COULDN'T YOU FIND THE ACTUAL MISUNDERSTOOD? _______ Using your meter and 2WC, find the misunderstood word and clear to F/N. (If Method 1 Word Clearing clear it E/S to Ep.) 6. DID YOU NOT GET THE BASIC WORD? _______ Find out which word or subject was not taken to EP, locate the misunderstood words and clear each to F/N, going E/S to EP. 7. DID YOU FAIL TO USE THE WORD YOU WERE CLEARING IN ENOUGH SENTENCES? _______ Get the word used in sentences until it is fully understood, to F/N and VGIs. 8. DID YOU NEED TO DEMO THE WORD YOU WERE CLEARING? _______ Get the word demoed to full understanding, F/N and VGIs. 9. WERE YOU USING AN IMPROPER DICTIONARY? _______ Find out what word and what dictionary. Get a proper dictionary and clear it to F/N and VGIs. HCOB 27.11.78R - 2 - Rev. 31.3.82 10. WAS THERE AN EARLIER SIMILAR MISUNDERSTOOD WORD NOT CLEARED? _______ Find out what it is and clear it to F/N. (If Method 1 Word Clearing, clear it E/S to EP.) 11. DID YOU NOT FEEL GOOD ABOUT A WORD WHEN IT WAS CLEARED? _______ Find the word and reclear it to F/N. 12. DO YOU KEEP FORGETTING WORDS YOU HAVE ALREADY DEFINED? _______ If the above reads, ask: "Do you have any withhold about going past misunderstood words?" and handle as a missed withhold, E/S to F/N. Then clear to F/N, each MU found. Then 2WC "How have you tried to solve the problem of forgetting words?" to F/N or E/S to F/N. 13. HAVE YOU GONE PAST WORDS YOU DIDN'T UNDERSTAND? _______ Handle as a missed withhold, E/S to F/N. Get the words located and defined, each to F/N. 14. HAVE YOU GONE PAST A MISUNDERSTOOD WORD OR ABBREVIATION IN YOUR WORK? _______ Handle the missed withhold of going past MUs, to F/N or E/S to F/N. Then clear each MU uncovered, to F/N. 15. DID YOU HAVE TO CLEAR A WORD YOU ALREADY KNEW? _______ Find out what the word was and indicate. If no F/N get off any protest or inval and rehab to F/N. 16. WAS A WORD OVERRUN? _______ Find out what word and rehab. 17. WAS A WORD READING ON PROTEST? _______ Get which word, indicate. If no F/N handle with Itsa E/S Itsa to F/N. 18. DID A WORD NOT REALLY READ? _______ Get which word, indicate. If no F/N handle with Itsa E/S Itsa to F/N. 19. COULDN'T YOU HEAR THE WORD CLEARER? _______ Itsa E/S Itsa to F/N. 20. DIDN'T YOU UNDERSTAND WHAT THE WORD CLEARER SAID? _______ Itsa E/S Itsa to F/N. 21. DIDN'T YOU UNDERSTAND THE ACTION BEING DONE? _______ Find out what it was and handle with Itsa E/S Itsa to F/N or clear it up with correct references to F/N and VGIs. 22. WERE YOU CONFUSED BY SOMETHING? _______ Find out what it was and handle with Itsa E/S Itsa to F/N or clear it up with correct references to F/N and VGIs. 23. WERE YOU PUZZLED WHY THE WORD CLEARER KEPT ON WORD CLEARING? _______ Find out what happened and handle with Itsa E/S Itsa to F/N or rehab the win. 24. ON WORD CLEARING DID YOU FEEL OVERWHELMED? _______ Find out what happened and handle with Itsa E/S Itsa to F/N. 25. ON WORD CLEARING DID YOU FEEL HOPELESS? _______ Find out what happened and handle with Itsa E/S Itsa to F/N. 26. ON WORD CLEARING DID YOU FEEL INVALIDATED? _______ Find out what happened and handle with Itsa E/S Itsa to F/N. HCOB 27.11.78R - 3 - Rev. 31.3.82 27. ON WORD CLEARING WAS THERE ANY EVALUATION? _______ Find out what happened and handle with Itsa E/S Itsa to F/N. 28. ON WORD CLEARING WERE YOU PROTESTING? _______ Itsa E/S Itsa to F/N. 29. DID YOU GET DISTRACTED DURING WORD CLEARING? _______ Find out what happened and handle with Itsa E/S Itsa to F/N. 30. WAS THERE SOMETHING WRONG WITH THE F/Ns INDICATED? _______ Find out what happened and handle with Itsa E/S Itsa to F/N or clear to F/N any words not fully cleared. 31. DID YOU HAVE TO LOOK UP TECHNICAL, OR SPECIALIZED DEFINITIONS OF WORDS THAT DIDN'T APPLY? _______ Find out what the word was. Indicate this was an unnecessary action. Correctly clear the word to F/N. (If Method 1 Word Clearing, take E/S to EP.) 32. DID YOU TELL THE WORD CLEARER IT WAS UNDERSTOOD JUST TO GET RID OF HIM? _______ Get the word (plus any others) and clear each to F/N. 33. WAS IT NOT YOUR MISUNDERSTOOD? _______ Itsa E/S Itsa to F/N. 34. WAS THERE INVALIDATION OF KNOWINGNESS? _______ Find out what it was, and handle with Itsa E/S Itsa to F/N. 35. DID YOU USE THE WRONG SIZED CANS? _______ False TA Checklist. Work out the right sized cans with the pc. 36. DID YOUR HANDS GET TIRED IN WORD CLEARING? _______ False TA Checklist. Work out the right sized cans with the pc. 37. WAS A WORD ON THE LIST OF SUBJECTS MISUNDERSTOOD? _______ Find out what it is and clear to F/N. (If Method 1 Word Clearing, take E/S to EP.) 38. IS A SUBJECT STILL MISUNDERSTOOD? _______ Get which subject and which word and clear it to F/N. (If Method 1 Word Clearing, take E/S to EP.) 39. DID YOU NOT GET THE BASIC SUBJECT? _______ Find out what subject is incomplete by 2WC, locate the misunderstood words in it and clear each to F/N. (If Method 1 Word Clearing, take E/S to EP.) 40. IN REGARD TO EARLIER SUBJECTS OR COURSES YOU STUDIED DID YOU FIND ANY OF THEM DIFFICULT? _______ When this question is answered ask this second question: WERE THERE ANY WORDS ON THESE COURSES THAT YOU DIDN'T FULLY UNDERSTAND? _______ Find by subject and get each defined. Then do steps again until both questions F/N. 41. DO YOU STILL HAVE MISUNDERSTOODS ON EARLIER COURSES? _______ Find out which course (or courses) and get each misunderstood word cleared. Then recheck the question and handle until it F/Ns on checking. 42. DO YOU HAVE MISUNDERSTOODS ON YOUR EARLIER THAN SCIENTOLOGY SCHOOL OR FAMILY TRAINING? _______ When this question has been answered, ask: WAS THERE ANY WORD IN (SUBJECT NAMED) YOU DIDN'T UNDERSTAND? _______ Get it fully defined to F/N and all such words cleared up for that subject. Handle all subjects the person has named as above. Then recheck the original question and handle until it F/Ns on checking. HCOB 27.11.78R - 4 - Rev. 31.3.82 43. WERE YOU BEING WORD CLEARED ON AN UNREADING SUBJECT? _______ Find out what. Indicate. If no F/N rehab or Date/Locate. 44. WAS A SUBJECT OVERRUN? _______ Find out what and indicate. If no F/N rehab. 45. WAS A MISUNDERSTOOD SUBJECT MISSED? _______ Find out which subject(s) and which words and clear each to F/N. (If Method 1 Word Clearing, take E/S to EP.) 46. DID YOU TRY TO MAKE THE LIST F/N? _______ Put in ruds on word clearing, each to F/N, VGIs. Rehab any overruns. 47. IS THERE A SUBJECT WHICH SHOULD HAVE BEEN ON THE LIST BUT WASN'T? _______ Find out what the subject is and clear all misunderstood words to F/N, going E/S to EP. 48. HAS A WIN BEEN BYPASSED? _______ Find out what and rehab. 49. IS THERE SOMETHING ELSE WRONG? _______ Find out what and handle or return to the C/S. 50. WAS THERE NOTHING WRONG IN THE FIRST PLACE? _______ Indicate. If no F/N rehab or Date/Locate. 51. IS THERE SOME OTHER BYPASSED CHARGE ON THE SUBJECT OF STUDY? _______ Assess and assess a Study Green Form. L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER Revisions assisted by Senior C/S International LRH:DM:nc:bk Copyright $c 1978, 1982 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER Revisions assisted by Senior C/S International   Type = 11 iDate=24/9/78 Volnum=0 Issue=3 Rev=2 rDate=31/3/81 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Dianetic Clear Series 1 DIANETIC CLEAR   Remimeo AOs, SHs Class IV Orgs NED Chkshts Tech/Qual All C/Ses All Auditors HCOs Missions  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 24 SEPTEMBER 1978RA Remimeo ISSUE III AOs, SHs RE-REVISED 31 MARCH 1981 Class IV Orgs NED Chkshts Tech/Qual All C/Ses All Auditors HCOs Missions (This Bulletin has been revised to restate the most accurate definition of the State of Clear, as given in Book One, Chapter II of DIANETICS: THE MODERN SCIENCE OF MENTAL HEALTH, to update the Bulletin in regard to the use of the Dianetic Clear Special Intensive for verification and rehabilitation of the State if it is achieved before doing the Clearing Course, and to give data on the programming of a Dianetic Clear for further auditing.) (Revisions not in Script) Dianetic Clear Series 1 DIANETIC CLEAR REFERENCE: HCOB 12 Sep 78 Dianetic Clear Series 2 Reiss. 31.3.81 URGENT -- IMPORTANT, DIANETICS FORBIDDEN ON CLEARS AND OTs (This Bulletin revises the definition of "Dianetic Clear", Page 113, Technical Dictionary, and the definition of "Keyed-Out Clear", Page 221, Technical Dictionary.) The state of Clear can be achieved on Dianetics. I have now determined there is no such thing as Keyed-Out Clear. There is only a Dianetic Clear and he is a Clear. The definition of Clear, to re-emphasize the most accurate statement of it as given originally in Book One, Chapter II of DIANETICS: THE MODERN SCIENCE OF MENTAL HEALTH, is: A BEING WHO IS UNREPRESSED AND SELF DETERMINED. The state of Clear, whether achieved on the Clearing Course or on processing on Grade Chart materials prior to the Clearing Course, can be very accurately determined when it is attained, as there are specific evidences which accompany the state. Should a pc originate that he has or might have gone Clear, or when he has read on a prepared list as having gone Clear, the folder must be sent to a C/S who is Clear and who is qualilied to C/S the Dianetic Clear Special Intensive. The pc will then be given the Dianetic Clear Special Intensive, to verify the state and rehabilitate it, if valid. The Dianetic Clear Special Intensive is only given at a Class IV Org (or higher) that is qualified to deliver that Intensive. If a Mission or Field Auditor believes one of their pcs to have gone Clear, they must send the pc and his folders to their closest qualified org which has a qualified C/S, for adjudication and a full Dianetic Clear Special Intensive, as required. HCOB 24.9.78RA III - 2 - Re-rev. 31.3.81 NOTE: No auditor or C/S nor any other person must evaluate for a pc on this nor feed or coax him to any cognition, which is a Comm-Evable offense. Clears are made through auditing, not by feeding cognitions to pcs. This is important as someone who has not made Clear will not make it on the OT Levels. Once declared, the person's pc folders must be clearly marked "DIANETIC CLEAR", for security and for purposes of further programming. The individual is then issued the standard Clear Certificate by Certs and Awards, which states, simply, that he has attained the State of Clear. This standard Certificate bears no qualifying statement of the State. The Dianetic Clear, on achieving this state, is not run further on Dianetics. He must not be run on engrams, R3RA or any version of R3R or Dianetics. He can be given Touch or Contact Assists (as can Scn Clears and OTs), but he is not to be given any Dianetic auditing assist nor any Dianetic auditing. (He can, of course, receive any actions on the Assist Summary Bulletin, excluding R3RA.) A Dianetic Clear does the Purification Rundown if not previously completed. He does the Survival Rundown unless he has completed full Objectives, each run to EP, prior to the issuance of the Survival Rundown. He is given the Scientology Drug Rundown, as needed (unless he has previously completed a full NED Drug Rundown or other Dianetic Drug Rundown). He is run on Expanded ARC Straightwire and Expanded Grades 0-IV to full Ability Gained for each Grade not previously standardly declared. (Note: On Grade IV, however, he would not be run on the R3RA section of Service Fac Handling.) A point to be made here is that it is highly important to the immediate and future well-being of the individual that he does fully achieve the Ability of each Grade and that he misses none of the Levels or actions that will enable him to eventually make it to OT. When each Grade has been handled to ability Gained, the next step is the Solo Auditor Course at a Saint Hill or an Advanced Org. Additionally, the above auditing actions fully completed are now required for a person going onto Advanced Courses at an AO. A Dianetic Clear is not run on power, R6EW or the Clearing Course but, upon completion of the Solo Auditor Course, goes directly onto OT I. Until Dianetics and Scientology came along the surface of the subjects of the reactive bank and of Clearing had not even been scratched. You can look in vain all through the records of history and you will not find one shred of valid data and enlightenment about the bank. HCOB 24.9.78RA III - 3 - Re-rev. 31.3.81 The uniform attainment of the State of Clear through standard Dianetic and Scientology auditing procedures was miraculous and came as a result of a very long road of research, culminating in the release of the Clearing Course making it certain that everyone could reach the state. Then, with the further refinement of the technology of Dianetics which resulted in New Era Dianetics, and as a result of further tech developments, it became evident that some persons were attaining Clear at an earlier Grade Chart level. Where the person attains Clear in his processing (whether on the Clearing Course or at some earlier point in his processing) is not important. What is important is that he honestly attains it. Clearing is the key to making a sane environment out of the barbarism known as Earth. It is not something to be brushed off lightly, as the technology was not easily won. With the State of Clear and its technology protected and acknowledged for the important achievement that it is, the future of this planet can evolve to one of sanity and upward progress for all. That is and has always been the goal and that is the trust that every Scientologist now shares with me. L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER Accepted by the BOARD OF DIRECTORS of the CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY of CALIFORNIA BDCSC:LRH:bk:dr Copyright $c 1978 1980, 1981 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER Accepted by the BOARD OF DIRECTORS of the CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY of CALIFORNIA   Type = 11 iDate=12/9/78 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  URGENT -- IMPORTANT Dianetic Clear Series 2 DIANETICS FORBIDDEN ON CLEARS AND OTS   Remimeo BPI  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 12 SEPTEMBER 1978 Remimeo REISSUED 31 MARCH 81 BPI (Reissued as part of the Dianetic Clear Series) URGENT -- IMPORTANT Dianetic Clear Series 2 DIANETICS FORBIDDEN ON CLEARS AND OTS New Era Dianetics or any Dianetics is NOT to be run on Clears or above or on Dianetic Clears. This applies even when they say they can see some pictures. Anyone who has purchased NED auditing who is Clear or above must be routed to an AO or Flag to receive the special NED Rundown for OTs. They are NOT to be run on regular New Era Dianetics. Anyone who is Clear but not OT III is to get through OT III immediately so he can receive this Special Rundown. The EP of this Rundown is: CAUSE OVER LIFE. L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER Accepted by the BOARD OF DIRECTORS of the CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY of CALIFORNIA BDCSC:LRH:nc:bk Copyright $c 1978, 1981 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER Accepted by the BOARD OF DIRECTORS of the CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY of CALIFORNIA   Type = 11 iDate=8/9/78 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=2 rDate=6/3/82 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  MINI LIST OF GRADE 0-IV PROCESSES   Remimeo Level 0-IV Chksheets Supervisors Auditors C/Ses  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 8 SEPTEMBER 1978RA Remimeo RE-REVISED 6 MARCH 1982 Level 0-IV Chksheets Supervisors Auditors C/Ses (This HCOB has been revised to modify the original statement that at the completion of each of the training Levels the student audits the processes on this list for that Level. The revision has been made to align this HCOB with HCO PL 13 Sep 81 Issue II REVISION OF ACADEMY LEVELS 0-IV AUDITING REQUIREMENTS which states that the student auditor must audit at least one pc on each of the processes of a specific Level to the attainment of the ability gained for that Level OR produce consistent well-done auditing hours in the style of auditing taught on the Level to a definite good pc result (remarkable case change). The exception is Level IV where the student is required to audit a pc on the major process of the Level, Service Facsimiles, to remarkably case changes before certification on that Level.) (Re-revised 6 March 1982 to add HCOB 7 March 1982 CONFESSIONALS INCLUDED IN EXPANDED GRADE 2 PROCESSES under Item 10, CONFESSIONAL PROCESSING.) (Revisions in Script) MINI LIST OF GRADE 0-IV PROCESSES SPECIAL NOTE: The list below is by no means a complete list of Grade 0-IV Processes. Many, many processes exist on the Grades 0-IV on which a preclear may need to be audited to achieve the full end phenomena (ability gained) for a Grade, and which would also be required for a pc run on Expanded Grades. The following is a MINI LIST of Grade 0-IV processes. On each of the training Levels, toward the end of each checksheet, the student auditor studies and drills the processes on this list for that Level. Commands for Flows 1, 2, 3 and 0 (Quads) for those processes that are run Quad are to be found on BTBs 15 Nov 76, Issues I through VI, 0-IV EXPANDED GRADE PROCESSES -- QUADS, PARTS A, B, C, D, E and F. 1. ARC STRAIGHTWIRE PROCESS HCOB 27 Sep 68 II ARC STRAIGHTWIRE BTB 15 Nov 76 I 0-IV EXPANDED GRADE PROCESSES -- QUADS PART A, ARC STRAIGHTWIRE, Item 11 2. ARC STRAIGHTWIRE HAVINGNESS BTB 15 Nov 76 I 0-IV EXPANDED GRADE PROCESSES -- QUADS PART A, ARC STRAIGHTWIRE, Item 12 HCOB 8.9.78RA - 2 - Re-rev. 6.3.82 3. 0-0, 0-A, 0-B HCOB 11 Dec 64 SCIENTOLOGY 0 PROCESSES HCOB 26 Dec 64 ROUTINE 0-A EXPANDED BTB 15 Nov 76 II 0-IV EXPANDED GRADE PROCESSES -- QUADS PART B, GRADE 0 PROCESSES, p. 10 4. GRADE ZERO HAVINGNESS BTB 15 Nov 76 II 0-IV EXPANDED GRADE PROCESSES -- QUADS PART B, GRADE 0 PROCESSES, p. 12 5. CCHs HCOB 1 Dec 65 CCHs 6. LEVEL ONE PROBLEMS PROCESS HCOB 19 Nov 65 PROBLEMS PROCESS BTB 15 Nov 76 III O-IV EXPANDED GRADE PROCESSES -- QUADS PART C, GRADE I PROCESSES, p. 18 7. HAVINGNESS PROCESS FOR GRADE I BTB 15 Nov 76 III O-IV EXPANDED GRADE PROCESSES -- QUADS PART C, GRADE I PROCESSES, p. 18 8. O/W PROCESS BTB 15 Nov 76 IV O-IV EXPANDED GRADE PROCESSES -- QUADS PART D, GRADE 2 PROCESSES, Item 26 9. HAVINGNESS PROCESS FOR GRADE II BTB 15 Nov 76 IV O-IV EXPANDED GRADE PROCESSES -- QUADS PART D, GRADE 2 PROCESSES, Item 27 10. CONFESSIONAL PROCESSING HCOB 30 Nov 78 CONFESSIONAL PROCEDURE HCOB 7 Mar 82 CONFESSIONALS INCLUDED IN EXPANDED GRADE 2 PROCESSES 11. TWO WAY COMM HCOB 21 Apr 70 2 WAY COMM C/Ses HCOB 3 Jul 70 C/Sing 2 WAY COMM HCOB 17 Mar 74 TWC CHECKSHEET, TWC, USING WRONG QUESTIONS 12. L1C HCOB 19 Mar 71 L1C HCOB 8.9.78RA - 3 - Re-rev. 6.3.82 13. L4BRA HCOB 15 Dec 68RA L4BRA 14. R3H HCOB 6 Aug 68 R3H HCOB 1 Aug 68 THE LAWS OF LISTING & NULLING BTB 15 Nov 76 V O-IV EXPANDED GRADE PROCESSES -- QUADS PART E, GRADE 3 PROCESSES, pp. 7 - 8 15. GRADE III HAVINGNESS BTB 15 Nov 76 V O-IV EXPANDED GRADE PROCESSES -- QUADS PART E, GRADE 3 PROCESSES, pp. 8 - 9 16. SERVICE FACSIMILE PROCESS HCOB 6 Sep 78 III URGENT -- IMPORTANT, ROUTINE THREE SC-A, FULL SERVICE FACSIMILE HANDLING UPDATED WITH NEW ERA DIANETICS 17. GRADE IV HAVINGNESS PROCESS BTB 15 Nov 76 VI O-IV EXPANDED GRADE PROCESSES -- QUADS PART F, GRADE 4 PROCESSES, p. 5 The student auditor must study and drill and get checked out on any of the above processes or actions and their commands before he audits them. He must not and cannot be required to audit any process above the Level to which he has been trained. L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER Revision assisted by Research and Technical Compilations Unit LRH:RTC:ldv:bk Copyright $c 1978, 1982 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER Revision assisted by Research and Technical Compilations Unit   Type = 11 iDate=15/7/78 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=1 rDate=25/3/81 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  SCIENTOLOGY AUDITING CS-1   Remimeo All C/Ses All Auditors Tech Qual  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 15 JULY 1978R Remimeo REVISED 25 MARCH 1981 All C/Ses All Auditors (Cancels BTB 8 Jan 71R, AUDITING CS-1 Tech FOR DIANETICS AND SCIENTOLOGY.) Qual (Revised to better clarify several of the handling steps of the CS-1 procedure and to provide additional data on terms in the attached Definitions Sheet.) (Revisions Not in Script) SCIENTOLOGY AUDITING CS-1 A CS-1 is a general C/S (Case Supervisor direction) which covers the actions necessary to orient the pc to the basic factors of auditing and thus prepares him to receive auditing. For this purpose, because of the differences in Dianetic and Scientology auditing terms and procedures, there exists this Scientology CS-1 as well as a Dianetic CS-1 (HCOB 9 July 76R Rev. 4.9.78). The Scientology CS-1 is done to give a pc new to Scientology or a previously audited pc, as needed, the necessary data and R-factor on Scientology basics, terminology and auditing procedure so that he understands and is able and willing to be audited successfully. Note: When the Case Supervisor orders a CS-1 for a pc who has been trained or audited previously, the pc may protest that be knows the terms and procedure. Should this occur, the auditor must acknowledge with excellent TRs. Without invalidation or evaluation he can let the pc know that this C/S is intended to make auditing more effective for him and to ensure that anything he might have missed is picked up and cleared. If the auditor's TRs are good, if he gives an honest R-factor and if he does not clean cleans (attempt to handle something the pc has already grasped), no ARC break should ever occur. A CS-1 standardly delivered to the pc who needs it will give tremendous wins. It is not necessary to re-clear those sections of this Scn CS-1 which the pc may have already covered in a recent and thorough Dianetics CS-1, provided the auditor is certain of the pc's understanding of the terms. The auditor should be fully familiar with this issue as well as: HCOB 17 Oct 64 III ALL LEVELS GETTING THE PC SESSIONABLE HCOB 5 Apr 69 NEW PRECLEARS, THE WORKABILITY OF SCIENTOLOGY HCOB 16 Jun 70 C/S Series 6, WHAT THE C/S IS DOING He will need to take a very thorough look at what has to be covered with the pc in this CS-1 and know his materials very well and have them ready in the CS-1 session for reference and clearing any misunderstoods or questions the pc may have. HCOB 15.7.78R - 2 - Rev. 25.3.81 The following will be needed in the auditing room: Technical Dictionary Admin Dictionary A good English dictionary (See HCOB 13 Feb 81 DICTIONARIES.) A good Dictionary in the pc's native language, and for a foreign language case a dual dictionary (English-to-foreign language and foreign language itself) Scn CS-1 Definitions Sheet -- Attachment No. 1 of this issue THE BASIC SCIENTOLOGY PICTURE BOOK THE FUNDAMENTALS OF THOUGHT HCOB 14 Oct 68RA Rev. 19.6.80, THE AUDITOR'S CODE Demo Kit. The auditor makes full use of these as necessary. If further references are needed, ensure source materials are used. A. Clear with the pc each Scientology (or other) term, using the definitions on the attachment sheet, and other references as needed. Ensure you fully handle any word or term that is obviously misunderstood or any word or term the pc is hesitant about or unsure of. (Note: When having the pc define a word using Method 5 Word Clearing, you don't ask: "Do you know what this word means?" You ask: "What is the definition of _______ ?") When the pc has defined a word or term, have him use it correctly in several sentences. Where it is applicable have him give you examples, using his experiences where possible or those of relatives or friends and/or have him demonstrate the item, using a demo kit. Cover by exact definition all terms used. B. Check for any questions (or misunderstoods) as you go along and ensure any such get handled so the pc winds up with a clear understanding of the word, item or procedure. Don't settle for glibness that does not show understanding, but, on the other hand, don't overrun or put duress on the pc either. Ensure that each word cleared on the pc is taken to F/N. SCN CS-1 PROCEDURE: 1. Give pc the R-factor that you are going to do a Scientology Auditing CS-1 to familiarize him with auditing procedure and any basic data that may require clarification. 2. Clear the word: Scientology. HCOB 15.7.78R - 3 - Rev. 25.3.81 3. Clear the words: a) auditing d) Clear b) auditing session c) preclear c) auditor 4. Clear the words: a) thetan b) mind c) body Have pc use the demo kit as well as the references to ensure he gets the relationship between these. 5. Now clear the words: a) picture c) reactive mind b) mental image d) bank picture Have the pc give you examples of how the reactive mind works on a stimulus response basis, and have him demo it. 6. Clear with the pc: a) the communication cycle. Get the pc to give you examples he has observed. Have him demo the communication cycle. b) the auditing comm cycle. Get the pc to explain the difference between a comm cycle and the auditing comm cycle. Have him demonstrate it. If it is necessary to clarify this further, you can demonstrate the steps of the auditing comm cycle to the pc using simple, non-restimulative questions. Example: Ask: "Have you eaten dinner?" (or breakfast or lunch). And when he replies and has been acknowledged, ask: "What did you do when I asked that question?" Then have him ask you a similar type of question. Answer him and be sure he acknowledges you. Really establish your comm cycle with the pc. 7. Go over the TRs with the pc, demonstrating each with him, until he has a good idea of how they are used in auditing. 9. Go over with the pc what the meter does (registers charge/mental mass). For demonstration, you can do a "pinch test" where you explain to the pc that to show him how the meter registers mental mass you will give him a pinch as part of the demonstration. Do so. Then get him to think of the pinch (while he is holding the cans), showing him the meter reaction and explaining how it registers mental mass. HCOB 15.7.78R - 4 - Rev. 25.3.81 10. a) Clear the words: 1. key-in 2. key-out and have the pc demo and give you examples of each. b) Clear the word: release. Have the pc demo it. c) Clear the word: rehabilitate (rehab). Ensure the pc understands its use in auditing. Have the pc demo it. 11. a) Clear the word: postulate. b) Have pc give you examples of a time or two when he postulated something and got it. 12. a) Clear the word: cognition. b) Have the pc give you some examples of a cognition. 13. Clear: floating needle. 14. a) Give the pc an R-factor on rudiments and when those would be used. b) Clear the word: rudiment. c) Clear: 1. affinity 2. reality 3. communication Have pc give you examples of each. d) Clear the term: ARC Demonstrate to the pc how A, R and C equate to understanding. Have the pc give you examples of how A, R and C bring about understanding. e) Clear: ARC break. Have the pc demo it for you. f) Using an appropriate dictionary, clear the words: curious, desired, enforced, inhibited, no, refused. g) Clear: 1. problem 2. Present Time Problem. Have the pc demo: 1) a problem 2) a present Time Problem. h) Clear: 1) overt 2) withhold 3) missed withhold. Have the pc demo: 1) an overt 2) withhold 3) missed withhold. (Use Definitions Sheet, or other references as needed.) 15. a) Using an appropriate dictionary, clear the words: 1) similar 2) earlier. HCOB 15.7.78R - 5 - Rev. 25.3.81 b) Then clear: "earlier similar." Give the pc examples of where it would be used. c) Have the pc give you an example of something "earlier similar." 16. Briefly clear with the pc how the rudiments are flown and the procedure for each rudiment. 17. Clear with the pc what a Repetitive Process is. Ensure he understands why and how it is done. Have the pc demo it for you. 18. a) Clear the word: flow. b) Demonstrate for the pc each of the Flows 1, 2, 3, 0. c) Then have the pc demo and give you an example of each. 19. Clear the words: a) assess b) assessment. 20. a) Explain to the pc that if at any time there is any difficulty in the auditing, you (or another auditor) will be using a prepared list to find and handle the exact difficulty. b) Ensure he understands that when such a list is being assessed he sits quietly holding the cans while the auditor calls the list and takes meter reads to locate the difficulty. 21. Go over the Auditor's Code, Items 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 14, 17, 18, 19 and 22. Check for and clear up any questions or misunderstoods the pc may have on this. 22. a) Clear: Examiner. b) Give the pc an R-factor on the Examiner and the fact that he will go to the Examiner immediately after each auditing session. Ensure he understands the Examiner says nothing to the preclear at that time, only recording what the pc says and noting down the tone arm position and state of the needle. Also, be sure the pc understands that the Examiner is the person he sees if he wishes to make any sort of statement regarding his case between sessions. c) Conditional: To familiarize the pc more fully with this step, if it is feasible, take the pc to the Examiner's space, introduce him to the Examiner, briefly orient him to the space and go over with him again the functions the Examiner performs. Then return to the auditing room. 23. Turn the folder in to the C/S. The C/S can also order any additional actions to the above. The Scientology Auditing CS-1 can usually be completed in one session. If it takes more than one session, the first session should be ended off at the end of a step or completion of a word or demonstration -- never in the middle of an action. HCOB 15.7.78R - 6 - Rev. 25.3.81 Make sure you do not leave your preclear with a question or a misunderstood or confusion. Know the preclear in front of you and get your product of an educated pc who can run Scientology processes easily and with gain. CLEARING COMMANDS The Scientology Auditing CS-1 does not preclude clearing the commands of each process or clearing a procedure in a session where the pc is begun on a new process or procedure. (Ref. HCOB 9 Aug 78 II, CLEARING COMMANDS) This would include the first time the pc is given a Two-Way Comm session, a Listing & Nulling session, etc. With any new action the procedure would first be fully cleared on the pc by the auditor. CLEARING WORDS ON CORRECTION LISTS In addition to the CS-1, to fully prepare the pc for his auditing up the Grade Chart, it is standard to clear the words on the various correction lists very early in auditing, before the need for them arises. (Otherwise, it is difficult to clear the words of a correction list over heavy by-passed charge.) Thus, when the need for correction lists does arise the words have already been cleared and the correction list can be used without delay. (Ref. HCOB 9 Aug 78 II, CLEARING COMMANDS, Items 7 and 8) This would be done as ordered by the C/S. L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER LRH:dr:bk Copyright $c 1978, 1981 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED HCOB 15.7.78R ATTACHMENT SCIENTOLOGY CS-1 DEFINITIONS SHEET (The following definitions have been taken from the DIANETICS AND SCIENTOLOGY TECHNICAL DICTIONARY, the glossary of the book DIANETICS TODAY, from the book DIANETICS: THE MODERN SCIENCE OF MENTAL HEALTH, Book One, Chapter II, and from existing HCO Bulletins where indicated. Use these in conjunction with the BASIC SCIENTOLOGY PICTURE BOOK. If further references are needed when clearing these terms and concepts, ensure source materials are used. For any non-Scientology terms use a good non-dinky dictionary, per HCOB 13 Feb 81 DICTIONARIES and HCOB 19 Jun 72R Rev. 15.2.81 DINKY DICTIONARIES.) SCIENTOLOGY: An applied religious philosophy developed by L. Ron Hubbard dealing with the study of knowledge, which through the application of its technology can bring about desirable changes in the conditions of life. (Taken from the Latin word scio, knowing in the fullest sense of the word, and the Greek word logos, to study.) The study of the human spirit in its relationship to the physical universe and its living forms. A religious practice applying to Man's spirit and his spiritual freedom. A body of knowledge which, when properly used, gives freedom and truth to the individual. AUDITING: Processing, the application of Scientology (or Dianetic) processes and procedures to someone by a trained auditor. The exact definition of auditing is: the action of asking a preclear a question (which he can understand and answer), getting an answer to that question and acknowledging him for that answer. AUDITING SESSION: A period in which an auditor and preclear are in a quiet place where they will not be disturbed. The auditor gives the preclear certain and exact commands which the preclear can follow. AUDITOR: A person trained and qualified in applying Scientology and/or Dianetic processes and procedures to individuals for their betterment; called an auditor because auditor means "one who listens." An auditor is a minister of the Church of Scientology. HCOB 15.7.78R - 2 - ATTACHMENT CLEAR: A being who is unrepressed and self-determined. (Ref. Book: DIANETICS: THE MODERN SCIENCE OF MENTAL HEALTH, Book One, Chapter II) The state of Clear is achieved by completion of the Clearing Course at an Advanced Organization of the Church of Scientology. Additionally, the power of auditing is such that Clear has been achieved earlier than the Clearing Course, on the standard Grade Chart processes of Dianetics and Scientology as delivered by Class IV Organizations of the Church of Scientology. PRECLEAR: From pre-Clear, a person not yet Clear; generally a person being audited, who is thus on the road to Clear; a person who, through Scientology and Dianetic processing, is finding out more about himself and life. Abbreviated -- p.c. THETAN: From THETA (life static), a word taken from the Greek symbol or letter: theta, traditional symbol for thought or spirit. The thetan is the individual himself -- not the body or the mind. The thetan is the "I"; one doesn't have or own a thetan; one is a thetan. It is the person himself -- not his body or his name, the physical universe, his mind, or anything else; that which is aware of being aware; the identity which is the individual. MIND: A control system between the thetan and the physical universe. It is not the brain. The mind is the accumulated recordings of thoughts, conclusions, decisions, observations and perceptions of a thetan throughout his entire existence. The thetan can and does use the mind in handling life and the physical universe. BODY: The organized physical composition or substance of an animal or man whether living or dead. The body is the thetan's communication center. It is a physical object. It is not the being himself. PICTURE: An exact likeness of something; a copy or representation of a thing, not the thing itself. An image or mental image of something. MENTAL IMAGE PICTURE: Mental picture; a copy of one's perceptions of the physical universe sometime in the past. A facsimile or a mock-up. In Scientology we call a mental image picture a facsimile when it is an unknowingly created picture or "photograph" of the physical HCOB 15.7.78R - 3 - ATTACHMENT universe sometime in the past. We call a mental image picture a mock-up when it is created by the thetan or for the thetan and does not consist of a photograph of the physical universe. Facsimiles, made up of mental energy, are the pictures contained in the reactive mind. REACTIVE MIND: Reactive bank. The portion of the mind which works on a stimulus- response basis (given a certain stimulus it will automatically give a certain response) which is not under a person's volitional control and which exerts force and power over a person's awareness, purposes, thoughts, body and actions. It consists of locks, secondaries, engrams and chains of them and is the single source of human aberrations and psychosomatic ills. The reactive mind never stops operating. Pictures of the environment, of a very low order, are taken by this mind even in some states of unconsciousness. The reactive mind comprises an unknowing, unwanted series of aberrated computations which bring about an effect upon the individual and those around him. It is an obsessive strata of unknown, unseen, uninspected data which are forcing solutions, unknown and unsuspected, on the individual -- which tells you why it remained hidden from man for so many thousands of years. BANK: A colloquial name for the reactive mind. The mental image picture collection of the pc. It comes from computer technology where all data is in a "bank." COMMUNICATION CYCLE: A completed communication, including origination of the communication, receipt of the communication, and answer or acknowledgement of the communication. A communication cycle consists of just: cause, distance, effect, with intention, attention, duplication and understanding. AUDITING COMM CYCLE: (HCOB 30 Apr 71) This is the auditing comm cycle that is always in use: (1) is the pc ready to receive the command? (appearance, presence) (2) auditor gives command/question to pc (cause, distance, effect) (3) pc looks to bank for answer... (4) pc receives answer from bank (5) pc gives answer to auditor (cause, distance, effect) (6) auditor acknowledges pc HCOB 15.7.78R - 4 - ATTACHMENT (7) auditor sees that pc received acknowledgement (attention) (8) new cycle beginning with (1). CHARGE: The stored quantities of energy in the time track; stored energy or stored or re-creatable potentials of energy. The electrical impulse on the case that activates the meter. Harmful energy or force accumulated and generated in the reactive mind, resulting from the conflicts and unpleasant experiences that a person has had. MENTAL MASS: Mental mass is the mass contained in the mental image pictures (facsimiles) in the reactive mind. It has weight; very tiny, but it has weight, and it actually has size and shape and so forth. Its proportionate weight would be terribly slight compared to the real object which the person is making a picture of. KEY-IN: The action of recording a lock on a secondary or engram; the moment an earlier upset or earlier incident has been restimulated. The action of some part of the reactive mind moving in on the person. A Key-in occurs when the environment around the awake but fatigued or distressed individual is similar to some part of the reactive mind. Since the reactive mind operates on the equation A=A=A, the present time environment becomes identified with the contents of a particular portion of the bank and so it activates and exerts its influence on the person. (Ref. Tech Dictionary & HCOB 19 Dec 80 REHAB TECH) KEY-OUT: An action of an engram or secondary dropping away without being erased. Released or separate from one's reactive mind or some portion of it. The action of the reactive mind or some portion of it dropping out of restimulation on the pc. (Ref. Tech Dictionary & HCOB 19 Dec 80 REHAB TECH) RELEASE: (0) A preclear whose reactive mind or some major portion of it is keyed out and is not influencing him. (1) A person who has been able to back out of his bank. The bank is still there but the person isn't sunk into it with all its somatics and depressions. (2) When the pc disconnects from the mass in his bank, that is a release. When this happens, the pc disconnects from the bank to a greater or lesser degree. (3) A person who has become free of a difficulty or personal "block" stemming from the mind. (4) When you take a thetan out of a mass, that is a release. (Ref. Tech Dictionary & HCOB 19 Dec 80 REHAB TECH) HCOB 15.7.78R - 5 - ATTACHMENT REHABILITATE (Rehab): To restore to a former capacity or condition. In auditing, this means to do the series of actions in session which result in regaining a state of release for the pc. Abbreviated "Rehab." (Ref. Tech Dictionary & HCOB 19 Dec 80 REHAB TECH) POSTULATE: A conclusion, decision or resolution made by the individual himself; to conclude, decide or resolve a problem or to set a pattern for the future or to nullify a pattern of the past. ... We mean, by postulate, a self-created truth. A postulate is, of course, that thing which is directed desire or order, or inhibition, or enforcement, on the part of the individual in the form of an idea. ... Postulate means to cause a thinkingness or consideration. COGNITION: A pc origination indicating he has "come to realize." It's a "What do you know? I..." statement. A new realization of life. It results in a higher degree of awareness and consequently a greater ability to succeed with one's endeavors in life. FLOATING NEEDLE: A Floating Needle is a rhythmic sweep of the dial at a slow, even pace of the needle. It is always accompanied by very good indicators in the pc. (Ref. HCOB 10 Dec 76R, C/S Series 99R SCN F/N AND TA POSITION, HCOB 21 Jul 78 WHAT IS AN F/N) RUDIMENTS: First principles, steps, stages or conditions. The basic actions done at the beginning of a session to set up the pc for the major session action; ARC Breaks, PTPs, withholds. A rudiment is that which is used to get the pc in shape to be audited in that session. AFFINITY: Degree of liking or affection or lack of it. The feeling of love or liking for something or someone. Affinity is a tolerance of distance. A great affinity would be a tolerance of or liking of close proximity. A lack of affinity would be an intolerance of or dislike of close proximity. Affinity is one of the components of understanding; the other components being reality and communication. HCOB 15.7.78R - 6 - ATTACHMENT REALITY: Reality is an agreement as to what is. It is not what the individual thinks reality is; it is what the majority agrees it is. It is the solid objects, the real things of life. It is the agreement upon perceptions and data in the physical universe. Reality is what is. It is one of the components of understanding. COMMUNICATION: The interchange of ideas or objects between two people or terminals. More precisely the definition of communication is the consideration and action of impelling an impulse or particle from source point across a distance to receipt point, with the intention of bringing into being at the receipt point a duplication of that which emanated from the source point. The formula of communication is: cause, distance, effect, with attention and duplication. Communication by definition does not need to be two-way. Communication is one of the component parts of understanding. ARC: A word formed from the initial letters of Affinity, Reality and Communication, which together equate to Understanding. It is pronounced by stating its letters, A-R-C. To Scientologists it has come to mean good feeling, love or friendliness. ARC BREAK: A sudden drop or cutting of one's affinity, reality or communication with someone or something. It is pronounced by its letters A-R-C break. Upsets with people or things come about because of a lessening or sundering of affinity, reality or communication or understanding. PROBLEM: A problem is a conflict arising from two opposing intentions. Anything which has opposing sides of equal force; it is postulate-counter-postulate, intention-counter-intention, terminal-counter-terminal, force-counter-force. It's one thing versus another thing. You've got two forces or two ideas which are interlocked of comparable magnitude and the thing stops right there. PRESENT TIME PROBLEM: A specific problem that exists in the physical universe now, on which a person has his attention fixed. ... Any set of circumstances that so engages the attention of the preclear that he feels he should be doing something about it instead of being audited. OVERT: An overt act is an act of omission or commission which does the least good for the least number of dynamics or the most harm to the greatest number of dynamics. HCOB 15.7.78R - 7 - ATTACHMENT ... An aggressive or destructive act by the individual against one or more of the eight dynamics (self, family, group, mankind, animals or plants, mest, life or the infinite). That thing which you do which you aren't willing to have happen to you. WITHHOLD: An undisclosed harmful (contra-survival) act. A withhold is something the pc did that he isn't talking about. Any withhold comes after an overt. MISSED WITHHOLD: An undisclosed contra-survival act which has been restimulated by another but not disclosed. This is a withhold which another person nearly found out about, leaving the person with the withhold in a state of wondering whether his hidden deed is known or not. REPETITIVE PROCESS: ... A process that is run over and over with the same question of the pc.... we don't expect the auditor to do anything but state the command (or ask the question) with no variation, acknowledge the pc's answer and handle the pc origins by understanding and acknowledging what the pc said. A process which permits the individual to examine his mind and environment and out of it select the unimportances and importances. FLOW: A progress of energy between two points. An impulse or direction of energy particles or thought or masses between terminals. The progress of particles or impulses or waves from point A to Point B. The four flows used in processing are: F-1, flow one, something happening to self. F-2, flow two, doing something to another. F-3, flow three, others doing things to others. F-0, flow zero, self doing something to self. ASSESS: To choose, from a list or statements -- which item or thing has the longest read or blowdown. (In Dianetics it is choosing which item or statement has the longest read, blowdown or pc's interest. The longest read usually will also have the pc's interest.) ASSESSMENT: An action done from a prepared list. Assessment is done by the auditor between the pc's bank and the meter. The auditor looks at the meter while doing an assessment. HCOB 15.7.78R - 8 - ATTACHMENT He just notes which item has the longest fall or blowdown. Assessment isn't auditing, it is simply trying to locate something to audit. It is the whole action of obtaining a significant item from a pc. EXAMINER: Preclear Examiner. The person in a Scientology Church to whom preclears are sent immediately after any auditing session. The Examiner is assigned to the duties of noting the pc's statements, TA position and state of the needle and the pc's indicators, after session. He says nothing to the pc during this action; he simply records the necessary data, and acknowledges the pc's statement if one is made. The examiner is also the person the pc sees when he wishes to volunteer information or make any sort of statement about his case, or if there is something he wants handled regarding his case.  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER   Type = 0 iDate=2/6/78 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=3 rDate=31/3/82 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Cramming Series 18RB CRAMMING REPAIR ASSESSMENT LIST   IMPORTANT Remimeo Cram Off Hats All Auditors  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 2 JUNE 1978RB Remimeo RE-REVISED 31 MARCH 1982 Cram Off Hats All Auditors (Re-revised 31 Mar 82 to add missed withhold handlings to Items 23 & 29 and to add questions, Items 30 & 45 to the list.) (Revisions in Script) IMPORTANT Cramming Series 18RB CRAMMING REPAIR ASSESSMENT LIST HISTORY: I recently made an important technical discovery that a person, org or area can be totally bogged by a mis-cram or by an R/Ser operating under the guise of a "Cramming Officer." In the particular instance, one R/Sing Cramming Officer had bogged an org and then a second R/Sing Cramming Officer took over to "repair it," resulting in a nearly total crash. This isn't meant to be condemnatory of Cramming Officers because I know the vast majority do a good job and are valuable to their orgs and I do appreciate their efforts. The above are the general circumstances which led to my discovery. To remedy this, I developed the following Cramming Repair List. In subsequent use of it, including people who had been mis-crammed elsewhere, the usage appeared quite miraculous. It has been found that faulty, quicky or mis-cramming can result in continual goofs or an apparency of out-ethics as the person isn't correcting. This list covers the basic errors that can occur in cramming. It has also been found that a Cramming Officer who has consistent overt products will mess up an area. This list is used to correct such cramming. This list can be used by an Auditor in session who finds the PC has by-passed charge on his past cramming. It is also used when a bog or impasse has occurred during a cramming action which the Short Cramming Repair List did not resolve, or when the person goes sour after a cramming action. Its main use is to clear up an org or area where it is found that one or more Cramming Officers have been messing it up. In such an instance, it is applied to every past or present staff member. In such an instance particularly, its use can result in a miraculous resurge of the org or area. Needless to say it can produce a remarkable resurgence in a person who has a history of being mis-crammed. The list is done in a session by an Auditor or qualified Cramming Officer who has a Qual OK to assess a prepared list and Qual OK to operate an E-Meter. It can be assessed Method 3 or Method 5. HCOB 2.6.78RA - 2 - Re-rev. 31.3.82 Auditor Instruction: In case of a wrong why, self-listing or out-list, handle per HCOB 11 Apr 77 LIST ERRORS CORRECTION OF and L4BRA. In case of any read find out who and when as needed to handle the question. If any question reads keep at it until you F/N it. F/N every item on the list that reads, then F/N the whole list on a final assessment of it. In calling these items to the PC call them as questions, not as statements. This is the case in this list or any other prepared list. Do not call them as statements as this will tend to evaluate for the PC and even invalidate him. If the list does not F/N or if the cramming repair does not seem to be getting anywhere, do a C/S 53 and return to and F/N the Cramming Repair List after you've handled the C/S 53. NAME: ________________________________ DATE: _________________________________ 1. WAS CRAMMING DONE OVER OUT-INT? _______ (If Int is validly reading and is not reading on False or Protest, end off and send folder to C/S. If Int is not out now, but there is BPC on being crammed over out now, indicate the read to get an F/N.) 2. WAS CRAMMING DONE OVER AN OUT-LISTS? _______ (Handle per HCOB 11 Apr 77 LIST ERRORS CORRECTION OF and with an L4BRA.) 3. HAVE YOU BEEN GIVEN A WRONG WHY? _______ (Handle as in #2.) 4. DO YOU HAVE A WRONG WHY? _______ (Handle as in #2.) 5. AS A RESULT OF CRAMMING ARE YOU SELF-LISTING? _______ (Handle as in #2.) 6. DO YOU SELF-LIST? _______ (Handle as in #2.) 7. WERE YOU CRAMMED OVER OUT-RUDS? _______ (Find out which and handle E/S to F/N.) 8. DO YOU HAVE AN ARC-X? _______ (ARCU CDEINR E/S to F/N.) 9. HAVE YOU BEEN UPSET WITH SOMEONE'S HANDLING OF YOUR AREA? _______ (ARCU CDEINR E/S to F/N.) 10. HAVE YOU ARC BROKEN ANOTHER? _______ (ARCU CDEINR E/S to F/N.) 11. DO YOU HAVE A PROBLEM? _______ (Get what and E/S to F/N.) 12. HAVE YOU MADE ANY PROBLEMS FOR ANOTHER? _______ (E/S to F/N.) HCOB 2.6.78RA - 3 - Re-rev. 31.3.82 13. DO YOU HAVE ANY WITHHOLDS? _______ (Handle each E/S to F/N.) 14. HAVE YOU WITHHELD THAT OTHERS HAVE WITHHOLDS? _______ (Handle as W/H. E/S to F/N.) 15. HAVE YOU BEEN CRITICAL OF ANOTHER? _______ (Get prior overt. E/S to F/N.) 16. HAVE YOU COMMITTED ANY OVERTS? _______ (Handle each E/S to F/N.) 17. HAVE YOU BEEN UPSET BECAUSE SOMEONE SEEMED MAD AT YOU? _______ (ARCU CDEINR E/S to F/N.) 18. DID YOU STILL HAVE A PROBLEM WHEN YOU LEFT CRAMMING? _______ (E/S to F/N.) 19. WAS CRAMMING A PROBLEM TO YOU? _______ (E/S to F/N.) 20. DID YOU FEEL WORSE AFTER BEING CRAMMED? _______ (Ind E/S to F/N.) 21. HAVE YOU BEEN TOLD ANYTHING F/N'D WHEN YOU FELT IT HADN'T? _______ (Find out what and ind. E/S. Handle what hadn't really F/N'd.) 22. HAVE YOU FELT SOMETHING SHOULD HAVE F/N'D WHEN THE CRAMMING OFFICER/AUDITOR DIDN'T INDICATE IT HAD? _______ (Indicate. 2WC E/S to F/N. Rehab any O/Rs.) 28. HAVE YOU HAD MISUNDERSTOODS THAT YOU STILL MISUNDERSTOOD AT THE END OF CRAMMING? _______ (Handle it as a missed withhold, to F/N or earlier similar missed withhold of going past a misunderstood, to F/N. Then clear each MU found, to F/N.) 24. HAVE MISUNDERSTOODS BEEN MISSED? _______ (Get them and handle per Word Clearing Tech.) 28. HAVE WITHHOLDS BEEN MISSED? _______ (Handle each E/S to F/N.) 26. HAS THE WRONG MATERIAL BEEN GIVEN YOU TO CLEAR UP A MISUNDERSTOOD? _______ (Find out what. Ind E/S to W/N. Clear up any MUs.) 27. HAS NO MATERIAL BEEN GIVEN YOU TO CLEAR UP A MISUNDERSTOOD? _______ (Find out what. Ind E/S to F/N. Clear up any MUs.) 28. DO YOU HAVE MISUNDERSTOODS NOW? _______ (Find out what. Handle per Word Clearing Tech.) 29. DO YOU HAVE MISUNDERSTOODS THAT YOU HAVEN'T CLEARED UP? _______ (Handle the missed withhold of going past MUs, do F/N or E/S to F/N. Then clear each MU uncovered, do F/N.) HCOB 2.6.78RA - 4 - Rev. 31.3.82 30. HAVE YOU GONE PAST MISUNDERSTOODS? _______ (Handle as above.) 31. WERE YOU MADE TO LOOK UP WORDS YOU ALREADY UNDERSTOOD? _______ (Indicate E/S to F/N.) 32. COULDN'T YOU UNDERSTAND THE CRAMMING ORDER? _______ (2WC E/S to F/N.) 33. WAS A CRAMMING ORDER INVALIDATIVE? _______ (2WC E/S to F/N.) 34. WAS A CRAMMING ORDER EVALUATIVE? _______ (2WC E/S to F/N.) 35. HAVE YOU BEEN TOLD YOU SHOULDN'T HAVE BEEN SENT TO CRAMMING? _______ (Find out who and what. E/S to F/N.) 36. HAS THE CRAMMING OFFICER BEEN CRITICAL OF ANOTHER? _______ (Get who and what E/S to F/N. Then check for "Have you been similarly critical?" Get MWH.) 37. HAVE YOU FELT PTS TO YOUR AREA? _______ (2WC E/S to F/N. Return folder to C/S for any needed further handling or programming.) 38. IN CRAMMING HAS ANYBODY INVALIDATED YOU? _______ (Find out who and what. Ind E/S to F/N.) 39. IN CRAMMING HAS ANYBODY EVALUATED FOR YOU? _______ (Find out who and what. Ind E/S to F/N.) 40. HAS FALSE DATA STRIPPING BEEN MESSED UP? _______ (Find out what's been missed up and indicate the BPC going E/S as needed to F/N. Then handle by stripping off the False Data or Rehabbing the overrun or indicating cleaned cleans, etc. depending on what comes up.) 41. DID SOMEONE FAIL TO CLEAN UP FALSE DATA? _______ (2WC E/S to F/N. Then program to clean up False Data as necessary on the subjects mentioned.) 42. HAS A PRODUCT DEBUG BEEN MESSED UP? _______ (Handle with a Product Debug Repair List.) 43. WAS CRASHING MU FINDING MESSED UP? _______ (Handle with a CRMU Repair List.) 44. HAVE YOU GOOFED AND NOT TOLD ANYBODY? _______ (Find out what. Handle as a MWH. E/S to F/N.) 45. HAVE YOU GONE PAST A MISUNDERSTOOD WORD OR ABBREVIATION IN YOUR WORK? _______ (Handle the missed withhold of going past MUs, to F/N or E/S to F/N. Then clear each MU uncovered, to F/N.) 46. IS THERE SOME OTHER REASON FOR TROUBLE IN YOUR AREA? _______ (2WC E/S to F/N.) 47. ARE YOU HAVING GENERAL CASE TROUBLE? _______ (Find out what to F/N, C/S 53 if necessary.) HCOB 2.6.78RA - 5 - Rev. 31.3.82 48. DID THE CRAM INTERRUPT YOUR USUAL AUDITING? _______ (Ind E/S to F/N.) 49. WERE SEVERAL CORRECTIVE ACTIONS BEING DONE ON YOU AT ONCE? _______ (2WC E/S to F/N. Send folder to C/S for sort out and program to complete each needed action in correct sequence.) 50. DID THE CRAMMING OFFICER RUSH YOU? _______ (2WC E/S to F/N.) 51. WAS A CRAM QUICKIED? _______ (2WC E/S to F/N. Send to clamming to complete any incomplete cram after this list is handled.) 52. DID THE CRAMMING OFFICER FAIL TO DRILL YOU? _______ (2WC E/S to F/N. Send to cramming for any needed drilling after this list is handled.) 53. WAS THERE NOTHING WRONG IN THE FIRST PLACE? _______ (Ind E/S to F/N.) 54. WAS THE CRAM DONE OVER SOME OTHER BY-PASSED CHARGE? _______ (Find out what and handle.) 55. WAS THIS ASSESSMENT UNNECESSARY? _______ (Ind E/S to F/N.) 56. WAS THERE SOMETHING ELSE WRONG? _______ (Find out what and handle. GF if no joy.) L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER As assisted by Special Tech Project Re-revisions assisted by Senior C/S International LRH:DM:STP:bk Copyright $c 1978, 1981, 1982 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER As assisted by Special Tech Project Re-revisions assisted by Senior C/S International   Type = 11 iDate=1/5/78 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=1 rDate=30/8/81 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Cramming Series 17R TECH QUALITY   Remimeo Cramming Off C/Ses  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 1 MAY 1978R Remimeo REVISED 30 AUGUST 1981 Cramming Off (Taken from LRH ED 140 INT) C/Ses (Revised to delete the mandatory 2 hours of TRs and metering, which was part of every cram.) (Revisions in Script) (Ellipsis Indicates Deletion) Cramming Series 17R TECH QUALITY Ref: HCOB 23 Sep 79 CANCELLATION OF DESTRUCTIVE BTBs AND BPLs ON TRs HCOB 18 Apr 80 TR CRITICISM My current concern is tech quality over the world. Whereas the majority of auditors do a good job, there are some who don't, and it is these who have our reputation at stake. The general outness has beef traced (as usual) to out-TRs and metering. Lack of a Cramming in Qual Divs and even lack of Qual Divs is what has brought this about. TRs and metering are out of the view of a C/S. He only sees what is written on the auditor report. A Cramming should exist in every org and every bog should cause the auditor to be sent to Cramming on the material missed. As TRs and metering are not visible to the C/S, it is usual to check an auditor's TRs and metering in Cramming whenever these are suspected and handle any outnesses. Auditors who receive frequent crams must tape a session or do a video. A TR 1 that can't be heard (or blows the pc's head off), a TR 2 that consists of "That didn't read. That read" and TR 4 that is pure Q and A, plus missed reads and by-passed F/Ns can wreck any program. A Cramming in every org and ... verification of TRs and metering will go a long ways to improve tech quality. L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER Revisions assisted by Research and Technical Compilations Unit Accepted by the BDCSC:LRH:RTC:nc:bk BOARD OF DIRECTORS Copyright $c 1971, 1978, 1981 of the by L. Ron Hubbard CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY ALL RIGHTS RESERVED of CALIFORNIA  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER Revisions assisted by Research and Technical Compilations Unit Accepted by the BOARD OF DIRECTORS of the CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY of CALIFORNIA   Type = 11 iDate=6/2/78 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=3 rDate=21/4/83 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN REPLACES THE SWEAT PROGRAM  Type = 11 iDate=6/2/78 Issue=0 Rev=1 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=1 aDate=16/3/78 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0 Type = 11 iDate=30/4/78 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 6 FEBRUARY 1978RB Remimeo REVISED 16 MARCH 1978 RE-REVISED 4 DECEMBER 1979 RE-REVISED 21 APRIL 1983 (Cancels: HCOB 6 Feb 78R-1 Addition of 16 Mar 78, "LSD and the Sweat Program -- Addition"; HCOB 30 Apr 78, "The Sweat program Further Data". Re-revises and re-titles the original bulletin of this date, "LSD and the Sweat Program".) (Re-revised to further clarify the purpose of the Purification Rundown and to include and emphasize that before any person is permitted onto the Program written medical approval for the person to do the Program must be obtained from a licensed medical practitioner.) (Revisions in Script) THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN REPLACES THE SWEAT PROGRAM Refs: HCOB 5 Nov 74 DRUGS, MORE ABOUT HCOB 31 May 77 LSD HCOB 25 Oct 71 DRUG DRYING OUT HCOB 2 Jun 71 Study Series 2 Issue I CONFRONTING (This issue has been revised to incorporate data from recent research into the progress of cases in view of the current environmental and drug scene, and to give the full steps of the new purification Rundown.) (The Purification Rundown does not supplant technology developed and in use especially in Narconon for persons currently on drugs and apt to experience withdrawal symptoms when taken off of them. The Rundown would be begun only after such technology was applied.) (While it is being published now as a holding action until the Purification Rundown is issued as an individual package, this issue does contain the Rundown as it has been piloted.) (We are not concerned with handling bodies with the Purification Rundown. Our concern is freeing the individual up spiritually. The only dosages recommended are those classified as food. There are no medical recommendations or claims for it. The only claim is future spiritual improvement.) (This data is released as a record of researches and results noted. It cannot be construed as a recommendation of medical treatment or medication and it is undertaken or delivered by anyone on his own responsibility. I receive no percentage of fees for administering this rundown and my development of it is a contribution and gift to my friends.) Glossary: Any words you find in this HCOB which you do not understand can be found in a normal dictionary or in the Dianetics and Scientology Technical Dictionary or are explained in the following text. The plant has hit a barrier that prevents widespread clearing -- drugs and biochemical substances. These can put beings in a condition that can prevent case gain. HCOB 6.2.78RB - 2 - Re-rev. 4.12.79 Re-rev. 21.4.83 That's the situation today. What would you give for a rundown that undercut every case on the planet and could be administered by technicians who did not require long periods of training? Sweeping breakthroughs have been made recently through my 29 year study of the progress of cases against the environmental factors and biochemical aspect of our current society. One immediate result of this is the Purification Rundown. The purification program is a program to purify and clean out of one's system the restimulative drug or chemical residues which could act to prevent case gain from Dianetics or Scientology processing. Based on the original Sweat Out program, it is a new much more thorough and much faster version of that program, streamlined by the introduction of the sauna bath for sweating, and with a much broader use. It should be clearly understood at the outset that the Purification Rundown is not a substitute for any kind of processing. Rather, because of the biochemical problem that besets society today, it is the undercut that has become necessary to prepare the majority of pcs for making optimum case gain from their processing. In point of fact, the Purification Rundown is for anyone. BIOCHEMICAL FACTORS By "biochemical" is meant: The interaction of life forms and chemical substances. BIO means life; of living things. From the Greek "BIOS", life or way of life. CHEMICAL: of or having to do with chemicals. "Chemicals" are substances, simple or complex, which are the building blocks of matter. We live in a chemical oriented society. One would be hard put to find someone in the present-day civilization who is not affected by this fact. The vast majority of the public is subjected every day to the intake of food preservatives and other chemical poisons including atmospheric poisons, pesticides and the like. Added to this are the pain pills, tranquilizers and other medical drugs used and prescribed by doctors. And we have as well the widespread use of marijuana, LSD, Angel Dust and other street drugs which contribute heavily to the scene. I have even found that there is such a thing as the "Drug personality". Drugs can apparently change the attitude of a person from his original personality to one secretly harboring hostilities and hatreds he does not permit to show on the surface. While this possibly is not always the case, it does establish a linkage between drugs and increasing difficulties with crime, production, program execution and the modern breakdown of the social and industrial culture. These factors are all part of the biochemical problem. WHY "PURIFICATION"? We have known since 1968 that it is a mistake to try to do mental and spiritual handling on somebody who has been on drugs. HCOB 6.2.78RB - 3 - Re-rev. 4.12.79 Re-rev. 21.4.83 People who have been on drugs do not make case gain until the drugs are handled. In the early '70s the Drug Rundown was developed and put into broad use and it included the auditing out of drugs, medicines and alcohol. In 1977 I issued HCOB 1 May 77 in which I stated that LSD apparently stays in the system, lodging in the tissues and mainly the fatty tissues of the body and is liable to go into action again, giving the person unpredictable "trips". The "restimulation" experienced by people who had been on LSD appeared to act as if they had just taken more LSD. As it has been stated that it only takes 1/millionth of an ounce of LSD to produce a drugged condition and because it is basically wheat rust which simply cuts off circulation, my original thinking on this over the years was that LSD sticks around in the body. That basically is the idea underlying the original Sweat Program. The remedy given was to sweat it out. From the most recent research developments, it now appears that: Not only LSD but other chemical poisons and toxins, preservatives, pesticides, etc., as well as medical drugs and the long list of heavy street drugs (Angel Dust, heroin, marijuana, etc.) can lodge in the tissues and remain in the body for years. Even medicinal drugs such as diet pills, codeine, novocaine and others have gone into "restim" years after they were taken and had supposedly been eliminated from the body. Thus it seems that any or all of these hostile biochemical substances can get caught up in the tissues and their accumulation probably disarranges the biochemistry and fluid balance of the body. These substances must be eliminated if the person is to get the most possible gains from mental and spiritual processing. The operating rule is that mental actions and even biophysical processes (Objectives, etc.) do not work in the presence of drugs. Drug residues can stop any mental help. They also stop a person's life! THE ONLY REASON WE ARE HANDLING DRUGS AND DRUG DEPOSITS IN THE BODY IS SO THAT THE INDIVIDUAL CAN THEN GET CASE GAIN APPARENT GAIN OCCURS BY CLEANING UP THE BODY AND CAN BE SEEN AS AN END ALL IN ITSELF. THIS IS NOT THE CASE. DRUGS AND BIOCHEMICAL SUBSTANCES CAN PREVENT CASE GAIN FROM OCCURRING. Only when we have accomplished the biochemical handling can we then go onto the next step, the biophysical handling (the relationship of the being to the body, the environment or universe) and then onto mental and spiritual processing. When you try to move these around and put them out or sequence you get losses. EXAMPLES: Actual tests have demonstrated that a person who has been on heavy drugs requires up to ten times the time to obtain a result which a non-drug person attained in only 6 to 8 hours of processing. Early tests are also showing that the HCOB 6.2.78RB - 4 - Re-rev. 4.12.79 Re-rev. 21.4.83 learning rate of a person who has been on drugs is much lower than a non-drug person. The memory of a person who has been on drugs is such as to remove him from fear of consequences. Rate or case gain is enormously retarded by toxic substances such as drugs. The reason we can make a breakthrough with this is because of the "Theta-MEST theory" covered in the text SCIENCE OF SURVIVAL. Older scientific thought believed all life came from matter, a belief which goes back to the ancient Egyptian priests and remains today the dominant belief of chemists, psychologists and psychiatrists. A life form is a combination of life itself and the physical universe. Certain elements in the physical universe are highly antipathetic to life and when introduced into life forms, inhibit proper functioning and even destroy. The being (thetan) of course has potential pictures of these toxic substances and states and as long as they are in the body, these actual substances can restimulate a being. When they are gone from the body, the constant restimulation can cease. So it is actually a spiritual action that is being done. A Case Supervisor should be aware of the fact that he is wasting his time if he ignores the above. The removal of these life-hostile chemical substances from the body of any person apparently speeds, and in some cases even makes possible, case gain. It is even worth doing for its own sake. The Purification Rundown, therefore, is for anyone. There is probably not a pc today who is outside this requirement. THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN The Rundown is a tightly supervised regimen which includes: Exercise Sauna Sweat Out Nutrition, including vitamins, minerals, etc., as well as oil intake A properly ordered personal schedule. An OCA and IQ Test are given the person before starting the Rundown and upon its completion. With each of these points kept in and the introduction of the Sauna Bath for sweating out, it is a refined and streamlined version of the original Sweat Out and can be completed in a fraction of the time Sweat Outs have taken in the past. properly scheduled, with exercise and sauna sweat out done 5 hours a day the program can be completed by many in two weeks time. Some pcs may require more than that, some less. When The Purification Rundown Is Done: The Purification Rundown could be considered mandatory to any person who has been on LSD or heavy drugs or who has a heavy medical drug history. Such a pc is not likely to get very fast case gain without it. There are many pcs who have had hundreds or hours of auditing, including Drug Rundowns, who have never done a sweat out of any kind. While tremendous gains have been made by such pcs which are not to be invalidated, there is no doubt but what a large HCOB 6.2.78RB - 5 - Re-rev. 4.12.79 Re-rev. 21.4.83 majority of them would benefit by the Purification Rundown and benefit even further from future auditing as a result. Additionally, there are those who have done sweat out programs in the past who have not experienced all the gain from it possible, or who have skimped or are incomplete on sweat outs. In all cases such as those above, it is a matter for C/S adjudication as to whether or not the person would now do the program. One would not interrupt a case that was running smoothly and making excellent gains progressively. One would not interrupt an ongoing auditing action to throw in such a program randomly. On the other hand, where a pc is consistently not making the expected gains from his processing, or is not continuing up the Bridge on his Grades, a C/S might suspect the need for this program and it now becomes a part of the tech of C/Sing to take this into consideration. In the case of a pc who has started and is continuing up the Grades, it would require the correct programming. As the Purification Rundown is always done under C/S supervision, it becomes a matter for the C/S to decide. The Purification Rundown And Auditing: Originally, sweat outs were used to debar people from processing, so they were then permitted to be done during processing, which was not the most optimum solution. Today, as the Purification Rundown via sauna can take as little as two weeks, it is not done concurrently with auditing. The program is done by itself, intensively, to completion under the daily supervision of the C/S. WARNING This program can be strenuous and should not be undertaken by anyone who has a weak heart or who is anemic. It is therefore absolutely essential that the following rules are strictly adhered to: 1. Any person, before being put on the purification Rundown, must first have written medical okay to do the program from an informed licensed medical practitioner. The C/S, the Medical Liaison Officer (MLO) and the Purification Program I/C must ensure this prerequisite is kept in. 2. The MLO must ensure that no one who has a weak heart or who is anemic is allowed onto the program. These points must be checked by a reliable licensed medical doctor before the person starts the program. People wishing to do the Purification RD who have a known heart condition or high blood pressure or who are anemic, and even those with certain kidney conditions must do a program which is of a much lower gradient. An exercise program and nutrition can be worked out for them with a Medical Doctor. 3. Blood pressure checks and tests for anemia are given periodically as the person goes through the program and if any signs of a weak heart or anemia should appear, the person is taken off the Rundown and handled medically. HCOB 6.2.78RB - 6 - Re-rev. 4.12.79 Re-rev. 21.4.83 EXERCISE AND SAUNA In order to flush the poisons and chemical substances out of the body, the following actions are done. 1. OUTSIDE RUNNING. The first action is outside running. The purpose of this is NOT to generate sweat but to get the blood circulating and the system functioning so that impurities held in the system can be released and are pumped out. Running increases the circulation throughout the whole body, thus: (a) it carries out cell waste more rapidly and (b) causes the circulation to go deeper into the muscles and tissues so those areas which have been stagnant can now get rid of the accumulation of biochemical deposits and, in the case of LSD, the "residual crystals" which have been stored. Running is done on a daily basis once the person has been assigned to this program. It is done in a rubberized or vinyl-type sweat suit. The running should be done on a gradient. If you are so breathless that you can't talk to another while you are running, then you are straining too much, so cut the gradient. 2. SWEATING IN THE SAUNA. The second action, following the running, is sweating. A person goes into the sauna to sweat. The impurities can now be dispelled from the body and leave the system through the pores. A sweat suit is NEVER worn in the sauna as this acts as insulation much the same as when a diver wears a wet suit to insulate against the cold of the sea. Wearing a sweat suit in the sauna would insulate against the heat and so inhibit and curtail sweating. Thus far, the use of a dry sauna has proved to be the most successful in inducing profuse sweating on most people. It is possible that some people may sweat more in a wet sauna; it may be that it is an individual matter and it has not yet been fully tested. There is no regulation on the Rundown that outlaws the use of a wet sauna. Whichever type of sauna is employed, the whole idea is to use the system which permits the person to sweat the most. Sweating in the sauna is done at temperatures ranging anywhere from 140 degrees to 180 degrees. It is a matter of what temperature the person can take. Usually, but not always, a person beginning the Rundown will start at a lower temperature and work up. Then as he progresses he will find he can take increasing degrees of heat. On the Purification Rundown, five hours a day are spent on a combination of running and sweating. There are no arbitraries set as to exact time limits for each, but the bulk of the period would probably be best spent in the sauna after the person had Rotten his circulation up with running. One would not stint on the running, however, as the most benefit is obtained from the sweating when the circulation has been worked up so that the impurities are ready to be flushed out. Running and sauna sweat out should be done with another person, as restimulation of past drugs, medicines, even anesthetics, etc., can and often does occur, as the toxins get sweated out. This can include the restimulation of a full-blown "trip" from LSD or other drugs one may have taken. It is a safeguard, therefore, to be accompanied by a partner or twin. HCOB 6.2.78RB - 7 - Re-rev. 4.12.79 Re-rev. 21.4.83 Salt and Potassium: Salt (sodium chloride) is not mandatory for every individual on the program. It is only necessary as a treatment it the symptoms of salt depletion (heat exhaustion) occur. These are clammy skin, tiredness, weakness, headache, sometimes cramps, nausea, dizziness, sometimes vomiting or fainting. As potassium is lost in sweating, some of the above symptoms can be from potassium depletion. So, if salt does not handle the above symptoms, then one would switch to either potassium gluconate tablets or "salt substitute" which is mainly potassium. Salt and potassium must be available to anyone who is on the Purification Rundown. Ideally, they would be located very near the sauna, clearly labeled. Liquids: While on this program, it is important that one drink plenty of water which greatly assists in flushing and cleansing the system out. Additionally, with all the sweating done in the sauna it would be dangerous not to replenish body fluids. PERSONAL SCHEDULE It is important that a person on the Purification Rundown maintains a properly-ordered personal schedule. This means that once one has started on the program he must stick to it sensibly and not skip days or do it in a random fashion. It also means that one should get enough sleep. If one proceeds through the program in an orderly fashion it will be faster and more effective. NUTRITION When we speak of nutrition we are not talking about food, as such. We are talking about vitamins and minerals as well, as these are vital to proper nutrition and vital to the effectiveness of this Rundown. We are not, however, talking about "diet" in the over-used sense of the word. Diet and Food Fads There are NO diets required on this Rundown. The person simply eats what he normally eats and he should make sure he gets some vegetables and that the vegetables aren't cooked to death. Vegetables contain a lot of minerals and fiber as well as some vitamins necessary to his recovery. We are not food faddists. However, there is plenty of food faddism going on in society and you can easily start such a fad, so this must be watched on the Purification Rundown. If we don't watch it on all this we'll have people eating banana fronds split into diamonds and star shapes and blessed by some Deity or other. Or a fad of "three lettuce leaves criss-crossed with two slabs of peanut butter an absolute must 18 times a day" as the only food a person can have. Food is subject to becoming very faddist and frankly people know very little about it. I wrote an essay on this subject (HCOB 25 Mar 75 DIET, THEORY OF A NATURAL DIET) to the effect that nobody has ever isolated the proper diet for Homo Sapiens. It gives the formula of HCOB 6.2.78RB - 8 - Re-rev. 4.12.79 Re-rev. 21.4.83 how one would go about finding the exact and proper diet. It tells you that all this diet faddism is based on no data. So, there is no thought here of putting the person on any kind of special diet at all. There are no restrictions on what one may eat. We are not even trying to preach against toxic foods or campaign against diet abuses or junk foods or anything of that sort. We are only trying to handle the accumulation of impurities built up in the body. If you wanted to defend your body against ill future impurities then that is another program and not part of this one. What is part of this scene is that a person will need certain nutrition in the form of vitamin intake and minerals. One follows his normal eating habits. There are, however, some additions tn the normal eating habits which consist of taking a quantity of "All Blend" oil each day, secondly, drinking lots of water to help flush out the system and thirdly, ensuring that the vitamin and mineral intake is adequate. To put a person on a diet different than that to which he is accustomed is to introduce a sudden change in the midst of these other changes. A change of diet might be just one too many changes and is an additive to this Rundown. Oil There is an oil called "All Blend" which has the four essential oils in it (soy, walnut, peanut and safflower oil) which is available in the US in health food stores. If this type of oil is not obtainable elsewhere, one could blend it from these four nils in the proper amounts, or find an adequate substitute. "All Blend" oil would be best but any oil used must be cold-pressed and polyunsaturated. The oil must be kept refrigerated so that it does not go rancid. Toxic substances tend to lock up mainly, but not exclusively, in the fat tissue of the body. (There is no such thing as a fat cell.) The theory, then, is that one could replace the fat tissues that hold these accumulations. The body will actually tend to hold onto something it is short of. Thus, if you try to get rid of something it is short of, it won't give it up. So, in the matter of oil, if the person takes some oil the body might possibly exchange the good oil for the bad fat in the body. That is the basic theory. It is a theory of exchange. It is based on the Have-Waste formulas and processes which were extant in Scientology in the late '50s. That whole body of data applies to this oil's scene. (Ref: PAB No. 123 THE REALITY SCALE 1 Nov 57 Vol III, pg 136 HCOB 29 May 58 Special Bulletin STANDARD CLEAR PROCEDURE AND AN EXPERIMENTAL ROAD: CLEARING BY VALENCES, Vol III, pg 273 SCIENTOLOGY 8-8008, page 117 ASSOCIATE NEWSLETTER NO. 2, 1953, ca. early May, Vol 1, page 330 ASSOCIATE NEWSLETTER NO. 7, 1953, ca. late July, Vol 1, page 412) If one wants somebody to clean up the fat tissue in the body, he had better give the body some fat in order to make up for the fat tissues the body is now releasing or changing. The effort is to get the body to take good oil or fat in exchange for the HCOB 6.2.78RB - 9 - Re-rev. 4.12.79 Re-rev. 21.4.83 had fat it is holding onto. In this way we have some chance of getting the body to release fatty tissue which is impregnated with toxic substances. How Much Oil? The exact quantity of oil needed by the person on the Rundown has not been definitely established, but it is very likely somewhere between two tablespoonsful and a half a cup. One tablespoonful of oil is not going to accomplish much. Too little oil won't let the body substitute the fat tissue. If too much is given it can cause diarrhea. One way to test for the right amount of oil for the person would be to put him on a scale and keep a close check on his weight. This should be done routinely in any event when a person is on the Purification Rundown. If the fat is being replaced in the body despite the intake of oil then the weight will not go up. If the body is simply assimilating the oil, with no exchange in fat tissue, the weight will go up. Change in weight would tend to indicate whether or not the body was exchanging old fat tissue for new fat tissue or simply adding new fat tissue. All people, be they fat or thin, have some fatty tissue. Some of course have more fat stored in their bodies than others. On this program we simply want to get rid of the fat that contains the toxic substances, we are not even trying to make people lose weight. (Worth mentioning here is also the fact, particularly in regard to thin people, that while toxic substances lock up mainly in fat tissue it does not mean that the person cannot have drug deposits inside cells.) One could not expect the results that can be achieved on the Purification Rundown without sufficient oil intake. Nutritional Deficiencies Having been an early discoverer and instigator of vitamin therapy over the past 29 years, I know whereof I speak on the subject of nutritional deficiencies. My work covering vitamins and deficiencies, stimulants and depressants and the field of biochemistry goes back to the spring of 1950. Though I have been interested in vitamins primarily only as they might aid, speed or assist auditing, my research along this line has been extensive. This is not to devalue the work and contributions of others in the nutritional fields. It takes a mere skimming of the surface of this subject, however, to recognize that the Purification Rundown will not be effective in the face of a vitamin or mineral deficiency in the person. One of the things that toxins and drugs do is create nutritional deficiencies in the body in the form of vitamin and mineral deficiencies. Obviously a C deficiency, a B Complex deficiency and a Niacin deficiency are brought about by drugs. There may be other deficiencies that we are not aware of at this time. But that list is certain. Also, alcohol, for example, depends for its effects on a person being able to burn up B1. When it burns up all the B1 in the system the person goes into DTs (delirium tremens) and nightmares. In the case of other toxic substances the probability exists that other vitamins besides B1 are burned up. What we seem to have hit on here is that the LSD and street drugs burn up not HCOB 6.2.78RB - 10 - Re-rev. 4.12.79 Re-rev. 21.4.83 only B1 and B Complex (which we assume they do) but also create a deficiency in Niacin in the body and that they possibly depend on Niacin (one of the B Complex vitamins) for their effect. It is easily seen that there is a wide range of toxic substances which create nutritional deficiencies. It is quite vital that any vitamin or mineral deficiency is being handled while the person is on this Rundown. In the piloting and development of the Purification Rundown, the most effective handling for this was found to be starting the person on the following: Vitamin A -- approximately 5000 IU per day. Vitamin B Complex -- approximately 2 caps per day. Ensure the Vitamin B2 and B6 are balanced (approximately the same amount of each). Vitamin B1 -- special additional amounts of B1 are required, 250 - 500 mg or greater daily, depending on the amount of Niacin given. Vitamin C -- 250 - 1000 mg daily, depending upon the person's tolerance. (As Vitamin C can cause stomach problems or diarrhea, each person's tolerance must be worked out.) Vitamin C has to be increased in proportion to the Niacin given. Records exist wherein Vitamin C has become so deficient in a drug user that he used up tens of thousands of milligrams per day before he began to eliminate any. Vitamin C deficiencies result in scurvy. "Live C" from raw onions or raw potatoes is sometimes necessary in addition to synthetic C and were the traditional remedies for scurvy. Vitamin D -- approximately 400 IU daily. Vitamin E -- approximately 800 IU daily. Niacin -- 100 mg daily to begin. It is then increased gradiently to as high as 5000 mg. Particularly B1 and C have to keep pace with it as it is increased in dosage. Cal-Mag -- one glass daily, at least. Multi-Minerals -- (a balanced combination of minerals). These would then be increased proportionately according to need and/or Niacin increase as the person progressed on the Rundown. A person may have certain vitamin deficiencies which are not handled by the above. When he routes onto the Purification Rundown he should be sent to a Medical Doctor who would determine what, if any, additional vitamin deficiencies he might have. Any such not covered in the above list would then be handled with specific supplements for those deficiencies. Vitamins would be taken after meals or with yoghurt. If taken on an empty stomach they could cause stomach burn. HCOB 6.2.78RB - 11 - Re-rev. 4.12.79 Re-rev. 12.4.83 NIACIN Niacin, as one of the B Complex vitamins, is essential to nutrition. It is so vital to the effectiveness of the Purification Rundown that it requires some extensive mention here. It can produce some startling and in the end very beneficial results when taken properly on the Rundown, along with the other necessary vitamins and minerals in sufficient and proportionate quantities and along with proper running and sweat out. Its effects can be quite dramatic so one should understand what Niacin is and does and have a good R-factor on it when starting the Rundown. Taken in sufficient quantities it appears to break up and unleash LSD, marijuana and other drugs and poisons from the tissues and cells. It can rapidly release LSD crystals into the system and send a person who has taken LSD on a trip. (One fellow who had done the earlier sweat out for a period of months and who believed he had no more LSD in his system took 100 mg of Niacin and promptly turned on a restimulation of a full blown LSD trip!) Running and sweating must be done in conjunction with taking Niacin to ensure the toxic substances it releases actually do get flushed out of the body. Niacin: Background History Niacin's biochemical reaction is my own private, personal discovery. In the middle of the 1950s, I was doing work on radiation and I worked out that it must be Niacin that operated on radiation. I was recently told by a doctor that the Dianazene formula of that time is remarkably workable today. Niacin runs out radiation. It will often cause a very hot flush and prickly, itchy skin which can last up to an hour or longer. It may also bring on chills or make a person feel tired. The outpoint in medical thinking has been that they thought the Niacin itself turned on a flush. So they invented something called Niacinamide to keep from turning on this flush. Niacin all by its lonesome does not turn on any flush. What it starts to do is immediately run out sunburn or radiation. So the Niacinamide they invented is worthless and it should be mentioned that it is. In 1973 someone got a Nobel Prize for curing insanity with Niacin, but it was fairly marked that he didn't know the facts of what was actually happening because it was then promptly abandoned as people found that prolonged quantities of Niacin "gave very bad side effects". The truth of the matter is that if one continues Niacin, always along with the other necessary vitamins in proper amounts, the bad effects will vanish. In other words, the work I did on this was picked up and misapplied and then abandoned. This is the background history of Niacin. Now more recently doctors in megavitamin research have been administering Niacin to get people through withdrawal symptoms or get them over bad drug kicks and they have been using enormous doses of, for example, 5000 mg. I have no personal knowledge that such enormous doses are necessary for handling drugs. It is very possible that, given the combination of all the points on the Purification Rundown, many people would be able to handle drugs with lesser amounts of Niacin, something under 5000 mgs. HCOB 6.2.78RB - 12 - Re-rev. 4.12.79 Re-rev. 21.4.83 Niacin Theory In theory, Niacin apparently does not do anything by itself. It is simply interacting with Niacin deficiencies which already exist in the cellular structure. It doesn't turn on allergies; it runs out allergies. Evidently anything that Niacin does is the result of running out and running through past deficiencies. CAUTION: The manifestations Niacin produces can be quite horrifying. Some of the somatics and manifestations the person may turn on are not just somatics in lots of cases, in my experience. I have seen a full blown case of skin cancer turn on and run out. So, a person can turn on skin cancer with this and if that should happen if Niacin is continued the skin cancer has run out completely. Other things that may turn on are hives, flu symptoms, gastroenteritis (inflammation of the mucous membrane of the stomach and intestine), aching bones, upset stomach or a fearful or terrified condition. There seems to be no limit to the variety of phenomena that may occur with Niacin. If it is there to turn on by Niacin it apparently will do so with Niacin. The two vital and proven facts here are: 1. When the Niacin was carried on until these things discharged they did run out, as they will do. (Sometimes people chicken out on it and don't finish the course and it leaves them hung up. This should not be allowed to happen.) IT IS A MATTER OF RECORD THAT WHAT TURNS IT ON WILL TURN IT OFF WHERE NIACIN IS CONCERNED. 2. When the Niacin dosage was increased and the whole lot of the rest of the vitamins being taken was also increased proportionately, the Niacin itself, taken in large amounts, did not create a vitamin deficiency. Increasing Niacin and Other Vitamin Quantities Most persons who have done the Purification Rundown started Niacin at 100 mgs a day (some took lesser amounts, depending upon tolerance) and increased the dosage as they progressed. The best results were obtained when Niacin was taken all at one time, not split up during the day. Taken with water on an empty stomach it can be very upsetting. It is found to be best taken after a meal or with yoghurt or milk. To increase the dosage, a specific quantity of Niacin was administered each day until the effect that dosage produced diminished. One would then, next day, up the dosage on a gradient, say in amounts of 100 mg. In this way you get an overlap of the old dosage becoming useless and the new dosage being needed. This tended to speed up the action considerably when continued each time the effect of the dosage diminished. The other vitamins would have to be increased proportionately tn Niacin at the same time the Niacin is increased as they are interacting in the deficiencies and more are needed. It was found essential that C, B1 and other B vitamins need to be given in ratio to the Niacin being fed. In other words, as you up the Niacin you would up the B1 and the B Complex. And also is the Niacin is upped, the Vitamin C would be upped. These things would have to be kept in ratio. HCOB 6.2.78RB - 13 - Re-rev. 4.12.79 Re-rev. 21.4.83 The theory here is that one, by overdosing one vitamin, can create a deficiency artificially of another vitamin. This is a principle I hit upon as early as 1950 and proved it. You can actually create a deficiency in C by administering B and Calcium. All you have to do is pump those things to the guy in very very heavy dosages and he will develop the deficiency characteristics of C. His teeth begin to hurt. Then when you give him C the manifestations go away. In other words, an overdose of X and Y can apparently create a deficiency in vitamin Z. The reason for all this is that a vitamin is making certain changes in the body and these changes to occur fully also require the additional vitamin. But that additional vitamin isn't there. So it gives the manifestation of being in deficiency. All of this is my own private theory; it isn't anywhere else and it hasn't been subjected to tremendous and intensive research. But I sure can turn on a Vitamin C deficiency in anybody by overadministering B and Calcium. In other words, vitamin rations would have to be in preportion to one another. MINERALS Between 1945 and 1973 I studied the endocrine system. In 1973 it seemed that minerals and trace minerals operating in the blood stream and circulated by other body fluids were a key to glandular interactions. The theory is: Every gland in the body specializes in one or more minerals and actually that is how they make themselves interact one with another. The endocrine system of the body monitors the endocrine system of the body apparently through minerals. As various drugs upset the whole endocrine system of the body you can see that the moment you start administering vitamins and sweat out and things like that you're going to get a mineral demand in the body. Therefore, there would need to be certain mineral dosages right along with the rest of this package. The principle here is that by giving one or two vitamins in excess amount you can create a nutritional deficiency of another vitamin which isn't being given or isn't being given in enough quantity. Thus, what could slow down the Purification Rundown and make it appear unflat would be a nutritional failure -- a failure to flank the Niacin on either side by sufficient amounts of the other needed vitamins and minerals in proportion and a food intake which includes vegetables and oil. In such a case one would be looking at created nutritional deficiencies -- not conditions which were there to begin with to be run out. Not knowing these things is probably what made the medics earlier believe that Niacin had side effects. The side effects were probably somatics and manifestations half run out and deficiencies created by not flanking Niacin with the other vitamins and minerals and oils necessary to cause a rebuild. CAL-MAG Calcium is a must where any healing or exchange process is involved as it is a basic building block. But more important, it is calcium which affects the nervous system. I do not know the total relationship between calcium and toxic substances (and neither does anyone else) but it actually exists. The rationale back of HCOB 6.2.78RB - 14 - Re-rev. 4.12.79 Re-rev. 21.4.83 this is that calcium in deficiency sets a person up for spasms. Nerve spasms occur in the absence of calcium. A person who thinks he is in high tension or something of the sort may simply have a calcium deficiency. Calcium would be administered in company with magnesium. Magnesium itself has been proven necessary to keep the nerves smoothed out. The proven ratio is one half the quantity of magnesium to the quantity of calcium. Something else odd about calcium is that it has to have an acidic base to operate in. If the system is too alkaline the calcium will not release the positive ion which makes it possible for the calcium to operate in the cellular structure and go through the vein walls and the intestinal walls and so forth. In other words, in an alkaline system calcium is ineffective and inactive. So this brings us up to vinegar, which would add the acidic base. With Calcium, Magnesium and vinegar, in their correct quantities, in water exactly per the recipe, we have Cal-Mag. That is what "Cal-Mag" is and what it does. I developed and worked this out in 1973 against the very best biochemical background and references and tests. Calcium and Magnesium can be taken in order to prevent sore muscles. Cal-Mag has been found to have the added benefit of balancing out the Vitamin B1 taken, as Vitamin B1 taken without calcium can cause serious teeth problems due to causing an imbalance of vitamins and minerals. The Cal-Mag formula, as given in HCOB 5 Nov 74 DRUGS, MORE ABOUT is repeated here: 1. Put one level tablespoon of Calcium Gluconate in a normal sized glass. 2. Add 1/2 level teaspoon of Magnesium Carbonate. 3. Add 1 tablespoon of cider vinegar (at least 5% acidity). 4. Stir it well. 5. Add 1/2 glass of boiling water and stir until all the powder is dissolved and the liquid is clear. (If this doesn't occur it could be from poor grade or old Magnesium Carbonate.) 6. Fill the remainder of glass with lukewarm or cold water and cover. It will stay good for 2 days. NOTE: There is a warning about Cal-Mag. Variations from the above can produce an unsuccessful mess that can taste pretty horrible. It can be made incorrectly so that it doesn't dissolve and become the most unpalatable, ghastly stuff anybody ever fed anybody. Possibly made incorrectly it is even unworkable. Made correctly it is a very clear liquid, quite pleasant to take and palatable. So the directions should be followed very explicitly to produce a proper Cal-Mag, pleasant to take and very beneficial. MANIFESTATIONS Various manifestations turn up an the purification program and these can vary widely from person to person. Anything from insect bites to a full blow restimulation of an LSD trip may turn on and these oil simply run themselves not and blow as the program is contained. If there are heavy drugs to be flushed HCOB 6.2.78RB - 15 - Re-rev. 4.12.79 Re-rev. 21.4.83 out it is not uncommon for the person to experience a restim of whatever the effects of the drug or medicine were when he first took it. Old injuries or old somatics may turn on, flare up for a brief spell and vanish. It is important to note that a given manifestation which turns on may turn on and vanish wholly or partly in any given day. Then it may turn on again the following day but less. If one increases the vitamin and mineral dosage at this time, the manifestation will turn on again. But it will be less. These things don't become more and more violent day by day, they become less and less day by day, providing the whole Purification Rundown in continued properly. At length, the vitamins, minerals, etc. an longer turn the manifestation on and it is gone. There is evidence that no amount of vitamins and mineral dosage above a certain final level for the given individual will turn the manifestation on again. The trick is to take a proper gradient with the vitamins and minerals. When you go out gradient they can turn on awfully hard so don't get in a rush. And don't chicken out either. Emotions that have been shut off may start to reappear. the person can blow through stupidity and become more aware. Be may find he can do actions more easily and consequences start to take on a new meaning to him. Memory can return. At first some individuals may feel other determinism about doing this program but that will gradually change and he or she will want to do it on his own determinism and for his or her own welfare. Most individuals embrace it with enthusiasm. As long as the precautions listed earlier are well taken and the procedure followed exactly as given, the solution to any manifestation is to continue the program until the phenomenon blows. The manifestations become less and less frequent until finally they cease altogether. TRIPS If a person is having trips during the program, he should take a lot of extra Vitamin B Complex and Vitamin C in correct ratio to other vitamins as these aid the body, especially the liver in getting rid of the drugs in the system. Normally the vitamins and minerals in the program are sufficient for the body to handle the residual drugs which come out. ADMINISTRATION The advices on the administration of the Purification Rundown are taken from the practical experience of large pilot projects. They should not be lightly disregarded. One may find that people administering the program tend to enter their own fads and hobbies into it, or needing it themselves, avoid delivering it. The Purification Rundown runs best when purely delivered. Any org or person administering it should: A. Get a signed release or quit claim from the person as is usual. B. See that the person understands that the action is being undertaken to help free him as a spirit and is not a medical treatment. C. No medication of a medical nature; vitamins, minerals and oils are food. HCOB 6.2.78RB - 16 - Re-rev. 4.12.79 Re-rev. 21.4.83 D. Brief the person as to what he can expect and why, making no promises. E. Getting his promise to follow orders and complete the Rundown and not blow it because it's uncomfortable or because he is lazy or has other appointments. Testing A battery of tests should be done on the individual and should be dune before and after the Purification Rundown. These would include OCA, IQ, any learning rate tests that may exist and any other tests which would give a before and after picture of the person. These of course, include weight, blood pressure, etc. The purification program must be tightly supervised to be successful. The program is done under the close supervision of the Medical Officer, the purification program In Charge and the Case Supervisor, as well as a Medical Doctor as required. Purification Program In Charge The In Charge will be the D of P (for org public) or the DPE er other appointed person (for org staff). The Program I/C must closely supervise each person's progress on the program and must ensure the program is done faithfully and with all points of the program in. When supervising a large group, the Program I/C is assisted by one or more Deputies and a Purification Program Admin, who maintains the progress board, handles filing in pc folders and transports folders to and from the C/S. The person's daily schedule must be set up so that he is always running or sweating in the sauna with at least one other person. It is important, especially when a group of people are doing the Purification Program at the same time, that musters and roll calls are held by the program I/C or his Deputy. Where individuals are not doing the program in a group, they should twin up and each twin assumes responsibility for the other and sees that he does the program fully. Anyone not keeping to his schedule or the program as written is handled by the program I/C with warnings, cramming, chits, or ethics, as needed. THE PROGRAM I/C IS RESPONSIBLE FOR SEEING THAT EVERYONE PARTICIPATING IN THE PROGRAM GETS THROUGH IT CORRECTLY AND COMPLETELY AND ATTESTS TO IT UPON COMPLETION. Medical Doctor, Medical Liaison Officer Before beginning the purification program, a person must first get written medical okay from a licensed medical practitioner. This is usually handled by the Medical Liaison Officer (MLO) or Medical Officer (MO) in the org in liaison with the Purification Program I/C. The MLO, when sending the person to a Medical Doctor for such okay, must ensure the Medical Doctor is informed about the Program and that the exam would include ensuring the person's blood pressure is normal and that there is no evidence of a weak heart, anemia, kidney condition or other condition which would prevent the person from doing the Program. Forms for such medical approval would be supplied by the organization. In the case of a person who cannot go onto the Program for medical reasons, the MLO should see if a more gradient program can be worked out for the person with a Medical Doctor, and the Case Supervisor must be informed of this. HCOB 6.2.78RB - 17 - Re-rev. 4.12.79 Re-rev. 21.4.83 While on the program, the person reports daily and, once the folder has been C/Sed, it is the Medical Liaison Officer (or the Program I/C) who issues him his vitamins, minerals, niacin and oil. Blood pressure and anemia checks are re-done as needed And it is the MLO's responsibility to see there are done as required. The Medical Liaison Officer also writes up any medical reports on the person that are needed from her hat and ensures that these and any reports from the Medical Doctor are immediately filed in the person's pc folder for the C/S to inspect. Case Supervisor C/S okay to begin the program is required. The C/S then continues to supervise the progress of each person on the program on a daily basis. It must be noted that this is a fully C/Sed action. Daily Reports Each program participant writes a daily report which includes: 1. How long he jogged. 2. How long he sweated in the sauna. 3. Vitamins taken and in what amount. 4. Minerals taken and in what amount. 5. Niacin taken and in what amount. 6. Cal-Mag taken and in what amount. 7. Salt taken and in what amount. 8. Weight (include any gain or loss). 9. Any occurrences, somatics, restimulations. 10. Wins. The Daily Reports are given to the Program I/C or his Deputy or are placed in his basket. They are read by the I/C to ensure the person is doing the program and then filed in his pc folder, which goes in to the C/S. The C/S verifies each person's daily progress (initialling the daily report and any medical reports to show he has inspected them) and writes orders to correct any out-tech found, such as not taking the right vitamins, etc. The folder is returned to the Program I/C who checks the written C/S and executes any C/S orders, such as getting the person back onto the correct vitamins, getting the person to attest, and so on. The program is run in this fashion until it is completed. END PHENOMENA The purpose of this program is very simply to clean out and purify one's system of all the accumulated impurities such as drugs, insecticides and pesticides, food preservatives, etc., etc. which by their presence and restimulative effects could prevent or delay HCOB 6.2.78RB - 18 - Re-rev. 4.12.79 Re-rev. 21.4.83 freeing the being spiritually through processing. For someone who has taken LSD or Angel Dust this would include getting rid of any residual crystals from the body. When this has been accomplished the program is complete. As the person goes through the Purification Program, one should be able to see an improvement in his physical well-being as he rids the system of its accumulated impurities. Obviously if the person is still feeling the effects of past drugs or chemicals going into restimulation, the program cannot be considered complete and must be continued until all these manifestations have turned off completely. The product of this program is a purified body, free from the impurities, drugs, etc., that had accumulated in it. It is up to the C/S to send the person to attest when the above product has been achieved. A continuation of the vitamins, minerals, oil, vegetables and Cal-Mag, at least at the rate of recommended daily requirements in balanced amounts is wise after the Rundown is completed. A sudden cessation of such heavy a vitamin dosage can itself produce a let down. It is possible the person should come off them on a steep gradient rather than abruptly. Particularly, where drug damage to the brain or nerves has occurred, the body needs these things to rebuild itself. If one doesn't do the above there can be a brief apparency of a let down. Remember that the person has probably been leading an unhealthy life without proper nutrition, sleep and exercise so it would be a good idea to recommend moderate daily dietetic and exercise disciplines so he will stay healthy, having nothing to do with therapy. If such a let down occurs the C/S should take the above into account, otherwise he may be puzzled. He will find a certain number skimped the Rundown are unflat but the majority of such simply went back to an exerciseless, five packs of cigs a day, vitamin and mineral deprived life. Such regimen recommendations are up to people who specialize in them. No fads please. The C/S must remember that the person should now be restored to any interrupted program or C/Sed for his next level or, if he is also PTS, should be de-PTSed. For most the next C/S would be Objective processing. The person has not finished his processing with the Purification Rundown. He has just cleared the way to get real case gains. LENGTH OF PROGRAM One should be able to get through the whole program in two weeks at five hours a day. Some will take more and some will take less. If the procedure in this HCOB is exactly followed this will not become a long, drawn-out action. SUMMARY With the Purification Program we now have the means to get rapid recovery from the effects of the accumulation of the environmental chemical poisons as well as the medical drugs and street drugs which inhibit the progress of cases. HCOB 6.2.78RB - 19 - Re-rev. 4.12.79 Re-rev. 21.4.83 By reducing the time required for sweat out and increasing its efficiency, we are able to make the Purification Program a single, easily completed step. With the inclusion of vitamins, minerals and oils we are able to work toward restoring the biochemical balance of the body and make it possible for the body to reconstruct itself from the damage done by drugs and other biochemical substances. We have brought the person up to the level where he is now ready for processing and can truly achieve biophysical and then mental and spiritual gain. From this step alone one will see some sparkling results. The Purification Rundown should be ideally followed by auditing. The type of auditing most beneficial for the next step is "Objective Processing". An enormous body of work exists for this next level, none of which is changed by the Purification Rundown. The Purification Rundown only undercuts it. As the world sinks we get below it to prop it up! Let's give this program a total push and take a major step toward a drug-free society and planet! L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER LRH:gal:iw Copyright $c 1978, 1979, 1983 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER   Type = 11 iDate=26/9/77 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=1 rDate=30/12/79 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Art Series 5 ART AND COMMUNICATION   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 26 SEPTEMBER 1977R Remimeo REVISED 30 DECEMBER 1979 (Only revision is series number.) Art Series 5 ART AND COMMUNICATION When a work of painting, music or other form attains two-way communication, it is truly art. One occasionally hears an artist being criticized on the basis that his work is too "literal" or too "common". But one has rarely if ever heard of any definition of "literal" or "common". And there are many artists simply hung up on this, protesting it. Also, some avant-garde schools go completely over the cliff in avoiding anything "literal" or "common" -- and indeed go completely out of communication! The return flow from the person viewing a work would be contribution. True art always elicits a contribution from those who view or hear or experience it. By contribution is meant "adding to it". An illustration is "literal" in that it tells everything there is to know. Let us say the illustration is a picture of a tiger approaching a chained girl. It does not really matter how well the painting is executed, it remains an illustration and it IS literal. But now let us take a small portion out of the scene and enlarge it. Let us take, say, the head of the tiger with its baleful eye and snarl. Suddenly we no longer have an illustration. It is no longer "literal". And the reason lies in the fact that the viewer can fit this expression into his own concepts, ideas or experience: he can supply the why of the snarl, he can compare the head to someone he knows. In short he can CONTRIBUTE to the head. The skill with which the head is executed determines the degree of response. Because the viewer can contribute to the picture, it is art. In music, the hearer can contribute his own emotion or motion. And even if the music is only a single drum, if it elicits a contribution of emotion or motion, it is truly art. That work which delivers everything and gets little or nothing in return is not art. The "common" or overused melody, the expected shape or form gets little or no contribution from the hearer or viewer. That work which is too unclear or too poorly executed may get no contribution. Incidental to this, one can ask if a photograph can ever be art, a controversy which has been raging for a century or more. One could say that it is only difficult to decide because one has to establish how much the photographer has contributed to the "reality" of "literalness" in front of his camera, how he has interpreted it, but really the point is whether or not that photograph elicits a contribution from its viewer. If it does, it is art. Innovation plays a large role in all works which may become art. But even this can be overdone. Originality can be HCOB 26.9.77R - 2 - Rev. 30.12.79 overdone to the point where it is no longer within any possible understanding by those viewing or hearing it. One can be so original one goes entirely outside the most distant perimeter of agreement with his viewers or listeners. Sometimes this is done, one suspects, when one has not spent the labor necessary to execute the work. Various excuses are assigned such an action, the most faulty of which is "self-satisfaction" of the artist. While it is quite all right to commune with oneself, one cannot also then claim that it is art if it communicates with no one else and no other's communication is possible. The third flow, of people talking to one another about a work can also be considered a communication and where it occurs is a valid contribution as it makes the work known. Destructive attitudes about a work can be considered as a refusal to contribute. Works that are shocking or bizarre to a point of eliciting protest may bring to themselves notoriety thereby and may shake things up; but when the refusal to contribute is too widespread, such works tend to disqualify as art. There is also the matter of divided opinion about a work. Some contribute to it, some refuse to contribute to it. In such cases one must examine who is contributing and who is refusing. One can then say that it is a work of art to those who contribute to it and that it is not to those who refuse to contribute to it. Criticism is some sort of index of degree of contribution. There are, roughly, two types of criticism: one can be called "invalidative criticism", the other "constructive criticism". Invalidative criticism is all too prevalent in the arts for there exist such things as "individual taste", contemporary standards and, unfortunately, even envy or jealousy. Too often, criticism is simply an individual refusal to contribute. One could also state that "those who destructively criticize can't do." "Constructive criticism" is a term which is often used but seldom defined. But is has use. It could probably be best defined as criticism which "indicates a better way to do", at least in the opinion of the critic. Those who simply find fault and never suggest a practical means of doing it better rather forfeit their right to criticize. Art is probably the most uncodified and least organized of all fields. It therefore acquires to itself the most "authorities". Usually nothing is required of an "authority" except to say what is right, wrong, good, bad, acceptable or unacceptable. Too often the sole qualification of the authority (as in poor teaching of some subjects) is a memorized list of objects and their creators and dates with some hazy idea of what the work was. An "authority" could considerably improve his status by using rather precise definitions of his terms. The modern trend of seeking the significance in what the artist meant is of course not likely to advance the arts very much. Viewing and experiencing art on the basis of what one is contributing to it and what others contribute to it is a workable approach. And it would result in improved art and improved appreciation. HCOB 26.9.77R - 3 - Rev. 80.12.79 Such a viewpoint, interestingly, also includes some things into the field of art not previously so viewed. L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER Revision assisted by Maggie Sibersky LRH Comps I/C LRH:MS:pat:dr Copyright $c 1977, 1979 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER Revision assisted by Maggie Sibersky LRH Comps I/C   Type = 11 iDate=30/1/77 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=1 rDate=25/5/80 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  FALSE TA DATA   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 30 JANUARY 1977R Remimeo REVISED 25 MAY 1980 (Revised to add all relevant issues pertaining to false TA.) (Revisions not in Script) FALSE TA DATA There have been several recent revisions of False TA issues. This issue will just clearly list out all the issues and their dates so there is an easy reference for data on false TA handling. References: HCOB 8 Jun 70 LOW TA HANDLING HCOB 16 Aug 70R C/S Series 15R, GETTING THE F/N TO THE EXAMINER HCOB 24 Oct 71RA FALSE TA HCOB 12 Non 71RB FALSE TA ADDITION HCOB 15 Feb 72R FALSE TA ADDITION 2 HCOB 18 Feb 72RA FALSE TA ADDITION 3 HCOB 16 Feb 72 C/S Series 74, TALKING THE TA DOWN MODIFIED HCOB 23 Nov 73RB DRY AND WET HANDS MAKE FALSE TA HCOB 24 Nov 78RD C/S 5SRL SHORT FORM HCOB 24 Nov 78RE C/S 53RL LONG FORM HCOB 19 Apr 78R OUT BASICS AND HOW TO GET THEM IN HCOB 23 Apr 75RA VANISHING CREAM AND FALSE TA HCOB 24 Oct 76RA C/S Series 96RA, DELIVERY REPAIR LISTS HCOB 10 Dec 76RB C/S Series 99RB SCIENTOLOGY F/N AND TA POSITION HCOB 21 Jan 77RB FALSE TA CHECKLIST HCOB 24 Jan 77 TECH CORRECTION ROUND-UP HCOB 26 Jan 77R FOOTPLATES USE FORBIDDEN HCOB 30 Jan 77R FALSE TA DATA HCOB 4 Dec 77 CHECKLIST FOR SETTING UP SESSIONS AND AN E-METER HCOB 13 Jan 77RB HANDLING A FALSE TA OWNER'S MANUAL, HUBBARD PROFESSIONAL MARK VI, HOW TO SET UP YOUR MARK VI E-METER L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER Revision assisted by LRH Technical Compilations Unit LRH:RTCU:bk Copyright $c 1977, 1980 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER Revision assisted by LRH Technical Compilations Unit   Type = 11 iDate=26/1/77 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=1 rDate=25/5/80 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  FOOTPLATES USE FORBIDDEN   Remimeo Tech & Qual All Levels All Auditors All Tech Checksheets  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 26 JANUARY 1977R Remimeo REVISED 25 MAY 1980 Tech & Qual All Levels (Revisions not in Script) All Auditors All Tech This issue is revised to up-date references. Checksheets FOOTPLATES USE FORBIDDEN There have been several recent revisions of False TA issues. This issue will just clearly list out all the issues and their dates so there is an easy reference for data on false TA handling. References: HCOB 8 Jun 70 LOW TA HANDLING HCOB 16 Aug 70R C/S Series 15R, GETTING THE F/N TO THE EXAMINER HCOB 24 Oct 71RA FALSE TA HCOB 12 Nov 71RB FALSE TA ADDITION HCOB 15 Feb 72R FALSE TA ADDITION 2 HCOB 18 Feb 72RA FALSE TA ADDITION 3 HCOB 16 Feb 72 C/S Series 74, TALKING THE TA DOWN MODIFIED HCOB 23 Nov 73RB DRY AND WET HANDS MAKE FALSE TA HCOB 24 Nov 73RD C/S 53RL SHORT FORM HCOB 24 Nov 73RE C/S 53RL LONG FORM HCOB 19 Apr 75R OUT BASICS HOW TO GET THEM IN HCOB 23 Apr 75RA VANISHING CREAM AND FALSE TA HCOB 24 Oct 76RA C/S Series 96RA, DELIVERY REPAIR LISTS HCOB 10 Dec 76RB C/S Series 99RB, SCIENTOLOGY F/N AND TA POSITION HCOB 21 Jan 77RB FALSE TA CHECKLIST HCOB 24 Jan 77 TECH CORRECTION ROUNDUP HCOB 26 Jan 77R FOOTPLATES USE FORBIDDEN HCOB 30 Jan 77R FALSE TA DATA HCOB 4 Dec 77 CHECKLIST FOR SETTING UP SESSIONS AND AN E-METER HCOB 13 Jan 77RB HANDLING A FALSE TA OWNER'S MANUAL, HUBBARD PROFESSIONAL MARK VI, HOW TO SET UP YOUR MARK VI E-METER The use of footplates is forbidden. A recent dispatch to myself from LRH quotes him, "I tested footplates and they don't read! Not on the bank." The above issues cover how to handle a false TA. Use them to resolve TA problems not footplates. L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER Revision assisted by LRH Technical Compilations Unit LRH:RTCU:djm Copyright $c 1977, 1980 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER Revision assisted by LRH Technical Compilations Unit   Type = 11 iDate=22/1/77 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Cramming Series 24 Keeping Scientology Working Series 21 IN-TECH, THE ONLY WAY TO ACHIEVE IT   Remimeo All Course Supervisors All Ds or P All C/Ses All Qual Cramming Terminals  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 22 JANUARY 1977 Remimeo REISSUED 7 DECEMBER 1978 All Course REISSUED 12 APRIL 1983 Supervisors All Ds or P (Reissued as part of the Cramming Series All C/Ses and the Keeping Scientology Working Series.) All Qual Cramming Terminals Cramming Series 24 Keeping Scientology Working Series 21 IN-TECH, THE ONLY WAY TO ACHIEVE IT The dominating factor of tech being in, is whether the Auditor really wants to do a good job and help the pc. It is a matter of professional competence and pride. If the Auditor does not have this there is no amount of rules, reading or supervision that will bring about technical successes. Fortunately the vast majority of Auditors have a high professional conscience and are willing to study, drill and do everything possible to perfect their tech. The Course Supervisor, the D of P, the C/S and Qual Cramming terminals must realize this and must do all possible to fortify it and must abstain from invalidations and accusations and injustices which tend to nullify it. From this springboard of belief in the Auditor and a willingness on the part of those training and handling him, to strengthen the Auditor's determination to be professionally competent, in-Tech will only then blossom in in org. L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER LRH:nt:jk:ks Copyright $c 1977, 1978, 1983 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER   Type = 11 iDate=21/1/77 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=3 rDate=25/5/80 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  FALSE TA CHECKLIST   Remimeo Tech & Qual All Levels All Auditors All Tech Checksheets  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 21 JANUARY 1977RB Remimeo RE-REVISED 25 MAY 1980 Tech & Qual All Levels All Auditors (Re-revisions in script) All Tech Checksheets (This HCOB has been revised to include additional data on False TA and the full list of references on False TA. The layout of the list of handlings has been arranged to follow the line for checking, and reference to any specific brand of hand cream has been taken out.) FALSE TA CHECKLIST Ref: HCOB 8 Jun 70 LOW TA HANDLING HCOB 16 Aug 70R C/S Series 15R. GETTING THE F/N TO THE EXAMINER HCOB 24 Oct 71RA FALSE TA HCOB 12 Nov 71RB FALSE TA ADDITION HCOB 15 Feb 72R FALSE TA ADDITION 2 HCOB 18 Feb 72RA FALSE TA ADDITION 3 HCOB 16 Feb 72 C/S Series 74, TALKING THE TA DOWN MODIFIED HCOB 23 Nov 73RB DRY AND WET HANDS MAKE FALSE TA HCOB 24 Nov 73RD C/S 53RL SHORT FORM HCOB 24 Nov 73RE C/S 53RL LONG FORM HCOB 19 Apr 75R OUT BASICS AND HOW TO GET THEM IN HCOB 23 Apr 75RA VANISHING CREAM AND FALSE TA HCOB 24 Oct 76RA C/S Series 96RA, DELIVERY REPAIR LISTS HCOB 10 Dec 76RB C/S Series 99RB, SCIENTOLOGY F/N AND TA POSITION HCOB 13 Jan 77RB HANDLING A FALSE TA HCOB 24 Jan 77 TECH CORRECTION ROUND-UP HCOB 26 Jan 77R FOOTPLATES USE FORBIDDEN HCOB 30 Jan 77R FALSE TA DATA HCOB 4 Dec 77 CHECKLIST FOR SETTING UP SESSIONS AND AN E-METER HCOB 7 Feb 79R E-METER DRILL 5RA BTB 24 Jan 73R II EXAMINER AND FALSE TA BOOK: E-METER ESSENTIALS BOOK: INTRODUCTION TO THE E-METER OWNER'S MANUAL, HUBBARD PROFESSIONAL MARK VI, HOW TO SET UP YOUR MARK VI E-METER "This Bulletin cancels HCOB 29 February 1972RA Revised 23 April 1975 as it is misleading and has caused some auditors to assess the pc on the meter to find the cause of false TA instead of checking directly with the pc." This Bulletin reinstates the False TA Checklist with specific handlings that are directly from the issues that I wrote on false TA. HCOB 21.1.77RB - 2 - Re-rev. 25.5.80 "The following are the items to be checked by an auditor on any pc. It need only be done once unless the check itself is suspected false, or if conditions of the pc's hands, etc. change. "The checklist is kept in the pc folder and is entered on the Folder Summary as an action done. "The value of operating with correct can size should not be underestimated, the reference HCOBs state why." The auditor signs and answers the following points on the checklist. The auditor must obtain information by checking the pc's hands himself or herself to see if the hands are dry or wet. The cause of false TA is in the physical universe and that is where the check is done. It is not done by asking the pc or checking the questions on the pc for meter reads. So the auditor would feel the hands of the pc to establish if they are dry or wet, would feel the pc's hands with cream on them to see if the cream has dried up, would see if the pc's hands cup so as to form an area that does not touch the cans and so forth. False TA is not think or mental mass. It is in the physical universe and that is where it has to be handled for it to be remedied. The handling follows each line as you check it. This is for simplicity, as that is the way this checklist is done, each line being handled as you go. R-FACTOR TO PC: "I AM GOING TO CHECK THE CANS, YOUR HANDS AND VARIOUS OTHER THINGS TO ADJUST EVERYTHING FOR BEST ACCURACY." FALSE TA CHECKLIST AND HANDLING SHEET 1. IS THE METER FULLY CHARGED? ....................................... _______ Handling: "Keep a meter charged at least one hour for every 10 of auditing for 240 AC volt charging current, or 2 hrs. for every 10 of auditing on a 110 AC volt charging current. (Mark VI will get about 6 hrs. for every 1 hr. charged.) "Before each session snap the knob over to TEST. The needle should hit hard on the right side of the face. It can even bounce. If the needle doesn't snap to the right hard or if it doesn't quite get there on TEST, then that meter will go flat in mid-session and give false TA and no reads or TA on hot subjects." LRH (HCOB 24 Oct 71RA False TA) NOTE: To ensure an accurate check, the meter should be turned on a minute or two before turning to test. 2. IS THE METER TRIMMED CORRECTLY? ................................... _______ Handling: "A meter can be improperly trimmed (not set at 2.0 with the trim knob) and can give a false TA position. When a meter is not left on a minute or two before trimming, it can drift in the session and give a slightly false TA. "The trim can quietly be checked in mid-session by snapping out the jack where the cord goes into the box and putting the TA on 2, seeing if the needle is now on SET. If not, the trim knob can be moved to adjust it. The HCOB 21.1.77RB - 3 - Re-rev. 25.5.80 jack is quietly slipped back in. All without distracting the pc." LRH (HCOB 24 Oct 71RA False TA) 3. ARE THE LEADS CONNECTED TO THE METER AND CANS? .................... _______ Handling: "A properly set up meter with cans (electrodes) fitted to a pc who is holding them properly IS ALWAYS CORRECT." LRH (HCOB 24 Oct 1971RA) Reference for setting up a meter is covered in E-Meter Drills Book, EM 4, and the Mark VI owner's manual if one is using a Mark VI. 4. ARE THE CANS RUSTY? ............................................... _______ Handling: "Corroded cans Can falsify TA. Get new ones now and then." LRH (HCOB 24 Oct 71RA) 5. ARE PC'S HANDS EXCESSIVELY DRY REQUIRING HAND CREAM? .............. _______ Handling: "A quick test is have the pc put the cans under his armpits and you'll see if it's his calloused or chemically dried out hands. The excessively dry hand is seen as shiny or polished looking. It feels very dry. The correct treatment is to use a hand cream, but not a greasy hand cream or vanishing cream. A good hand cream rubs all the way into the hand and leaves no excess grease. Hand cream is usually smeared on, rubbed in and can then be thoroughly wiped off. The hands will usually produce, then, a normal TA and meter response." LRH (HCOB 23 Nov 73RB Re-revised 25 May 1980 Dry and Wet Hands Make False TA) 6. ARE THE PC'S HANDS EXCESSIVELY WET REQUIRING POWDER? .............. _______ Handling: "If the TA is low, check if the pc's hands are wet. If so have him wipe them and get a new read. It is usually found that the 1.6 was really 2.0 ... Have the pc wipe hands. LRH (HCOB 24 Oct 71RA) "Anti-perspirants can be applied to too wet hands. There are many brands of these, often a powder or spray. It can be wiped off after application and should work for two to three hours." LRH (HCOB 28 Apr 75RA) 7. THE PC IS NOT BEING TOLD CONTINUALLY TO WIPE HIS HANDS? ........... _______ Handling: Above per wet hands. 8. THE PC'S GRIP ON THE CANS IS NOT BEING CONTINUALLY CHECKED BY THE AUDITOR IN A WAY THAT INTERRUPTS THE PC? .................................. _______ Handling: "Keep the pc's hands in sight. Check the pc's grip. Get smaller cans." LRH (HCOB 24 Oct 71RA) HCOB 21.1.77RB - 4 - Re-rev. 25.5.80 8A. IS THE PC USING THE WRONG TYPE OF CANS? ........................... _______ a) corrugated _______ b) cellophane bonded to metal _______ c) wrong metal _______ The right metal is tin-plated steel, not cellophane bonded or painted. Handling: Replace with the correct cans. "Cans of course should be steel with a thin tin plating." LRH (HCOB 24 Oct 71RA) 8B. ARE THE CANS TOO SHORT FOR THE PC's HANDS TO COVER? ............... _______ Handling: Replace with cans of correct length so that the whole hand has contact with the can. (Ref. HCOB 24 Oct 71Ra) 9. TA POSITION FOR LARGE CANS? ....................................... _______ Size approx 4 1/2 inches by 3 inches or 11 cm by 8 cm Handling: "For a normal or large handed pc the can size is about 4 7/8ths inches by 2 5/8ths inches or 12 1/2 cm by 7 cm. This can be altered as big as 4 1/2 inches by 8 inches diameter or 11 cm by 8 cm. This is standard." LRH (HCOB 24 Oct 71RA) 10. TA POSITION ON MEDIUM CANS? ....................................... _______ Size approx 4 7/8 inches by 2 5/8 inches or 12 1/2 cm by 7 cm Handling: Covered above. 11. TA POSITION ON SMALL CANS? ........................................ _______ Size approx 3 3/4 inches by 2 1/8 inches or 9 cm by 5 cm Handling: "This can should be 3 3/4 inches by 2 1/8th inches or 9 cm by 5 cm diameter or thereabouts. A small child would be lost even with that can. So a small 35 mm film can could be used. This is 2 inches long by 1 3/16ths diameter or 5 cm by 3 cm. This works but watch it as these cans are aluminum. They do work but test for true read with a slightly larger can and then trim to adjust for the aluminum if any different. "Cans of course should be steel with a thin tin plating. Regular soup cans. Can size to match the pc avoids slack can grip or tiring the hands into going slack, giving the auditor 3.2 F/Ns and trouble." LRH (HCOB 24 Oct 71RA) HCOB 21.1.77RB - 5 - Re-rev. 25.5.80 11A. CAN SIZE FOR A CHILD IS INCORRECT? ............................... _______ Handling: Size can go down to photographic aluminum 35 mm film cans for a child. Size approx 2 inches by 1 3/16 inches or 5 cm by 3 cm. Note down TA position. 11B.IF THE ABOVE MENTIONED CAN SIZES AREN'T CORRECT FOR THE PC'S HANDS OTHER SIZES CAN BE TRIED .......................................... _______ Handling: 1 1/4" tubing or 1 3/4" tubing as well as other can size checked to see which fits the pc's hand. Note TA position. 12. ARE THE CANS TOO LARGE FOR THE PC? ................................ _______ Handling: "Can size to match the pc avoids slack can grip or tiring the hands into going slack." LRH (HCOB 24 Oct 71RA) Check the pc's grip and see if the hand is touching all of the can and if the size is comfortable. (Ref. HCOB 13 Jan 77RB Handling a False TA) 13. ARE THE CANS TOO SMALL FOR THE PC? ................................ _______ Handling: Per above. Check how the pc is holding the cans and if the entire hand is on the cans and if they are comfortable and adjust accordingly per above. 14. ARE THE CANS JUST RIGHT FOR THE PC? ............................... _______ Handling: Check the grip and see if the can size is correct for the pc. Do the cans comfortable fit the pc's hands with the hand touching the cans so it gets an accurate reading on the meter? If the can size is correct then you must ensure that the grip is also correct on the cans. 15. ARE THE CANS COLD? ................................................ _______ Handling: "Regardless of can size, cold E-Meter electrodes tend to give a much higher tone arm reading particularly on some pcs. "Until the cans warm up, the reading is generally false and is false in the direction of high. Some pcs are 'cool blooded' and the shock of ice cold cans can drive the TA up and it takes awhile to drift down. "A practice which gets around this is for the auditor or Examiner to hold the cans briefly until they are warm and then give them to the pc. A variation is for the auditor or Examiner to put the cans under his armpits while setting up. This warms them. There are probably many other ways to warm up cans to body temperature." LRH (HCOB 12 Nov 71RB) 15A.DID THE PC WASH HIS HANDS JUST BEFORE SESSION? .................... _______ Handling: Use a bit of hand cream to bring hands back to normal amount of moisture. HCOB 21.1.77RB - 6 - Re-rev. 25.5.80 16. ARE THE PC'S HANDS DRY OR CALLOUSED? .............................. _______ Handling: Covered above under pc's hands excessively dry requiring hand cream. There are ways to apply the hand cream so that it is correct for that individual pc and does handle the false TA. You can spread it on extensively then wipe it off and then rub a bit more in ensuring the thumbs are included is one way. (Ref. HCOB 13 Jan 77RB) The point is to feel the hands with the cream on them to see if it has handled the excessively dry hand that is seen as shiny or polished looking. And it now should no longer feel dry. (HCOB 23 Nov 73RB Re-revised 25 May 80) The correct treatment is to use a hand cream but not greasy hand cream or vanishing cream. A good hand cream rubs all the way into the skin and leaves no excess grease. This restores normal electrical contact. Such a hand cream would only have to be applied once per session -- at session start -- as it lasts for a long while. If a cream leaves smears on a can, it is too heavily applied or too little absorbed. (HCOB 25 Apr 75RA Re-revised 25 May 80) 17. DOES THE PC HAVE ARTHRITIC HANDS? ................................. _______ Handling: "A rare pc is so crippled with arthritis that he doesn't make contact fully with the cans. This gives high TA. Use wide wrist straps and you'll get a right read." LRH (HCOB 24 Oct 71RA Re-revised 25 May 80) 18. DOES THE PC LOOSEN HIS GRIP ON THE CANS? .......................... _______ Handling: Check the grip. Does the angle of the cans go across the palms of the pc? Is the natural curl of the fingers sufficient to hold the cans in place, and is the placement of the cans at an angle ensuring that the maximum skin area is touching the cans? (Ref. BOOK OF E-METER DRILLS) See if the palm is touching the can and not elevated off. (Ref. HCOB 13 Jan 77RB) 19. CHECK THE PC'S GRIP DOES HE HOLD THE CANS CORRECTLY?............... _______ Handling: Covered in above section. Also check to see if the pc is holding the cans so tight that it is causing the hands to sweat and read falsely low. (Ref. HCOB 13 Jan 77RB and HCOB 7 Feb 79R E-METER DRILL 5RA) 20. IS THE PC HOT? .................................................... _______ Handling: Get a fan in the room or handle the room so that it is cooler and the pc comfortable. HCOB 21.1.77RB - 7 - Re-rev. 25.5.80 21. HAS THE PC SLEPT WELL? ............................................ _______ Handling: Don't audit a pc who has not had sufficient rest or is physically tired. (Ref. HCO PL 14 Oct 68RA The Auditor's Code) 22. IS THE PC COLD? ................................................... _______ Handling: "A pc sometimes has a falsely high TA. Wrap him in a blanket or get a warmer auditing room. The auditing environment is the responsibility of the auditor." LRH (HCOB 24 Oct 71RA) 28. IS THE PC HUNGRY? ................................................. _______ Handling: Get the pc something to eat and don't audit a pc who has not bad enough to eat or is hungry. (Ref. HCO PL 14 Oct 68RA The Auditor's Code) 24. IS IT TOO LATE AT NIGHT? .......................................... _______ Handling: "Between 2 and 8 A.M. or late at night a pc's TA may be very high. The time depends on when he sleeps usually. This TA will be found normal in regular hours." LRH (HCOB 24 Oct 71RA) 25. IS THE AUDITING BEING DONE NOT IN THE PC'S NORMAL REGULAR AWAKE HOURS? ............................................................ _______ Handling: Covered above. 26. ARE THERE RINGS ON THE PC'S HANDS? ................................ _______ Handling: "Rings on the pc's hands must always be removed. They don't influence TA but they give a false rock slam." LRH (HCOB 24 Oct 71RA) If the rings can't come off use a small strip of paper around them to shield the rings touching the can. 27. IS THE PC WEARING TIGHT SHOES? .................................... _______ Handling: Remove them. (Ref. HCOB 24 Oct 71RA, HCOB 18 Jan 77RB) 28. IS THE PC WEARING TIGHT CLOTHES? .................................. _______ Handling: If it turns out that tight clothing is affecting the TA ensure that the pc doesn't wear tight clothes in future sessions. If possible have the pc remove the tight clothing and see what the effect was that it had on the TA and make sure no more tight clothes are worn in future sessions. 29. IS THE PC USING THE WRONG HAND CREAM? ............................. _______ Handling: Using the reference materials find the right hand cream and test it on the pc. Note TA position. HCOB 21.1.77RB - 8 - Re-rev. 25.5.80 30. IS THE APPLICATION OF THE HAND CREAM CORRECT AND DOES IT COVER THE ENTIRE BODY? ...................................................... _______ Handling: Watch how the pc puts on hand cream and see if it covers the entire hand, thumb included. If not then have the pc put on hand cream covering the entire hand and pick up the cans and note TA position. Some pcs may have to put cream on and wipe it off and then re-apply it. (Ref. HCOB 13 Jan 77RB) 31. IS THE CHAIR THE PC IS SITTING IN COMFORTABLE? .................... _______ Handling: Get a new chair that is comfortable for the pc. 32. IS IT ACTUALLY A CHRONIC HIGH OR LOW TA CASE CONDITION? ........... _______ Handling: C/S Series 53 Assessment or Hi-Lo TA Assessment. Done To F/Ning assessment. So standard tech handles the high and low TA. The C/S Series gives more data on the subject. 33. HAS THE PC GONE INTO DESPAIR OVER HIS TA? ......................... _______ Handling: Handle the false TA with using this list as a guideline so that the cause of false TA is found and fully handled with the pc by the various handlings covered above. When false TA is handled check TA worries, TA hassles and L1C best read. This handling sheet is used in conjunction with the items that are checked. This gives you the way to handle them. Refer to reference material in reference section above for further data on handling a false TA. L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER LRH:bk Copyright $c 1977, 1980 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER